Sunteți pe pagina 1din 306

Q-Filter User manual.

Project # 12389-rev1

Salico Hispania S.A.

ROZAS DE MADRID
C14010-3.039

Egypt
Drunen, September 15, 2017
All rights reserved. Duplication, in whatever form, is not allowed except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v..
Q-Filter R
and Q-Mag R
products are patented or patent applied for. Q-FILTER and Q-MAG are registered trade marks of
Lomapro b.v.. Lomapro
c b.v. 2008-2017.
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Contents

1 General 5
1.1 Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.1 Influent control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.2 Active vacuum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.3 Filter cloth transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.4 Cloth drying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2 Installing the system. 9


2.1 Mechanical installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Electrical installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.1 Signal exchange main control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2 Inlet shut off without main control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3 Pre-startup check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4 First start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3 Operating the system. 13


3.1 Turning on the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3 Unit shut down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4 Turning off the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5 Changing the filter cloth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.6 Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

4 Control system and user interface. 19


4.1 Control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2 Operator interface panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.1 Alarm and message display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.2 Acknowledging alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.3 Messages and warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.4 Retrieve process data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

4.2.5 User menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20


4.2.6 Access parameters via status message display: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2.7 Change the language of the alarms and messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2.8 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3 Alarms and messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.3 Data en instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.4 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5 Siemens Logo! ethernet connections 24


5.1 Ethernet facilities Siemens Logo! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2 Q-Filter side configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.3 Siemens Logo! to Siemens S7-300 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3.1 S7-300 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3.2 S7-300 data memory mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.4 Siemens Logo! to Siemens S7-1200 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.4.1 S7-1200 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.4.2 S7-1200 data memory mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

6 Maintaining the Q-Filter 30


6.1 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.1.1 Instrument air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.1.2 The Logo! utilities menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.1.3 Re-loading the program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.1.4 Changing the IP addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.1.5 Siemens Logo! utility functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2 Q-Filter functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2.1 Level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2.2 Level clean tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.2.3 Level dirty tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.2.4 Influent control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.2.5 Filter cloth functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.2.6 Vacuum functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.2.7 Effluent pump function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.2.8 General equipment failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.2.9 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.2.10 Data acquisition and display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.2.11 Changing user settings and data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.3 Changing parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.3.1 Cloth near end warning setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

2
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

6.3.2 Effluent pump start/stop settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43


6.3.3 Maximum interval filter cloth indexing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.3.4 Set flushing LT-02 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.3.5 Change the language of the alarms and messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.4 Mechanical maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.4.1 Replacing the wheel segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

A Risk analysis 44
A.1 Mechanical hazards (1.3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
A.1.1 Hazards in connection with the stability of the machine/installation (1.3.1). . . . . . . . . 44
A.1.2 Hazards due to the risk of breakage (1.3.2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
A.1.3 Hazards due to falling/ejected objects (1.3.3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
A.1.4 Hazards due to rough surfaces/sharp edges (1.3.4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
A.1.5 Hazards in connection with moving parts (1.3.7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
A.2 Other risks (1.5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.1 Risks due to the electricity supply (1.5.1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.2 Risks due to static electricity (1.5.2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.3 Risks due to other energy supplies (1.5.3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.4 Risks due to extreme temperatures (1.5.5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.5 Risks due to fire (1.5.6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.6 Risks due to explosion(1.5.7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.7 Risks due to the emission of noise (1.5.8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.8 Risks due to vibrations (1.5.9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
A.2.9 Risks due to radiation (1.5.10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2.10 Risks due to external radiation (1.5.11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2.11 Risks due to laser radiation (1.5.12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2.12 Risks due to the emission of hazardous substances (1.5.13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2.13 Risks due to confinement (1.5.14).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2.14 Risks of slipping, stumbling or falling (1.5.15). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2.15 Risks due to lightening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

B Project documents. 47
B.1 Project & process specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
B.2 Spare parts recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

C Wiring diagrams. 60
C.1 Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

D Data sheets. 95
D.1 Operator instruction chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
D.2 Load program from microSD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

E Suppliers manuals. 99
E.1 User manual Siemens Logo! plc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
E.2 User manual Rexroth pneumatic controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
E.3 User manual Endress & Hauser level sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E.4 User manual Endress & Hauser pressure transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
E.5 User manual ifm distance sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
E.6 User manual Telemecanique safety relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
E.7 Data sheet instrument air pressure sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
E.8 User manual Telemecanique beacon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
E.9 User manual Busch vacuum pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
E.10 User manual Cubicon CR+FR centrifugal pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

F Certificates. 304
F.1 EC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

4
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Chapter 1. General
Q-Filter R
is an active vacuum filter which uses an exhauster to create a vacuum of up to 200 mbar at the clean side
of the filter cloth. The high liquid level on the dirty side of the cloth and the maximum pressure drop across the
cloth equal a water column of almost 2,5 meter!

Figure 1.1: The Q-Filter active vacuum filter

The controller monitors the process in real time and controls the pressure drop across the filter cloth, that way
achieving optimal build up of a filter cake. This warrants maximum performance with minimal filter cloth usage.
The system is designed, based on maximum integration of mechanics and control system, resulting in a very
compact, high performance - high efficiency filtration system.

1.1 Principle
The two chambers (see figure 1.2) A (dirty chamber) and B (clean chamber) are positioned above each other and
separated by the filter cloth (2), supported by the sieve plate (1).
Polluted medium runs, through inlet (3), into chamber A and through the filter cloth into chamber B, where the
pump (4) pumps out the filtered medium and forwards it back to the process.
The dirt, accumulating on the filter cloth, builds up a filter cake on the cloth, which increases the resistance and
causes the level in the dirty chamber to rise. At a given point, the exhauster (5) is turned on and creates a vacuum
in chamber B. This causes medium to be pulled through the cloth preventing the level in chamber A from rising
further.

5
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 1.2: The principle


Figure 1.3: Principle controller

As the filter cake on the filter cloth builds up, causing the resistance to increase, the vacuum in chamber B is also
gradually increased, keeping the level in chamber A below the maximum limit. When the vacuum reaches its limit,
the filter cloth is advanced by turning the wheels (6).
Used filter cloth (7) comes out of the unit at the right (outlet side) while new cloth is pulled in from the roll (8) at
the left (inlet side). The cycle starts over again.

1.2 Process control


The Q-Filter R
process control is fully integrated with the mechanical system. A limited number of process param-
eters is continually monitored and processed, ensuring process status availability in real time. Figure 1.3 shows the
principle.
Based on the available process data, the system calculates all settings in real time and decides what control actions
are required. The primary process control parameter is the vacuum in the clean tank. The vacuum is gradually
increased while the filter cake on the cloth builds up, until the maximum value is reached.
The data acquisition is achieved with only 4 sensors; 3 pressure sensors for LT-01 and LT-02 (hydrostatic pressure
sensing) and PT-01 (vacuum) and an optical sensor XT-01 (filter cloth monitoring). The entire filtration process is
monitored and controlled, based on these sensors. An additional level sensor LS-04 (not in figure 1.3) is fitted as a
security measure to detect abnormal high level in the clean tank.
Process control is achieved through 4 components, the effluent pump P-01, which pumps out the filtered medium,
the exhauster P-02, which pumps air out of the clean chamber to create a vacuum, drive M-01 which advances the
filter cloth and a signal, XS-08, which serves to turn the incoming flow on and off.
The data processing is the most important part of the controller. Based on the acquired real time data it continually
calculates at which point creating a vacuum must start, how high the vacuum should be, at which point the filter
cloth should be advanced and how much it should be advanced. Thereby it responds dynamically to the character-
istics of the incoming flow. An intermittent incoming flow for instance results in a different process control than a
constant incoming flow.
Via the operator interface panel real time data and status messaged can be displayed. The user can influence the
process via this interface, but due to the dynamic behavior of the control system, an application dependent setup
of the system is not required. There are only few user accessible parameters which only serve for optimization.

6
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

1.3 Characteristics.
1.3.1 Influent control.
The Q-Filter R
is designed to be available at all times and respond to any fluid coming. In case of a fault which
makes normal operation impossible, it must however be possible to stop any incoming flow. For that purpose the
Q-Filter
R
controller has a System ready and an Influent stop signal. The System ready signal is turned off
when the Q-Filter R
is not available, for instance if there is an alarm or if the system is switched off.
The Influent stop signal is used in situations where, for a very brief period of time, the incoming flow needs to be
interrupted. This is typically the case when there is a high incoming flow while, at the same time, the filter cloth
needs to be indexed. There is also a separate output which can be used, for this purpose, to directly close an inlet
valve.

1.3.2 Active vacuum.


The Q-Filter R
is an active vacuum filter, which means it uses an actively controlled vacuum to achieve optimal
filtration and minimal filter cloth usage. The way it works is that the controller dynamically calculates what
vacuum is required in any given circumstance. That way there is never more vacuum applied than necessary,
preventing compression and blocking of the filter cloth.

1.3.3 Filter cloth transport.

Figure 1.4: Install new filter cloth. Figure 1.5: Drying section

The unique and patented filter transport mechanism advances the filter cloth through the unit without a problem,
also with a high vacuum and large incoming flows. Different types and qualities of filter cloth can be used without
the risk of tearing or perforation.
Placing a new roll of filter cloth can be done during normal operation; there is no need to turn off the Q-Filter
R
.
See paragraph 3.5 for detailed instructions.

1.3.4 Cloth drying.


The used cloth is dried in two different ways, as shown in figure 1.5. First the wet cloth passes over a drain box
(1). When drying, the exhauster (2) pulls in air through the wet cloth and the drain box, that way sucking fluid out

7
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

of the cloth. The liquid goes into clean chamber B. Further drying of the cloth is achieved by blowing the exhaust
air from the exhauster along the free hanging section of the used cloth (4) .

8
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Chapter 2. Installing the system.


Every system is completely tested in the workshop, prior to shipment, and ready for immediate use. A setup of the
unit is not necessary; all parameters are automatically set and optimized once the unit is taken into service.
The following process diagram may differ from the one for your system. See the Project & Process Specifications
(attachment B.1) for the exact details necessary for a proper installation.

Figure 2.1: The process diagram.

2.1 Mechanical installation.


Mechanical installation involves the following steps:

1. Place the unit in the designated location on a solid and stable surface.
2. Connect the inlet piping (A). The automatic valve (9) may or may not be included in the supply.
3. Connect the outlet piping (B).
4. Connect the drain (D) to enable emptying the system.
5. Connect the overflow (E) to a suitable connection or drain. Piping must be large enough for
incoming flow.
6. Connect the condensate drain (F) (see figure 2.2) to a suitable connection or drain.
7. Connect instrument air supply.
8. Place a collection bin at the outlet side for the used filter cloth.

9
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Connection (G) is a sample point and must not be con-


nected during installation. It can also be used to vent
the pump after the clean tank has been emptied.

2.2 Electrical installation.


Electrical installation involves the following steps:

1. Connect the power supply cable.


2. If there is a main control system,
connect the cable for the signal ex-
change (see 2.2.1).
3. If there is no main control system,
check the provisions and connec-
tions which will stop the incoming
flow when required (see 2.2.2).

2.2.1 Signal exchange main control sys-


tem. Figure 2.2: The condensate drain.

The following signals are available to connect the Q-


Filter
R
controller to a central control system or con-
trol external equipment that feeds medium to the Q-
Filter
R
.

XA-03 Alarm signal out.


XA-04 Warning signal out.

XS-08 System ready signal out.


XS-05/XSV-01 Influent stop signal out/ Inlet shut-
off valve.
XS-09 Enable from main control system in.

The signal exchange takes place by means of volt free contacts. The function of the different signals is as follows:

XA-03 Alarm output signal.

The output contact for this signal is normally closed and will open in case there is an abnormal situation, causing
the Q-Filter
R
to shut down. If this alarm occurs it will be necessary for an operator to go the the Q-Filter
R
, resolve
any alarm conditions and restart the system. While this alarm signal is active, the red light will either be on or
blinking.

XA-04 Warning output signal.

The output contact for this signal is normally closed and will open in case there is a condition that requires operator
attention but does not cause a shutdown. This primary cause for this signal is that the filter cloth is nearly finished
and a new roll of filter cloth needs to be placed soon. While this warning signal is active, the yellow light will be
blinking.

10
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XS-08 System ready signal output.

The output contact for this signal will close when the Q-Filter
R
is ready to receive medium. This signal therefore
can also be treated as a system running signal since the Q-Filter R
does not initiate any independent action but
only responds to incoming fluid.
If this signal is off (contact open) the flow to the Q-Filter
R
must be stopped! The system has no buffer and if the
incoming flow continues while this signal is off, it will overflow. Therefore the main control system must stop any
pumps or other equipment from discharging fluid to the Q-Filter R
.
This signal will also be turned off in case of an alarm (XA-03).

XS-05 Influent stop / XSV-01 inlet shut-off valve.

The output signal for XS-05 will be turned off if a situation occurs where the Q-Filter
R
is unable to handle the
incoming flow. This will be very short (a few seconds only) and may occur every now and then when the filter
cloth needs to be indexed.
If the unit is supplied with an automatic shutoff valve in the inlet to the Q-Filter
R
this valve is closed, together with
turning off signal XS-05.
If there is an automatic valve in the inlet which was not supplied with the unit, this valve can be controlled from the
Q-Filter R
control system directly. If that is required connect a cable between the solenoid valve and the relevant
terminals in the control panel. See the wiring diagrams (attachment C) for more details.
Because the valve closes for 10 seconds maximum, it is not absolutely necessary to stop any pumps or other devices
that feed medium into the Q-Filter R
.
Signal XS-05 is also turned off, and valve XSV-01 closed, when signal XS-08 is turned off (alarm or unit turned
off).

XS-09 System enable input signal.

This input signal can be used by a central control system to shut off the Q-Filter
R
. In all systems this signal is
bridged with a jumper on the terminal strip before shipment.
This signal is NOT a start/stop signal but a shut-down signal. If the enable signal is turned off by the central
controller it will be necessary to locally reset and restart the Q-Filter
R
.
We strongly recommend not to use this signal unless there is a very good reason for it. If, for whatever reason, the
Q-Filter R
should be stopped from pumping off fluid, this should be done by stopping the flow into the Q-Filter R
.

R
R
If the enable signal is turned off and there is still fluid going to the Q-Filter , the Q-Filter will overflow.

2.2.2 Inlet shut off without main control system.


In case of a fault, or a temporary condition requiring so, the control system will turn off the signals XS-08 system
ready (see 2.2.1) and XS-05 influent stop, to stop the incoming flow. There should only be fluid going to the
Q-Filter R
if both signals are on.
The controller provides both a volt free contact output and a 24VDC output for this purpose. The volt free contact
can be used to stop a feed pump, by wiring this contact into the pump controller. The 24vdc signal is meant to
control a shutoff valve in the inlet to the Q-Filter
R
. It is possible to use both features at the same time.
Make sure proper provisions are in place to allow the Q-Filter
R
controller to interrupt or stop the incoming flow.

11
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

2.3 Pre-startup check.


Before the installation can be taken into operation, the following needs to be checked:

1. Make sure the power supply is ok.


All three phases must be checked for the correct voltages and continuity.
2. Check the instrument air.
Behind the covers, close to the instrument air connection, a regulator with pressure gauge is
mounted. Do not adjust the regulator; the pressure should be 3 bar minimal.
3. Check all connections and valves.
All piping, couplings and other connections should be checked for tightness. Make sure all
valves in the inlet and outlet piping are open and that the drain valve is closed. Also check if
the maintenance hatch in the clean tank is properly closed.
4. Turn on the main switch on the control panel.
The controller is initialized and possibly the red light starts blinking. See 4.3 for detailed
information on alarms and messages.
5. Check rotation direction.
The easiest way to check the rotation direction is with the filter cloth transport. To enable
starting filter cloth transport manually, the key switch on the front of the control panel must
be turned right. Open the hatch at the outlet side of the unit and push the button for the cloth
transport very briefly while checking if the rotation direction is correct. If not, exchange two
of the wires for the incoming power supply. Now all devices will have the correct rotation
direction.
6. Acknowledge alarms.
With the OK key on the operator interface panel acknowledge any alarms that are present. Wait
shortly after pressing the OK key until the alarm disappears from the display.
There should be no other alarms, and the red lamp should be continuously on.

ATTENTION!
The key switch bridges various safety devices, which brings a certain risk, and therefore should
only be turned on by trained and experienced personnel.

2.4 First start.


Now the unit can be turned on and the incoming flow can be enabled, as described in paragraph 3.1.
When starting the unit for the first time it is important to observe the functioning of the effluent pump and of the
inlet stop or shutoff. Note that the effluent pump will be filled with air and needs to be vented. This can be done
using the sample point valve (connection (F) in figure 2.1.
After turning on the unit, observe whether the effluent pump actually starts (once the level in the clean chamber
reaches high setpoint), and the medium is pumped out effectively from the clean chamber.
When the unit is running, and the effluent pump is functioning as required, test if the incoming flow is stopped
when necessary. This can be tested by stopping the flow using menu #1 and F2 (see ).
All systems are supplied with filter cloth fitted. That may not be the right cloth for your application and it may be
necessary to replace the cloth with the proper type. See paragraph 3.5 on how to change the cloth.

12
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Chapter 3. Operating the system.


The Q-Filter R
is a fully automatic system which, under normal circumstances, requires no attention. Once turned
on, and the inlet enabled, the system is ready to receive and treat the polluted medium.

3.1 Turning on the system.


The interlocks for starting and stopping the unit are shown in figure 3.3.

Resolve and acknowledge alarms.


A full list of all the possible alarms and messages can be found in paragraph 4.3.
To acknowledge an alarm, the alarm message has to be visible in the display. Use the arrow up/down keys
to change to the right message if necessary.
If the red light is steady on, all alarm messages have been resolved and acknowledged and the control system
can be reset by turning the reset/on switch to the reset position. The red light will extinguish.

Turn system on.


The system is turned on by turning the reset/on switch to the on position. The green light will flash,
indicating the system is ready.
Enable the inlet by pushing the F1 key to go to menu #1 and then pushing the F2 key. The green light will
go steady and the Q-Filter R
is ready to receive fluid.

3.2 Normal operation


In normal operation the display shows two bars, rep-
resenting the level in the dirty tank (LT-2) on the left
and the vacuum in the clean tank (PT-01) on the right
(figure 3.1).
As the level in the dirty tank rises, the left bar increases
in height. When the level in the dirty tank gets close
to the maximum, the exhauster is turned on and vac-
uum is generated. The vacuum is gradually increased
to maintain the level in the dirty tank, indicated by the
right bar increasing in height, until the maximum vac-
uum setpoint is reached and the filter cloth is indexed.
Alarms and messages have a higher priority and will
hide this screen; process data have a lower priority
and will be behind it. Navigate with the arrow-up and Figure 3.1: The operator interface.
arrow-down keys to messages with a higher, respec-
tively a lower priority.
Once the incoming flow is enabled, the controller executes 3, in principle independent, control loops as shown in
figure 3.2.
The control loop for effluent pump P-01 only responds to the level in the clean tank and starts P-01 on high level
and stops the pump on low level.
The vacuum and the filter cloth indexing are controlled, based on the level in the dirty tank (LT-02). Once the
level reaches the vacuum start setpoint, the vacuum is gradually increased until the level reaches the index cloth
setpoint. At that point, the vacuum is turned off and the cloth is indexed.

13
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LT-01 LT-01
Operational start

Operational stop
No Yes
Below Above
P-01 (effluent pump)
low setpoint? high setpoint?
Stop

Yes No
Operational stop:
P-01 (effluent pump)
P-02 stops set time (30 sec.) after
LT-02 drops below vacuum-start
setpoint.

LT-02 PT-01
P-02 (exhauster)

System ready for

vacuum
Below No
operation Calculate vacuum
vacuum start PCV-01 (vac. control valve)
Influent setpoint time
setpoint?
started/enabled Control vacuum
Yes

PCV-01 (vac. control valve)

P-02 (exhauster)

LT-02 PT-01
P-02 (exhauster)
M-01
ON
Yes M-01 (cloth forward)
Above
advance cloth OFF
T = ...

setpoint? M-01 (cloth forward)


Advance cloth
No

Figure 3.2: Normal operation.

The setpoints vacuum start and index filter cloth, and the length the filter cloth is indexed, are continuously
re-calculated, dependent on the characteristics of the incoming flow.

14
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

3.3 Unit shut down.

Alarm(s) System ready for


No Yes Reset/on Yes Reset/on Yes Yes
acknowledged with F1 Key operation
switch in reset switch in on
OK key? pressed? Influent
position? position?
started/enabled

No No No

XS-08 (influent) Operational start


No

LT-02 sensor error Yes P-01 (effluent pump) P-01 (effluent pump) Operational stop
Alarm
LS-04 high high level
condition?
XS-02 filter cloth end
P-02 (exhauster) P-02 (exhauster) Stop

M-01 (filter cloth)


Operational stop:

P-01 stops once LT-01 drops below low


No setpoint.
PT-01 sensor error Vacuum (P-02) will stop once LT-02 drops
LT-01 sensor error below vacuum-start setpoint.
Yes P-01 (effluent pump) XS-08 (influent)
ESD-relay Alarm
P-01 safety relay condition?
P-02 safety relay P-02 (exhauster) M-01 (filter cloth)
M-01 safety relay
PS-03 instr. air

Figure 3.3: System start/stop.

The interlocks for starting and stopping the unit are shown in figure 3.3.
All process parameters and signals are monitored and in case of a fault, the unit is shut down and a text message is
shown in the display.
It is important to know that level measurements LT-01 and LT-02 are dependent on the instrument air pressure
which means that an instrument air fault may also result in alarm messages for LT-01 and LT-02. These two
sensors measure the hydrostatic pressure in the clean tank and dirty tank.
During normal operation, the green light will be steady on. The incoming flow is interrupted shortly in case of an
abnormal high level in the clean or dirty tank, in which case the green light will flash.

3.4 Turning off the system.


The installation can be turned off in three different ways.

Stop the incoming flow.


Push the F1 key (menu #1) and then the F2 key. The green light will start to flash. This function is used to
shortly interrupt or block the incoming flow. The system remains operational and equipment (pump P-01,
exhauster P-02, cloth indexing M-01) may still start and stop depending on the conditions.
Take the unit out of service.
Turn the reset/on switch to the reset position. The effluent pump (P-01) and the exhauster (P-02) may
continue for a short period of time, until the dirty and clean compartment are empty, but will not start
again. The unit can be taken into service again by turning the reset/on switch to the on position and pushing
the F1 key (menu #1) and then the F2 key.
Emergency stop.
With the emergency stop buttons all equipment is shut down immediately and blocked from restarting. The
red light will start flashing. To restart the system, the emergency shutdown buttons must be released and the
alarm acknowledged.

15
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Important
An emergency stop will also be initiated when the cover on the outlet side is opened without the
key switch being turned on.

3.5 Changing the filter cloth.


The cloth can be changed during normal operation.

IMPORTANT!
To change the filter cloth, it is necessary to turn on the key switch. This key switch bridges various
safety features allowing access to the interior of the unit while it is still in full service. This presents
a potential risk and use of the key switch must therefore be restricted to trained and authorized
personnel only.

1. Turn on key switch.


The key switch bridges the no filter cloth signal to enable changing the filter cloth without
shutting down the system. It also enables the push button and foot switch for indexing the filter
cloth.
2. Manually index the filter cloth
Index the cloth 20 to 30 cm to allow the level in the dirty tank to drop. This will prevent
automatic indexing of the cloth while changing the roll. If automatic indexing of the filter cloth
cannot be excluded, disable the influent using the F1 and F2 keys (see above).
3. Cut off the old cloth.
The old cloth must be cut, using a sharp knife, as shown in figure 3.4. It is important that
sufficient length remains to pull in the new cloth.

Figure 3.4: Cut off the old cloth. Figure 3.5: Insert the counter weight.

4. Remove the old, empty, roll.


ATTENTION!
A counter weight is inserted inside the carton roll which could drop out. This
counter weight is essential for a trouble free cloth transport through the unit
and must be re-inserted in the new roll as shown in figure 3.5.
5. Insert counter weight inside new roll and place roll (see figure 3.5).
Always place the roll such that the cloth is de-reeled from the top (the outside of the filter cloth
roll faces the incoming liquid).
6. De-reel the new roll +/- 1 m (see figure 3.6).
To ensure that the new cloth can easily be pulled inside by the old cloth, de-reel at least 1 meter
from the new roll.

16
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 3.7: Place the new cloth underneath the old


Figure 3.6: De-reel approximately 1 m.
cloth.

7. Place the new cloth underneath the old cloth.


Place the new cloth underneath it as shown in figure 3.7. Push the new cloth forward as much
as possible to make sure it will be pulled in by the remainder of the old cloth in the following
step.
It is important that the new cloth is fed into the unit as straight as possible.
8. Push down the cloth and index manually.
The first 10 cm are critical here. The new cloth must move together with the old cloth from the
start. Push down the two layers of cloth with both hands (see figure 3.8) and actuate the foot
switch.
If the new cloth is not pulled in, try pushing forward the new cloth only, while actuating the
foot switch.
If you do not manage to pull in the new cloth using the remainder of old cloth, or if no cloth is
inside the unit, push the new cloth through the slot as far as possible while actuating the foot
switch. To minimize the friction between the rubber on the main wheels and the stainless steel
surface, wet the interior of the dirty chamber first.

Figure 3.8: Push the new cloth onto the old. Figure 3.9: Pull the free length inside.

9. Index the new cloth through the unit.


When the cloth is pulled in approximately 0,5m (figure 3.9), go to the exit side and press the
push button until the new cloth comes out and the remainder of old cloth falls down. Push back
the levers left and right, to raise the small wheels, and straighten the cloth. Do not forget to
bring down the small wheels again and pull the two levers towards you completely.
Do NOT index the new cloth only half way through the unit. Otherwise, at the first automatic
indexing of the filter cloth, only the remainder of the old cloth will be advanced and the new

17
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

cloth will be stuck.


10. Acknowledge the warning and end procedure
Close the cover and acknowledge the Cloth (nearly) finished alarm/warning, after which the
key switch can be turned off and the key removed.

3.6 Special functions


The controller monitors the amount of filter cloth on the roll and generates a warning, with the orange light flashing,
when it is almost finished. If no new roll is placed in time, and the cloth is completely finished, the system will
shut down.
With the key switch in the on position, the unit shut down on cloth end and the safety switch on the cover on the
outlet side are bridged, which is necessary to enable cloth changing.

IMPORTANT:
With the key switch in the on position and the hatch opened, the unit will function normally. That
means that, in the event of an (unexpected) start of the transport mechanism, there is a risk of
fingers or limbs getting caught in the mechanism. The key switch should therefore be used by
trained and authorized personnel only. The key should never be left in the switch.

18
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Chapter 4. Control system and user interface.


4.1 Control system.
The Q-Filter R
is provided with a control system which monitors all conditions and generates (alarm) messages,
provides real time and accumulated data and gives access to parameters. See section 4.3 for a complete list of all
alarms and messages.

4.2 Operator interface panel.


The control system is fitted with an operator interface panel (see figure 4.1) which is used to show status and alarm
messages and to change parameters.

4.2.1 Alarm and message display.


Every message has its own priority and messages with
a higher priority will hide messages with a lower prior-
ity. Use the arrow-up (higher priority) and arrow-down
(lower priority) keys to navigate through the messages.
Alarm messages have higher priority than status mes-
sages, status message have higher priority than process
data displays.

4.2.2 Acknowledging alarms.


An alarm that comes up (red light blinking; see bea-
con) must be acknowledged by turning the reset/on
switch to the reset position and pressing the OK key
Figure 4.1: The operator interface panel.
on the keypad (it takes a few seconds to respond). The
alarm must be shown on the display to acknowledge it;
use arrow up/down keys to navigate to the right mes-
sage first. If the cause of the alarm has been resolved,
the alarm message will disappear; otherwise nothing happens.
Every alarm message has a code (for instance A1) which clearly identifies it. A full list of all alarms can be found
in paragraph 4.3.

4.2.3 Messages and warnings.


Messages are for information only and require no operator attention.
Warnings indicate that something is not ok, which requires the attention from the operator. The cause of a warning
will not interfere with the normal functioning of the unit, except for the message No remote enable..

19
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

4.2.4 Retrieve process data.


During normal operation the display shows the current process status in real time (see figure 4.1). The display
shows the level in the dirty tank (left column) and the vacuum in the clean tank (right column).
Further process data is available in two separate screens, one with the current process data and master setpoints
(C1) and one with the calculated and accumulated data (C2). These screens are only accessible when the display
back light is on, which is the case after a function key is pressed and when the key switch is on. Use the arrow-
up/down keys to navigate.

4.2.5 User menus.


The control system provides 2 user menus which can be accessed by pressing F1. Pressing F1 once displays menu
1, pressing a second time displays menu 2. Pressing F1 once more returns to the status display.
Menu 1 provides the following three functions, selected by using the function key indicated:

F2 Turn the influent on and off.


F3 Reset accumulated data.
F4 Run pump P-01.

For more information on the use of the F2 key in menu 1 see section 3.1. For more information on resetting
accumulated data, see paragraph 6.2.11.
The function F4, run pump P-01, is to enable emptying the clean tank prior to maintenance which requires opening
the clean tank or disconnecting the effluent pump. Pump P-01 will run as long as function key F4 is pressed,
regardless the level in the clean tank.
Menu 2 provides the following three functions, selected by using the function key indicated:

F2 Set maximum vacuum setpoint.


F3 Set minimum cloth index length.
F4 Flush LT-02.

See paragraph 6.2.11 for information on how to change the maximum set-point for the vacuum (F2), see paragraph
6.2.11 for information on how to change the minimum length for indexing the cloth (F3).
The flush LT-02 function is provided for maintenance purposes. Each time the F2 key is pushed, air is injected
in the connection to LT-02 for a set time. This is to help clear the passage for the LT-02 sensor connection. See
paragraph ssec:level-dirty-tank for more information on the subject.

4.2.6 Access parameters via status message display:


To access a parameter via a message display, navigate to the right message and then press and hold the ESC key
for more than 10 seconds until a thin line cursor is displayed on the screen, at the first value shown. With the arrow
up/down keys navigate to the parameter that needs changing and use the OK key to enter editing mode. In editing
mode, the arrow left and right keys are used to select the digit and the arrow up and down keys to change the value
of the selected digit.
See the maintenance section 6.1.5 to access parameters via the Logo! utilities menu.

4.2.7 Change the language of the alarms and messages:


See the maintenance section 6.1.5 on how to change the language of the alarms and messages.

20
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

4.2.8 Beacon
The control system is provided with a beacon with red, orange and green light, which have the following meaning.

Red light flashing: There are active alarms that need to be resolved.
Red light steady: Any alarms have been resolved; the unit can be reset.

Orange light flashing: There is a condition that requires attention.


Orange light steady: System in maintenance mode.
Green light flashing: System operational but not yet on line or temporarily off line.
Green light steady: Normal operation.

If the red light is flashing, any current alarm conditions (see display) must be resolved and the alarm message must
be acknowledged. In some instances it is necessary to turn the reset/on switch to the reset position before an alarm
can be acknowledged. If all alarms have been resolved and acknowledged, the red light will change from flashing
to steady or go off. If the light is steady on, the reset/on switch must be turned to the reset position.
If the orange light is flashing, there is something that requires operator attention (see display). If the condition
causing the warning has been resolved, it may be necessary to acknowledge the message with the OK key to make
it disappear.
If the green light is flashing, normal operation is (temporarily) interrupted. If an operator action is required to
return to normal operation, this will be indicated with a message on the display.
It is possible that the orange light is on (or flashing) when the unit is in normal operation (green light) or shut down
(red light). In all situations, the display will show detailed information on the current status.

Lamp test: When the key switch is turned on, all three lights will go on for 1 second.

4.3 Alarms and messages.


All alarms and message have a code, starting with a letter (A, B, C or D) followed by a number, that links it to the
explanations in this section.

4.3.1 Alarms
All messages with a code starting with A are shut down alarms. They represent conditions that make it impossible
for the system to function properly. The following alarms are implemented:

A1 LT-01 level clean tank


A1.a LS-04 high level sensor in clean tank sees fluid. See 6.2.2.
A1.b The signal from sensor LT-01 is out of range. See 6.2.2
A1.c The LT-01 level remains high for too long.
A2 LT-02 level dirty tank
A2.a Cloth was indexed too frequently. See 6.2.3.
A2.b The signal from sensor LT-02 is out of range. See 6.2.3
A2.c The LT-02 level remains high for too long.

21
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

A3 XT-01 Filter cloth sensor.


A3.a There is no filter cloth. See 6.2.5.
A3.b The signal from sensor XT-01 is out of range. See 6.2.5
A4 The signal from sensor PT-01 is out of range. See 6.2.6

A5 One of the circuit breakers for P-01, P02 or M-02 has tripped. See 6.2.8
A6 PS-03 instrument air pressure too low or no air. See 6.2.8
A7 ESD button pushed or cover opened with key switch off. See 6.2.8

4.3.2 Warnings
The following messages, with the code starting with the letter B, represent warnings. They indicate conditions
that require attention but do not interfere with the normal functioning of the system. Except for the enable signal,
message B1, the system will continue normal operation when one of the message below is indicated.

B1 The enable signal, XS-03, from the main controller is off. See 6.2.9
B2 The key switch, H-06, is on. See 6.2.9.

B3 Pump P-01 run time. See 6.2.7.


B3.a Pump P-01 is running more than 85% of the time. See 6.2.7.
B3.b Level LT-01 is not dropping with P-01 running. See 6.2.7.
B3.c The incoming average flow is more than the units capacity. See 6.2.4.
B3.d Signal from LT-01 is unstable.
B3.e Signal from LT-02 is unstable.
B4 The filter cloth is nearly at its end. See 6.2.5.

4.3.3 Data en instructions


The messages in group C provide information to assist in the operation of the system and make it possible to
influence the behavior of the Q-Filter
R
.

C1 Display of sensor data and main setpoints. See 6.2.10.


C2 Display of accumulated data. See 6.2.10.
C3 System start: status ok, enable system by turning H-01 reset/on to the on position.

C4 System start: status ok, enable system by turning H-01 to reset en back to on position.
C5 System start: status ok, enable influent via menu #1 (F1) and F2.
C6 Reset accumulated data. See 6.2.11.
C7 Change setpoint for maximum vacuum. See 6.2.11.

C8 Change setpoint for minimum cloth indexing length. See 6.2.11.

22
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

4.3.4 General information


The last group, group D, is meant to provide information on the operational status.

D1 Influent temporarily stopped because of high level LT-01. See 6.2.4.

D2 Influent temporarily stopped because of high level LT-02. See 6.2.4.


D3 Live display; graphic representation LT-02 and PT-01.

23
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Chapter 5. Siemens Logo! ethernet connections


5.1 Ethernet facilities Siemens Logo!
From version 0BA7 on it is possible to connect the Logo! to an ethernet network. Via this ethernet connection the
Logo! can be connected to multiple Logo! base modules, to Siemens HMI units and Siemens S7 controllers. With
version 0BA8 the ethernet connection is also used to connect the TDE (the Logo! operator interface panel) with
the base module.
Communication between a Logo! base module and a remote device takes place by exchange of blocks of data.
Basically two different types of data can be transferred between a Logo! base module and an other, compatible,
device. These are direct input/output data and variable memory data.
Via the transfer of input/output data a Logo! base module can be given access to inputs/outputs of a remote devices
or the remote device is given direct access to the inputs/outputs of the base module. Via the transfer of variable
memory data, parameters and values of function blocks from the logo program can be transferred to remote devices
or set by the remote devices.

5.2 Q-Filter side configuration.


The Q-Filter R
controller is completely pre-configured for communication with other Logo! systems or Siemens S7
controllers. Only the following settings are project dependent and need to be specified by or agreed with the client.

The IP addresses of the Logo! and the host system.


The TSAP address for the Logo! and the host system.
The data block addresses at the host side.

The IP address range is usually determined by the clients network and the IP address set in the Logo! will have to
be in the this range.
The TSAP address for the first Logo! is normally set at 20.00. If more than one Logo! is to be connected TSAP
address will be specified.
The data block address is the address of the data block which was created on the host side (see hereafter).
Since the Q-Filter R
is a stand-alone system which functions independent from a main control system, direct access
to inputs/outputs is not implemented and all data transfer if done through the transfer of a single block from the
variable data memory. Appendix ?? on page ?? shows the memory mapping at the Q-filter R
side.
Except for the last byte (byte 37), all data bytes are transferred from the Q-Filter
R
controller to a remote system.

R
Only byte 37 is transferred from the remote system to the Q-Filter controller.
The first 4 variables in the above table are the measured values from the 4 sensors. The values transferred are the
same as the values shown in the Measured values screen on the Q-Filter R
controller. Each value takes 2 bytes of
memory (WORD size). See paragraph 6.2.10 on page 41 for more information.
The following 4 variables are the calculated values which are the same as what is shown in the Accumulated data
screen on the controller. The first two values take 2 bytes of memory (WORD size), the last two take 4 bytes of
memory each (DWORD size). See paragraph 6.2.10 on page 41 for more information.
Bytes 32, 33 and part of byte 34 represent the operational status of the Q-Filter
R
system.

Byte 32, bits 0 thru 6, represent the alarm messages A1 thru A7

24
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Byte 33, bits 0 thru 4, represent the warning messages B1 thru B5


Byte 34, bits 0 and 1, represent the message D1 and D2

See paragraph 4.3 on page 21 for a detailed explanation of the alarms and messages.
The remainder of byte 34, bits 4 thru 7, duplicate the physical output signals from the Q-Filter
R
control system,
which are hard-wired to a main control system if no data communication is used. See paragraph 2.2.1 on page 10
for a detailed discussion of these signals.
The last byte, byte 37, is transferred from the remote controller to the Q-Filter R
control system. This offers the
remote controller the possibility to affect the operation of the Q-Filter
R
controller.
Bit 0 from byte 37, duplicates the Enable input signal to the Q-Filter
R
control system. Bit 1 is spare and has
currently no function.

5.3 Siemens Logo! to Siemens S7-300 connection


In the communication between a Logo! and an S7-300 system the Logo! acts as client and the S7-300 as the server.
The communication is started from the Logo! side.

5.3.1 S7-300 configuration.


To set up the communication at the S7-300 side, create a new hardware configuration and add an ethernet subnet
as shown in figure 5.1.

Figure 5.1: Create new project.

Than change to NetPro, select your CPU and insert a new connection (see figure 5.2 on the following page). Select
Unspecified and set S7 connection as the type (figure 5.3 on the next page).
Edit the properties of the new connection. Enter the IP address of the Logo! here and disable Establish an active
connection. See figure 5.4 on the following page). Change the address details and adjust the TSAP address (see
figure 5.5 on the next page).

25
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 5.3: Create an unspecified connection.


Figure 5.2: Insert a new connection.

Figure 5.5: Enter address details..


Figure 5.4: Edit connection properties.

5.3.2 S7-300 data memory mapping.


To complete the setup, a new data block must be created in Step 7 and the data which is transferred to/from the
Logo! must be mapped to it. Figure 5.6 on the following page shows an example of a configured data block.
Appendix ?? on page ?? shows the memory mapping at the Q-filter R
side.

Important
The data block details must be properly setup at the Logo! side. Therefore, the block number and
addresses must be passed on to Lomapro b.v. so that the Q-Filter R
controller can be properly set
up prior to shipment.

26
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 5.6: Example data block S7-300.

5.4 Siemens Logo! to Siemens S7-1200 connection


In the communication between a Logo! and an S7-1200 system the Logo! acts as client and the S7-1200 as the
server. The communication is started from the Logo! side.

5.4.1 S7-1200 configuration.


To set up the communication at the S7-1200 side, create a hardware configuration in Step7 Basic V11 (see fig-
ure 5.7). Enter the IP address in the CPU under PROFINET interface and add a new subnet as shown in figure 5.8
on the next page.

Figure 5.7: Create Hardware configuration.

Than add a new connection in the Network view as shown in figure 5.9 on the following page). Select Unspecified
and set S7 connection as the type (figure 5.10 on the next page). Make sure you disable Establish an active
connection.
Edit the properties of the new connection. Enter the IP address of the Logo! here (see figure 5.11 on the following
page). Change the address details and adjust the TSAP address (see figure 5.12 on the next page).

27
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 5.8: Enter IP address.

Figure 5.9: Add a new connection.


Figure 5.10: Create an unspecified connection.

Figure 5.12: Enter address details..

Figure 5.11: Edit connection properties.

5.4.2 S7-1200 data memory mapping.


To complete the setup, a new data block must be created in the S7-1200 (see figure 5.13 on the following page)
and the data which is transferred to/from the Logo! must be mapped to it. Figure 5.14 on the next page shows an
example of a configured data block. Appendix ?? on page ?? shows the memory mapping at the Q-filter R
side.

Important
The data block details must be properly setup at the Logo! side. Therefore, the block number and
addresses must be passed on to Lomapro b.v. so that the Q-Filter R
controller can be properly set
up prior to shipment.

28
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 5.14: Example data block S7-1200

Figure 5.13: Example create data block S7-1200

Figure 5.15: Memory mapping S7-1200.

29
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Q-Filter


6.1 Control system

Figure 6.1: The upper part with Siemens Logo!. Figure 6.2: The lower part of the control panel.

The Q-Filter R
is provided with a control system which monitors all conditions and generates an (alarm) message
in case any of the components is not functioning as required.
The controller is based on standard PLC hardware (Siemens Logo!), but is not a user programmable system. The
software, and the algorithms used to control the filtration process, are proprietary and protected with a password.
It is not necessary to have access to the program to use, operate and maintain the Q-Filter R
. All parameters and
process data that are relevant for the user are accessible via the operator interface panel and even all input and
output signals, including analog I/O, are accessible to check the status or obtain actual values.
The control system cabinet consists of two parts, mounted together. The upper part is visible and holds the con-
troller, the various sensors and the operator controls. The lower part, which sits behind the blue covers, contains
the motor switches and circuit breakers and the terminal strips.

6.1.1 Instrument air.


The control system uses instrument air for the level measurements and for the vacuum control system. That makes
the instrument air supply critical and is therefore monitored by a pressure switch. The switch is shown on page
12 on the control system wiring diagrams (see C) and is mounted inside the upper part of the control system. The
pressure switch is adjustable and should be set at 4 bar minimum.
5 cm

30
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 6.3: Inserting the microSD memory card.

6.1.2 The Logo! utilities menu.


The Logo! provides access to various settings and functions via the utilities menu. The menu is accessed by
moving down (arrow down key) to the date/time screen and then pressing ESC.
The Logo! can be in OP mode (Operator) or in Admin mode, with most of the functions hidden in OP (Operator)
mode.
If the Logo! is in OP mode when selecting Setup from the menu, you will see the option "Switch to ADMIN".
Select it and press OK. Now you will be asked to enter the password, which is LOGO (capital letters). Confirm
with OK.
See the Siemens manual abstract E.1 for a detailed discussion of the utilities functions.

6.1.3 Re-loading the program.


If the controller hardware needs replacement, the program can easily be loaded using the memory module or
(micro)SD memory card which is supplied with the system or with the spare parts. See the abstract from the
Siemens manual (document E.1) for instructions on how to replace the controller hardware.
If no memory module or (micro)SD Card is available, send an email to support@q-filtration.eu with the serial
number of the controller (on the control panel type shield).
Load the program as follows:

1. Turn off the power to the Siemens Logo!


2. Place the memory module in the slot at the front of the controller (figure 6.3).
3. Power up the Siemens Logo! The program is uploaded into the controller and the display will
change to show the main menu. Select Start and press OK to start running the new program.
If the program starts as usual, no new program has been loaded and the system will still be
running the old program.
4. Remove the memory module from the slot.

Do not leave the memory module inserted; once powered up, it can be removed and stored for future use.
For more detailed instructions see attachment D.2. See the Siemens manual abstract E.1 for a detailed discussion
of the utilities functions.

Important
It is not possible that the software, stored in internal memory, is corrupted or erased by the system
itself. However, the software is automatically erased if the wrong password is entered 3 times! If
this occurs, reload the software using the memory module as described above.

31
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

6.1.4 Changing the IP addresses.


Both the Siemens Logo! controller and the TDE operator interface panels have IP addresses to identify them in a
network. The IP addresses for the controller and the TDE panel must be in the same range. Furthermore there is
an IP address setting in the TDE which tells the TDE to which Logo! controller it must connect.
Push arrow down key until date/time screen appears and push ESC to start. You will now see the main menu with
the following three options:

Logo! selection
With this option you can select to which Logo! (IP address) the TDE panel must connect.
Logo! settings
With this option you can change settings in the Logo! controller, in this case the IP address.
TDE settings
With this option you can change settings in the TDE panel, in this case also the IP address.

First change the IP address in the Logo! controller:

1. Use arrow up/down keys to select Logo settings and push ENTER.
2. Select Stop and push ENTER.
3. Select Yes and push ENTER; the user program is now stopped.
4. Select Network and push ENTER.
5. Select IP-address and push ENTER.
6. Push ENTER to start editing; use arrow left/right to select and arrow up/down to change a digit.
7. Push ENTER to save setting.

Depending on whether the new IP address, which was entered for the Logo! was in the same address range as
before (same address range as TDE panel) or not, the connection with the Logo! controller is lost (this may not be
apparent initially and the screen may show functions that are no longer available).
If the IP address is in the same range and it is not necessary to change the IP address of the TDE panel, proceed
with setting the IP address the TDE panel must connect to. Otherwise proceed by changing the IP address for the
TDE panel as follows:

8. Use arrow up/down keys to select TDE settings and push ENTER.
9. Select TDE Network and push ENTER.
10. Push ENTER to start editing; use arrow left/right to select and arrow up/down to change a
digit.
11. Push ENTER to save setting and push ESC twice to return to the main menu.

Now you must tell the TDE panel to which Logo! controller to connect.

12. Use arrow up/down keys to select Logo selection and push ENTER.
13. Select IP-address and push ENTER to start editing.
14. Use arrow left/right to select and arrow up/down to change a digit.
15. Push ENTER to save setting and ESC to return to the main menu.

The only thing that remains to be done is to start the user program.

32
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

16. Use arrow up/down keys to select Logo settings and push ENTER.
17. Select Start and push ENTER.
18. Select Yes and push ENTER; the user program is now started.

The user program will always start when the power is turned off and on. If the settings were incomplete or
incorrect there will be a problem with the communication between the Logo! controller and the TDE panel or a
remote system, but the user program will function normally and the Q-Filter
R
will be fully functional.

6.1.5 Siemens Logo! utility functions.


By navigating all the way down to the screen which shows the date and time, you can access the default Logo!
functionality.

I/O status display.

From the date/time screen, use the left and right arrow keys to navigate through the I/O status displays; digital I/O
status is represented by the character 0 (off) or 1 (on), analog data is represented by the raw value. See the Siemens
manual (document E.1) for more detailed information.

Logo! utilities menu.

When in the date/time screen, use the escape key to enter into the Logo! utilities menu. Via this menu you can set
the date and the time, the language for the display, start and stop the program and change some of the parameters.
See the Siemens manual (document E.1) for more detailed information. See below for any parameters that are
accessible through this function.

Access parameters via Logo! utilities menu:

The Logo! utilities menu also provides access to parameters which can be changed to modify the behavior of the
system. See paragraph 6.3
See the control system section 4.2.6 for access to user setpoints.

6.2 Q-Filter functions.


6.2.1 Level measurements
The level sensors for LT-01 and LT-02 and the vacuum sensor for PT-01 are mounted in the upper part of the control
panel. The sensors are connected to the process tank by means of plastic tubes.
The sensors for LT-01 and LT-02 measure the pressure inside a tube which is connected to the clean tank and the
dirty tank respectively. To make sure the measured value always represents the hydrostatic pressure in the clean
tank respectively the dirty tank, a little bit of air is bled into the tube. This bleeding of air is controlled with the
needle valves, shown in figure 6.5.
To prevent blocking of the tank connections for LT-01 (see figure 6.6) and for LT-02 (see figure 6.7, these connec-
tions are flushed with air automatically. See the description below for more information.

33
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Figure 6.4: Sensors inside control panel. Figure 6.5: Needle valves for LT-01/LT-02.

6.2.2 Level clean tank


The level in the clean tank is monitored by level sensor LT-01 (see figure 6.4) connected with the fitting on the tank
wall (see figure 6.6 by means of a plastic tube.
Accumulation of dirt in the fitting on the tank wall is prevented by the pulse function. Prior to indexing the filter
cloth, compressed air is injected into the clean tank via this connection, blowing out any accumulated dirt.
The clean tank is not atmospheric and therefore the signal from sensor LT-01 must be combined with the signal
from sensor PT-01 to calculate the actual level. A LT-01 level alarm may therefore also result from problems with
sensor PT-01. See 6.2.6.

Figure 6.6: The tank connection for LT-01. Figure 6.7: The tank connection for LT-02.

A second sensor, LS-04, is mounted directly in the wall of the clean tank and serves to detect a high-high level
condition, independent from sensor LT-01. This is to safe guard the equipment from serious damage.

A1.a High High level clean tank LS-04.

This alarm occurs when the effluent pump P-01 is unable to keep up with the amount of fluid coming in. Check
the following for a possible cause:

1. Check the P-01 duty cycle value (see 6.2.10). This value should normally not be higher than
85%; if it is higher than 85%, a warning message should have been generated.

34
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

2. Check the calculated average incoming flow (see 6.2.10). If this value is higher than the capac-
ity of the Q-Filter
R
, the problem may be the incoming flow is too high,. In that case there will
also be a warning message.
3. Check the pressure in the discharge of P-01. If the discharge pressure is too high, P-01 will not
be able to keep up with the incoming flow.
4. If the incoming average flow and the discharge pressure are not too high, it may be that P-01
requires maintenance. Please note that if, for some reason, the incoming flow was abnormally
high for a short period of time, this will not be represented in either of the two process values
referenced here.

A1.b Clean tank level sensor LT-01 error.

This alarm is generated when the signal, received from LT-01, is outside the normal range.
Check the following to find the cause:

1. What is the raw input value on the Logo! (check via I/O display function). If it is 0, there is no
input signal, if it is 1000, the voltage on the input is too high.
2. If the raw value is 1000, disconnect the sensor to see if the value changes to 0. If it does,
check the connections to the resistor (6R04 in the wiring diagram). The resistor is to convert
the 4-20mA signal to a 2-10V signal. If the resistor is disconnected, the raw input signal on the
Logo! will go to 1000.
3. If the raw value is 0, check the wiring from sensor to Logo!.
4. Disconnect the tube from the sensor (inside the control panel); the measured value must change
to approximately 110mm which is the offset value. If it does, the sensor is ok, if not, replace
the sensor.
5. If the measured value changes to 110mm, check the tube fitting on the tank wall for dirt accu-
mulation. Remove any dirt and clean fitting and tube.

A1.c Clean tank level high too long.

If, during normal operation (cloth indexing) the level in the clean tank gets too high, the incoming flow is stopped
(see paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2. If this condition lasts for more than 10 seconds, alarm A1.c is generated which
shuts down the Q-Filter R
.
This alarm may occur if the incoming flow is too high, or the effluent pump P-01 is unable to pump the fluid
out quickly enough. Both of these conditions are monitored and warnings are generated. Check for possible
(previously) occurred warning messages.

B3.d Signal LT-01 level sensor unstable.

If the LT-01 sensor signal shows abnormal fluctuations this warning will occur.
Abnormal fluctuations are most likely caused by dirt accumulation at the sensor connection to the tank wall.
Disconnect the tube, and remove the fitting from the tank wall, and clean all parts thoroughly.
If dirt accumulation is not the problem, another possible cause may be that too much air is injected in the sensing
tube. Adjust the needle valve to reduce the amount of air.

35
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

6.2.3 Level dirty tank.


The level in the dirty tank is monitored by level sensor LT-02 (see figure 6.4), connected with the fitting on the tank
wall (see figure 6.7) by means of a plastic tube.
Over time dirt may accumulate in the connection of the tube to the dirty tank. To prevent this from affecting the
measurement, the connection is flushed with air automatically (QF05 and later). This is done each time a pre-set
amount of fluid has been filtered and lasts 2 seconds. The pre-set amount can be changed via parameters (see
6.3.4).You can manually start the flush via user menu #2.

A2.a Frequent indexing error.

. This alarm is generated, and the system will shut down, if the filter cloth usage exceeds 1 meter in 5 minutes.
This problem is most likely caused by a deviation in the value, measured by LT-02, resulting from obstruction of
the tube, connecting the sensor to the dirty tank. See 6.2.3 for possible checks to determine the cause.

A2.b Dirty tank level sensor LT-02 error.

This alarm is generated when the signal, received from LT-02, is outside the normal range.
Check the following to find the cause:

1. What is the raw input value on the Logo! (check via I/O display function). If it is 0, there is no
input signal, if it is 1000, the voltage on the input is too high.
2. If the raw value is 1000, disconnect the sensor to see if the value changes to 0. If it does,
check the connections to the resistor (6R06 in the wiring diagram). The resistor is to convert
the 4-20mA signal to a 2-10V signal. If the resistor is disconnected, the raw input signal on the
Logo! will go to 1000.
3. If the raw value is 0, check the wiring from sensor to Logo!.
4. Disconnect the tube from the sensor (inside the control panel); the measured value must change
to approximately 30mm which is the offset value. If it does, the sensor is ok, if not, replace the
sensor.
5. If the measured value changes to 30mm, check the tube fitting on the tank wall for dirt accu-
mulation. Remove any dirt and clean fitting and tube.

A2.c Dirty tank level high too long.

If, during normal operation (cloth indexing) the level in the dirty tank gets too high, the incoming flow is stopped
(see paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2. If this condition lasts for more than 10 seconds, alarm A2.c is generated which
shuts down the Q-Filter R
.
This alarm may occur if the incoming flow is too high, or the Q-Filter R
is unsuccessful in indexing the cloth.
The first condition is monitored and a warning is generated. Check for possible (previously) occurred warning
messages. If the Q-Filter R
is unsuccessful in indexing the cloth, there is most likely a mechanical problem. A
possibility is that the wheel segments have worn too much and need replacement. Check cloth transportation by
manually indexing the cloth.

B3.e Signal LT-02 level sensor unstable.

If the LT-02 sensor signal shows abnormal fluctuations this warning will occur.
Abnormal fluctuations are most likely caused by dirt accumulation at the sensor connection to the tank wall.
Disconnect the sensing tube, and remove the fitting from the tank wall, and clean all parts thoroughly.

36
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

If dirt accumulation is not the problem, another possible cause may be that too much air is injected in the sensing
tube. Adjust the needle valve to reduce the amount of air.

6.2.4 Influent control.


The Q-Filter R
is designed to respond to any incoming flow and will try to handle what ever comes. Accordingly it
will control effluent pump, vacuum and cloth indexing as required.
In the event that, for whatever reason, the incoming flow is too high to handle, the controller will turn off the
Influent stop signal to cause the incoming flow to be interrupted. This is considered a normal operating condition
and no alarm or warning is associated with it, only a message is displayed (see hereafter). The controller will turn
the Influent stop signal back on again as soon as conditions change to normal.
In case the Influent stop signal is on for more than 10 seconds, an alarm is generated and the system will shut
down.

B3.e Incoming average flow high.

The system calculates the average incoming flow. If the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the system a
warning message is generated.
The warning has no effect on the operation of the system but must be acknowledged to disappear. To see the
current incoming flow value, go to the Accumulated data screen (see 6.2.10).

D1 High level clean tank.

When the level in the clean tank exceeds the High setpoint, the incoming flow is temporarily interrupted by turning
off the Influent stop signal.
The message will display only as long a the high level condition exists and will automatically disappear.
If this condition lasts more than 10 seconds, alarm A1.c is generated and the Q-Filter
R
is shut down.

D2 High level dirty tank.

When the level in the dirty tank exceeds the High setpoint, the incoming flow is temporarily interrupted by turning
off the Influent stop signal.
The message will display only as long a the high level condition exists and will automatically disappear.
If this condition lasts more than 10 seconds, alarm A2.c is generated and the Q-Filter
R
is shut down.

6.2.5 Filter cloth functions


The roll of fresh filter cloth is monitored to signal when it is necessary to place a new roll and to stop the Q-
Filter
R
if the cloth runs out (Alarm A3.a). Monitoring is done by means of a distance sensor which uses a laser
beam to measure the distance from sensor to filter cloth. The sensor signal is also monitored for abnormal values.
When it is necessary to index the cloth, the vacuum is turned off and compressed air is injected into the clean tank.
This pulse function ensures a quick release of the vacuum and helps getting the filter cloth to start moving. It also
blows out any dirt which may have accumulated in the connection of the tube for level sensor LT-01 (see section
6.2.2).

37
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

B4 Filter cloth nearly finished.

If the amount of cloth left on the roll drops below a set value, a warning message is generated, indicating it is
necessary to place a new roll.
The warning has no effect on the operation of the system but must be acknowledged to disappear. The message
can only be acknowledged, and will only disappear, once the sensor detects there is sufficient cloth on the roll.

A3.a Filter cloth finished.

If no filter cloth is left on the tray, the XT-01 sensor will shut down the Q-Filter
R
. Restart is only possible after a
roll with sufficient filter cloth has been placed in the tray and the alarms have been acknowledged and the system
reset.
After a new roll of cloth has been placed, there is a delay of 15 seconds before automatic indexing of the cloth is
re-enabled.

Maximum cloth usage.

Under circumstances the system might advance the filter cloth too frequently. To prevent wasting filter cloth the
system is shut down (Alarm message A2.a) if more than one meter filter cloth is used within a set time which is set
at 5 minutes default. This parameter is not user accessible.

Maximum indexing interval.

If the cloth is not indexed for more than a set time, the system will automatically index the cloth once. This
function only counts the time the Q-Filter
R
is on line with the influent enabled and has a default setting of 1440
minutes (24 hours). The parameter is user accessible via the Logo! utilities menu.

Full length indexing.

Under certain circumstances it may be useful to index the filter cloth over a longer distance, for instance if there
is a lot of dirt which tends to build up in the dirty chamber. This function will turn on the drive, to index the
filter cloth, for a set number of seconds, after the system has indexed automatically for a set number of times. The
default setting for the number of seconds is 0, which means the function is switched off. The parameters are user
accessible via the Logo! utilities menu.

A3.b XT-01 sensor error.

If a signal is received from the sensor which is outside of the normal range, the alarm message A3.b XT-01 sensor
error is displayed. If this error occurs, check the following:

1. Is the value on the sensor display within the normal range? If yes, the problem is not in the
sensor. In that case, see hereafter.
2. If the sensor display is off, it may be that the power supply connection is broken; check the
wiring.
3. If the sensor displays an error code, check the manufacturers documentation.
4. If the sensor displays an abnormal value, replace the sensor.

If sensor indicates a normal value, check the following:

38
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

1. What is the raw input value on the Logo! (check via I/O display function). If it is 0, there is no
input signal, if is 1000, the voltage on the input is too high.
2. If the raw value is 1000, disconnect the sensor to see if the value changes to 0.
3. If the raw value is 0, check the wiring from sensor to Logo!.
4. See if the raw input value on the Logo! changes with the value displayed on the sensor. Place
a hand or object in the beam of the sensor to check this.

6.2.6 Vacuum functions.


The vacuum in the clean tank is measured by sensor PT-01, which is mounted inside the control panel. The sensor
measures the pressure in the tube which is connected to the clean tank.

A4 Vacuum sensor error PT-01

This alarm indicates that a signal is received from sensor PT-01 which is outside the normal range. With the Q-
Filter
R
switched off, and the cloth advanced, the vacuum in the clean tank is relieved and the sensor must indicate
a value close to 0 mbar (+ or - 3mbar). If not, replace the sensor.

6.2.7 Effluent pump function.


The filtered fluid is pumped out of the clean tank by means of a centrifugal pump which is started at high level and
stopped at low level. The settings for pump start/stop are accessible via the Logo! parameter access function (see
6.3).
In case of an overload or high current fault, the circuit breaker for P-01 will trip and alarm A5 (see 6.2.8 will occur.
The pump is also monitored for duty cycle and capacity.

B3.a Pump run time warning.

The system monitors the duty cycle of the pump ( % of the time on - % of the time off) and generates a warning if
the pump is running more than 85% of the time on average.
The warning has no effect on the operation of the system but must be acknowledged to disappear. The message
can only be acknowledged, and will only disappear, once a new value for the duty cycle has been calculated, which
is below 80%. To see the current duty cycle value, go to the Accumulated data screen (see 6.2.10).
Check the following to resolve the problem:

1. Check the incoming flow (see 6.2.4) to see if it is not above the rated capacity of the Q-Filter
R
.
2. Check the discharge pressure of the pump (pressure gauge) to see if it is higher than normal. If
yes, check the piping for any obstructions (valves partially closed).
3. Check the pump for air inclusion. If necessary vent the pump.
4. Check the pump for wear or damage of the impeller.
5. Blockage of the impeller us unlikely since the medium which is pumped has been filtered,
unless there has been a problem with the filter cloth and unfiltered fluid entered the clean
chamber.

39
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

B3.b Level clean tank does not drop.

The systems checks to see if the level in the clean tank drops after the effluent pump, P-01, has started. If the level
does not drop 20mm below the pump on level within 60 seconds, this warning is generated.
This warning can occur if there is a problem with the pump (or pump discharge) or if the incoming flow is too
high. Be aware that the momentary flow into the clean tank can be extremely high if there is a high incoming flow
and the filter cloth was just indexed. In that situation, the liquid in the dirty tank may drain into the clean tank very
fast.
The warning has no effect on the operation of the system but must be acknowledged, once the level in the clean
tank has dropped below the pump on level minus 20mm. To see the actual level, go to the Real time data screen
(see 6.2.10).
See above for any points to check.

6.2.8 General equipment failures


A5 Thermal fault drives.

The thermal protection devices for P-01, P-02 and M-01 are combined in one signal with one common alarm. If
this alarm occurs, check all three thermal protection devices.

A6 Instrument air fault PS-03

The instrument air supply is monitored by PS-03. If the pressure drops below 3 bar, this alarm will appear and the
Q-Filter
R
is shut down.

1. Check the incoming instrument air pressure.


2. Check the setting of PS-03; the setting is adjustable with a screw.
3. Possibly the instrument air pressure drops below the setting of PS-03 during pulsing. That is
when air is blown into the clean chamber to relieve the vacuum, prior to indexing the filter
cloth. This can be tested by pushing the index cloth push button or foot switch (only if the
key switch is on).

A7 Emergency shutdown

This alarm occurs when one of the two ESD push buttons is activated or when the cover on the outlet side is opened
without the key switch in the on position. The ESD push buttons latch and must be pulled back or turned to enable
acknowledging the alarm.

6.2.9 Control functions


B1 No enable signal

The controller offers the possibility to enable/disable operation via a signal from a (main) control system. If this
signal is off, this message will appear and the Q-Filter
R
will not function.
All Q-Filters
R
are shipped with the enable signal bridged on the terminals strip.
Only in a situation where it may be necessary to prevent the Q-Filter R
from pumping fluid from the clean tank,
the enable signal can be used to for this purpose. Turning off the enable signal shuts down the Q-Filter
R
making it
necessary to restart it by hand.

40
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

B2 Key switch is on.

Some function on the Q-Filter


R
are only accessible when the key switch is in the on position. These are:

1. The key switch bridges the safety switch on the cover. Opening the cover without the key
switch being in the on position will shut down the Q-Filter
R
.
2. Manually indexing the cloth is only possible with the key switch in the on position.
3. The key switch overrides the cloth-end shut down. That makes it is possible to replace the filter
cloth without the Q-Filter
R
shutting down due to a cloth-end signal. The cloth-end signal still
blocks automatic indexing of the filter cloth.

With the key switch in the on position, the orange light will be continuously on, except when a warning occurs, in
which case the orange light will be flashing.

6.2.10 Data acquisition and display.


The screens with real time data and accumulated data are only available when the back light of the display is on.
The back light will turn on when any of the function keys is pressed and will remain on until 5 minutes after the
last key is pressed. The back light will always be on when the key switch is in the on position.
Use the arrow up and down keys to navigate from one screen to another.

C1 Real time data and main setpoints.

The real time data screen shows the following measured values and setpoints:

LT-01 Clean tank level.


LT-02 Dirty tank level.
PT-01 Clean tank vacuum.

Maximum vacuum setpoint (see 6.2.11).


Minimum cloth indexing setpoint (see 6.2.11).

C2 Accumulated data.

The accumulated data screen shows the following average values and accumulated data, calculated by the system:

P-01 effluent pump on time (%); average value.

Maximum vacuum that was reached; average value.


Incoming flow; average value.
Total meters cloth used. Accumulated value; can be reset.

Total cubic meters filtered. Accumulated value; can be reset.

6.2.11 Changing user settings and data.


Via the user menus it is possible to reset the accumulated data and change setpoints. These functions are only
accessible with the key switch in the on position.

41
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

C6 Reset accumulated data.

This function resets the Total cubic meters filtered and Total meters cloth used values. Press F1 for Menu #1
and then press F3 to access the display, showing the current, accumulated data. Than press and the arrow right key
for 3 seconds. The values on the display change to 0. Press any other function key or turn off the key switch to
leave this function.
Both values are reset to 0 together. It is not possible to reset only one of the two values.

C7 Change maximum vacuum setpoint.

The system can generate a vacuum of up to 200 mbar (800mbar absolute) but, if required, it can be limited by
setting a lower Maximum vacuum setpoint.
Press F1 twice to access menu #2. Than press F2 to access the display with the setpoint value and make the
required change (see 4.2.6 for detailed explanations).

Important
It is possible to enter any value but internally the setpoint is limited to a value between 50 and
200mbar. This is not reflected in the screen, so it may seem the set value is outside this range. Go
to the Real time data screen (see 6.2.10) to see the actual, internal setpoint value.

C8 Change minimum cloth indexing length.

The default minimal length for cloth indexing is 50 mm but it is possible to set a higher value. This would be done
if indexing the cloth is presenting problems, due to high dirt loading.
Press F1 twice to access menu #2. Than press F3 to access the display with the setpoint value and use the esc,
ok and arrow keys to make the required change (see 4.2.6 for detailed explanations).

Important
It is possible to enter any value but internally the setpoint is limited to a value between 50 and
200mm. This is not reflected in the screen, so it may seem the set value is outside this range. Go
to the Real time data screen (see 6.2.10) to see the internal setpoint value.
Note that the value entered is only the minimal length. The system will calculate the optimal length continuously,
which may be considerably longer. The internal maximum is 300mm (not adjustable).

6.3 Changing parameters.


This section describes how parameters can be changed using the standard Logo! utility menu. It is important to
realize that this function gives access to all parameters in the function blocks that are accessible, not only the one
that needs to be changed. In the description hereafter, only the parameter that needs changing is mentioned. Never
change any of the other parameters!

Important
The system does not perform any check on the values entered and it is very well possible to enter
values that result in erratic behavior and malfunctioning of the system. Therefore only change
parameters if you know exactly what you are doing and always observe the instructions below as
to what values can be entered.
Enter the Logo! utilities menu (see paragraph 6.1.5), navigate to Parameters using the arrow down key and enter
parameter editing with the OK key. Use the arrow keys to select the required function block and the OK key to
enter editing the values. With the arrow left/right key navigate to the digit that needs to be changed and use the
arrow up/down keys to change the value of the selected digit. Confirm with ok and leave the parameter editing
menu with the ESC key until date and time are displayed again.

42
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

6.3.1 Cloth near end warning setting


The cloth on the roll is monitored with distance sensor (laser sensor) XT-01 and a warning is generated when
the filter cloth is nearly finished. If necessary, the setting for the cloth near end warning can be changed via
parameters B015/ClthElap. The default settings are On=600, Off=590. The cloth finished alarm setting is 625
(not user adjustable). The On value in B015 must always be sufficiently less and the Off value must always be 10
less than the On value.

6.3.2 Effluent pump start/stop settings.


The effluent pump is started and stopped, based on the level in the clean tank which is measured by LT-01. The
start and the stop setpoint are set in different function blocks.
For the start setting the on/off value of function block B079 must be altered. The default settings are On=500,
Off=480. Never set an On value higher than 500 and always keep the same differential between the two values.
Also the values entered must always be at least 150 higher than the values entered for the pump stop setpoint.
For the stop setting the on/off value of function block B049 must be altered. The default settings are On=260,
Off=250. Always keep the same differential between the two values and never set a value lower than 250.

6.3.3 Maximum interval filter cloth indexing.


To prevent the filter cloth from sticking too much, making it impossible to index, the controller will automatically
index the cloth if the time since the last indexing exceeds a set value. The controller only counts the time the
system was actually switched on with the incoming flow enabled.
The setting for this function is in B245 and the default setting is On=1440x minutes. Be aware that a low setting
may increase filter cloth usage.

6.3.4 Set flushing LT-02 connection


The connection for the level measurement in the dirty chamber, LT-02, is automatically flushed, each time a pre-set
amount of fluid has been filtered. The setting for the pre-set amount is changed via the ON parameter of function
block B094 - LT02-Flush. The default setting is 50 (m3).

6.3.5 Change the language of the alarms and messages:

6.4 Mechanical maintenance.


6.4.1 Replacing the wheel segments.

43
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix A. Risk analysis


A.1 Mechanical hazards (1.3).
A.1.1 Hazards in connection with the stability of the machine/installation (1.3.1).
The construction is designed in such a way that stability poses no risks. There is no risk of the installation tipping
over given the dimensions and the low center of gravity. It is therefore not necessary to secure the installation
against tipping over.
Depending on the local circumstances (vibrations, uneven ground), it may be advisable to secure the installation
to the ground/bearing construction.
The ground/bearing construction must easily be able to bear the weight of the appliance including the maximum
weight of fluid in the appliance.

A.1.2 Hazards due to the risk of breakage (1.3.2).


Risks due to breakage flow from the possible leakage of the product. See paragraphs A.2.12 and A.2.14.

A.1.3 Hazards due to falling/ejected objects (1.3.3).


All components are permanently connected to one another thus eliminating the risk of injury. An exception is the
hinged cover, which is connected by hinges and following improper use, may slam shut from the open position.
When fully open, the cover is in a stable position and cannot slam shut due to vibrations, jolts or knocks.

A.1.4 Hazards due to rough surfaces/sharp edges (1.3.4).


All edges have been processed to prevent injury by sharp edges. Covers should be operated using the handles
fitted. When carrying out maintenance work, use the correct tools and if necessary, disassemble parts in order to
prevent the possibility of ejection leading to injury due to sharp objects.

A.1.5 Hazards in connection with moving parts (1.3.7).


All moving parts are on the inside or within the casing and cannot be touched during normal use.
Access to the internal moving parts is possible via the hinged cover. It is safe to open the cover using a cover
switch connected to an emergency stop circuit, which can be bridged with a key switch. Use of the key switch and
opening the cover should only be carried out by qualified persons.
In order to further exclude any risks in the case of unforeseen and/or possible unsafe situations, the appliance is
fitted with two emergency stop buttons, which are able to switch off all appliances immediately and completely
independent of their controls.
The inside of the valve fitted as an option on the input is no longer accessible following installation of the connect-
ing pipes and is therefore outside the scope of this risk analysis.

44
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

A.2 Other risks (1.5).


A.2.1 Risks due to the electricity supply (1.5.1).
The installation should be connected to an electricity network fitted with a safety core (protective earth) and fault
current protection (ground leak switch) in the input panel (TN input system; EN 60204-1:2006 annexe A).
The earthing bolts fitted to the installation should be connected to an appropriate protective earth in order to ensure
that metal parts are not under tension.
Sufficient protection against risks as a result of touching live parts can be demonstrated by carrying out an
impedance test following installation as stated in EN 60204-1:2006, No. 18.2.2 , test 2.
Work on the electrical installation and in the control panel may only be carried out by qualified personnel. Access
to the inside of the control panel is not necessary for normal operation.

A.2.2 Risks due to static electricity (1.5.2).


The installation is constructed entirely of stainless steel and conducts electricity so there can be no risk of static
electricity.

A.2.3 Risks due to other energy supplies (1.5.3).


Compressed air is used as an aid in level measurement and possibly for operating valves. The compressed air
system is completely positioned behind casing where there is no risk in the event of air pipes bursting or slipping
off.

A.2.4 Risks due to extreme temperatures (1.5.5).


The temperatures that can occur when using the installation depend only on the temperature of the product fed
through the installation. As such, risks in connection with this are therefore outside the scope of this risk analysis.

A.2.5 Risks due to fire (1.5.6).


Not applicable

A.2.6 Risks due to explosion(1.5.7).


Not applicable

A.2.7 Risks due to the emission of noise (1.5.8).


Noise levels due to the operation of the pumps remains under the current norm of 80 dB(A).
Noise is also emitted due to the working of the vacuum system due to the suction of air by the appliance through a
very small opening. With the silencer installed as standard, the emission will remain under the norm of 80 dB (A).

A.2.8 Risks due to vibrations (1.5.9).


Not applicable

45
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

A.2.9 Risks due to radiation (1.5.10).


Not applicable

A.2.10 Risks due to external radiation (1.5.11).


Not applicable

A.2.11 Risks due to laser radiation (1.5.12).


Measuring the available quantity of filter cloth requires distance measuring using class 2 laser technology. The
laser beam is pointed downwards and is within the housing. It is not possible to look into the laser during normal
use.
Several warning stickers draw attention to the presence of a laser beam.

A.2.12 Risks due to the emission of hazardous substances (1.5.13).


The installation delivered is only for use with watery fluids! It is also up to the user to determine what fluids
are used in the installation and what substances they contain. Any risks flowing from the nature of the fluids are
therefore outside the scope of this risk analysis.

A.2.13 Risks due to confinement (1.5.14)..


The vacuum tank is sealed using a manhole cover and is completely shut during use. Given the dimensions of the
manhole and the vacuum tank, it is practically impossible for an adult to enter this tank.
The tank is not vapor tight so there is no risk of an oxygen shortage in the case of confinement under normal
circumstances.

A.2.14 Risks of slipping, stumbling or falling (1.5.15).


Any risk of slipping due to a product leak depends on the set-up of the installation and the environment and is
therefore outside the scope of this risk analysis.

A.2.15 Risks due to lightening.


The installation is only intended for use indoors.

46
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix B. Project documents.

47
xx DRAWING SET: 12389-20-PPS-xx-y y
Page Description Rev
01 Coversheet 0

Process & Project 02


04
Legend & project parameter
Process diagram Q-Filter
0
0

Documentation 05
06
Equipment details
Electrical/control system details
0
0
06A Electrical/control system details 0
07 Equipment (location) 0

Q-Filter active 08
09
QF-150 connections
QF-150 dimensions
0
0

vacuum filter
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

Salico Hispania S.A.


Copyright Lomapro b.v.

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
Cover sheet
S.A.
Appendix B- 48

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 01 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
Appendix B- 49
8
II I
XSV-02 XSV-03
20 5

A
M-01
9

5
XT-01

14

2 6
PT-01
PCV-01

LT-02

LS-04 1

P-02
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

PI-02
B
Copyright Lomapro b.v.

LT-01
12
11 P-01

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


3
prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

13

E D

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
Process diagram Q-Filter
S.A.
Appendix B- 50

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 04 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
EQUIPMENT FUNCTION SERVICE EQUIPMENT TYPE CAPACITY/RANGE NOTES
1 X-01A System tank; clean tank Filtered medium QF-150/007
2 X-01B System tank; dirty tank Unfiltered medium QF-150/007
3 P-01 Effluent pump Filtered medium 22/CUB/FR40 15 m3/hr - 25 m 2,2 kW, 460 V 60 Hz (+/- 10%)
4 P-02 Vacuum pump Filtered air/vapour QF150/002 Busch/Samos SB0080) 85 m3/h, 210 mbar vacuum 0,7 kW, 380-480 V 60 Hz
5 M-01 Filter cloth transport n.a. Lenze GSS06-3M HAR063C32 e-drive 1,5 rpm, 750 Nm 0,25 kW, 480 V 60 Hz (+/- 10%)
6 PV Vacuum control instrument air Pneumatic valve Rexroth ED01 0-10V pneumatic
6 PCV-01 Vacuum control air/medium Pinch-valve AKO VMP POM/NBR Size 1 1/4"
7 Control panel n.a. QF007
8 Signal exchange central ctrl. system
9 Inlet shut-off Unfiltered medium Ball valve with pneum. actuator
11 Servicing Filtered medium Ball valves
12 Vacuum lock-in Filtered medium Check valve
13 Drain Filtered medium Ball valve
14 Overflow Unfiltered medium Open connection

LT-01 Level measurement X-01A Instrument air E&H Cerabar T PMC131-A55F1D39 -300 ... +300 mbar 4-20 mA
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

LT-02 Level measurement X-01B Instrument air E&H Cerabar T PMC131-A55F1D10 0 - 100 mbar 4-20 mA
PT-01 Vacuum measurement X-01A Air/vapour E&H Cerabar T PMC131-A55F1D39 -300 ... +300 mbar 4-20 mA
XT-01 Filter cloth detection n.a. ifm O1D100 optical distance sensor 0 - 10 Meter 0 - 10 V
LS-04HH High High evel X-01A Filtered medium E&H Liquiphant T FTL20-0125 3-wire sensor
Copyright Lomapro b.v.

PI-02 Discharge press. ind. P-01 Filtered medium Eriks 6301 E 0 - 10 bar
XSV-02 Clean tank pulsing Instrument air Metallworks Valvola SOV33 SOS NC 0 - 10 bar 24vdc
XSV-03 LT-02 flush Instrument air Metallworks Valvola SOV33 SOS NC 0 - 10 bar 24vdc

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
Equipment details
S.A.
Appendix B- 51

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 05 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
SIEMENS LOGO! TD operator interface panel
FUNC. KEY
FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION DISPLAY FUNC. KEY DISPLAY FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION OPERATION/SETTINGS
COMBINATION

Start influent Instruction F1

Stop influent ----- F2

F3

Lamptest ------ F4

SIEMENS LOGO! Basic module + analog extensions


FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION INPUT DETAILS PLC INPUT PLC OUTPUT OUTPUT DETAILS FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION OPERATION/SETTINGS

LT-01 0-10V motor control P-01 Effluent pump


AI-03 (I1) DO-01 (Q1) Started on High level LT-01; stopped on Low level LT-01
Level clean tank X-01A (4-20mA) circuit 3x440vac, 60Hz, 2,2 kW

LT-02 0-10V motor control P-02 Exhauster


AI-04 (I2) DO-02 (Q2) Started by control logic when vacuum is required.
Level dirty tank X-01B (4-20mA) circuit 3 x 440 vac, 60Hz, 0,7kW

H-01 motor control M-01 Filter cloth indexing


volt free contact DI-03 (I3) DO-03 (Q3) Started by control logic when vacuum reaches maximum
Reset/On circuit 3 x 440vac, 60Hz, 0,25kW
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

P-01 / P-02 / M-01 volt free contact


DI-04 (I4) DO-04 (Q4) spare
Overload NC

LS-04 HH PNP PCV - 01 PV-01 pinch valve with Control logics increases/decreases vacuum in X-01A, depending
DI-05 (I5) AO-01 (V1/I1)
HiHi level clean tank X-01A NC 0 - 10V PCV-01 Proportional pneumatic valve on process conditions and filter cloth loading.
Copyright Lomapro b.v.

spare DI-06 (I6) AO-02 (V2/I1) spare

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


PT-01 0-10V
prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

AI-01 (I7)
Vacuum clean tank X-01A (4-20mA)

XT-01
0-10V AI-02 (I8)
Remaining filter cloth

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
Electrical/control system details
S.A.
Appendix B- 52

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 06 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
SIEMENS LOGO! Digital extension modules

FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION INPUT DETAILS PLC INPUT PLC OUTPUT OUTPUT DETAILS FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION OPERATION/SETTINGS

PS-03 volt fee contact LA-03


DI-09 (I12) DO-05 (Q12) 24vdc - 1W Flashing = active alarm; steady = no active alarms, reset unit
Instrument air pressure NO Beacon red light

XS-09
volt fee contact LA-04 Flashing = warning, attention required; steady = maintenance
Enable from main control DI-10 (I22) DO-06 (Q22) 24vdc - 1W
NO Beacon orange light (key) switch turned on.
system
XS-07 cover switch
volt free contact LI-02
HE-04/HE-05 shut down DI-11 (I32) DO-07 (Q32) 24vdc - 1W Flashing = no alarms, ready to start; steady = normal operation
NC Beacon green light
via ESD relay

H-06 volt fee contact volt free contact XA-03 Signal to main control system
DI-12 (I42) DO-08 (Q42)
Key switch/maintenance NO NC Alarm, unit failure Unit has shut down; attention required.

H-02/H-03 volt fee contact volt free contact XA-04 Signal to main control system
DI-13 (I52) DO-09 (Q52)
Filter cloth indexing NO NC Warning (filter cloth change) Abnormal situation (filter cloth nearly finished)

volt free contact XS-08 Signal to main control system


spare DI-14 (I62) DO-10 (Q62)
NO Influent enabled Closed contact = allow influent; Open contact = stop influent.

XSV-03 Opened every 50m3 of medium when level dirty tank is between
spare DI-15 (I72) DO-11 (Q72) 24vdc - 9 W
LT-02 flush 100 - 200 mm for a duration of 2 seconds
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

XSV-02 Opened when cloth indexing is required and closed when vacuum
spare DI-16 (I82) DO-12 (Q82) 24vdc - 9 W
Clean tank pulsing is below 5 mbar or 10 seconds after opening.
Copyright Lomapro b.v.

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
Electrical/control system details
S.A.
Appendix B- 53

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 06A 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
Inlet Operator
diffuser Transport interface
wheels Inlet
Inspection diffuser
hatch.

Control
panel

Rol of filter
cloth
Drive Exit side;
M-01 cloth drying
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

section
Access for
cleaning

Exhaust air
Copyright Lomapro b.v.

from P-02
for drying.

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Foot-switch for
*** Effluent pump P-01 Removable filter cloth
prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

(fitted inside when Exhauster cover advancement


possible) P-02 Removable
covers

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
Equipment (location)
S.A.
Appendix B- 54

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 07 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
Inlet must be Inlet must be
from the side! A A from the side!
8
I
II

I
D
This document remains property of Lomapro b.v. All rights reserved, disclosure or use of any information contained herein is strictly

CONNECTION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS NOTE

A Influent polluted medium 3" bsp, female


B Effluent filtered medium 2" bsp, female
Copyright Lomapro b.v.

D Drain 2" bsp, female


E Overflow 3" bsp, female

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


prohibited, except with express written approval from Lomapro b.v.

I Electrical power supply 440vac, 60Hz, 3 kW 3 ph + PE


II Instrument air supply 1/2" bsp, female

PROJECT: QF Series 007


Salico Hispania

Q-Filter
QF-150 connections
S.A.
Appendix B- 55

REFERENCE GROUP DOC SHEET ISSUE


Tel. +31(0)73 2200030 Fax. +31(0)73 2200039

R
user manual
Email: business@q-filtration.eu 12389 20 PPS 08 0
REV.: DATE: DESCRIPTION NAME BY: MvH DATE: 12/2014 Lomapro is a trade name of Lovasc b.v., Vlijmen, The Netherlands
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
Appendix B- 56
Project # 12389 - Q-Filter system
client details

Article Description Information Unit price Start up 1st year 2 years


QTY
used
QTY Price QTY Price QTY Price

Fittings/Klappen
10SV5001 MW solenoid valve 3/2 24vdc - 2 1 - 1 - 1 -
16HV1001 Hose valve, 1 1/4" POM/NBR - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
Fittings/Klappen Subtotaal - - -

Controller/Steuerung
100001002 10/000RLS2; Motor protection relay - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
1,6-2,5A
100001007 10/000RLS7; Motor protection relay 4- - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
6,3A
100001009 10/000RLS9; Motor protection relay - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
0,63-1 A
100001105 10/000SR01; Safety relay; 24vdc - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -

100001106 10/000R10; Motor switch 3P; - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -


I=9A,24vdc
100001111 10/000-002, Power supply 180- - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
550vac/24vdc, 5,0A
10PLC1021 10/PLC/021: Siemens Logo! 0BA8; - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
8DI/4DO
10PLC1022 10/PLC/022, Siemens Logo! TDE - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
operator interface
10PLC1023 10/PLC/023: Siemens Logo! - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
extension; DI8/DO8
10PLC1024 10/PLC/024: Siemens Logo! - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
extension; 2x AO
10HS1032 10/ZB4/BZ101 Contact block NO - 2 1 - 1 - 1 -
10HS1033 10/ZB4/BZ102 Contact block NC - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
10XI1011 10/XVB/C2B3 Lamp green Lamp element for beacon - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
10/XVB/001.
10XI1012 10/XVB/C2B4 Lamp red Lamp element for beacon - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


10/XVB/001.
10XI1013 10/XVB/C2B5 Lamp orange Lamp element for beacon - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
10/XVB/001.
Controller/Steuerung Subtotaal - - -

Instruments/Instrumenten
10DT1001 10/DT/001; Optical distance sensor - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
O1D100; M12/4pM

Q-Filter
Appendix B- 57

R
12389-20-SPR-00-0-up -1- 24-3-2015

user manual
Project # 12389 - Q-Filter system
client details

Article Description Information Unit price Start up 1st year 2 years


QTY
used
QTY Price QTY Price QTY Price

10LS1001 10/LS-001 E&H level sensor, G 3/4", - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -


M12/4pM, PNP
10PC1001 10/PC/001; Proportional regulator; - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
pneum., M12/5pM
10PS1002 10/000PS02: Pressure switch - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
instr.air, 2-10 bar
10PT1002 Pressure transmitter, -300 : +300 - 2 1 - 1 - 1 -
mbar, 1/2" BSP;
10PT1003 Pressure transmitter, 0 : +100 mbar, - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
1/2" BSP; DIN
Instruments/Instrumenten Subtotaal - - -

Pumps 22 series/Pumpe 22 Serien


22CUB3022 22/CUB/FR40-SP centrifugal pump - 1 0 - 0 - 0 -
15m3/h, 25m, 2,2kW - 460V/60Hz

Pumps 22 series/Pumpe 22 Serien Subtotaal - - -

Q-Filter
050003001 05/FFI300/050 Filter cloth 300gr/m2; - 13 13 - 26 - 52 -
0,5x50m; 10
10XS1001 QF000-105 Cover switch; M12/5pM - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -

19AIR2002 19/AIR/002: compressed air service suitable for QF - 1 1 - 0 - 1 -


unit
720001052 QF-000/05; Key for Keyswitch - 1 0 - 0 - 0 -

720001053 QF-000/03; Stainless silencer drying - 1 0 - 1 - 2 -


section
720001101 QF-000/02; drive coupling - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
720001102 QF-000/04; foot switch - 1 1 - 1 - 1 -

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


720001200 QF-000/02; Drive - 1 0 - 0 - 0 -
720001203 QF-150/02 exhauster 0,7kW - 1 0 - 0 - 1 -
210mbar, 85m3/h
720002012 QF-000/01; Set (2x6) wheel - 1 0 - 0 - 1 -
segments NBR (798mm)
720001107 QF-000-005 AISI 304 guide roller, - 3 0 - 3 - 6 -
NBR surface

725001022 QF-150/01; Condensate flap NBR - 1 0 - 0 - 1 -

Q-Filter
Appendix B- 58

R
12389-20-SPR-00-0-up -2- 24-3-2015

user manual
Project # 12389 - Q-Filter system
client details

Article Description Information Unit price Start up 1st year 2 years


QTY
used
QTY Price QTY Price QTY Price

Q-Filter Subtotaal - - -

Totaal - - -

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix B- 59

R
12389-20-SPR-00-0-up -3- 24-3-2015

user manual
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix C. Wiring diagrams.

60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Project Lomapro BV: 12389

Salico Hispania S.A.


12389-20-WD-00-0

CONTROL SYSTEM
QF/150/007-400VAC/0BA8
QF/300/007-400VAC/0BA8

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 61

R
user manual
PREVIOUS NEXT 2
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO COVER = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

INFORMATION WIRECOLORCODES AND -DIAMETERS

MAIN CIRCUITS CONTROL CIRCUITS OTHER CIRCUITS PROTECTIVE (EARTH) CIRCUITS

VOLTAGE 3x400VAC+N VOLTAGE >50VAC TYPE ANALOG / MEASURING SIGNALS MIN. DIAMETER 0,75mm
MIN. DIAMETER 1,5mm MIN. DIAMETER 0,75mm MIN. DIAMETER 0,34mm COLOR GREEN/YELLOW
L1 BLACK L RED ALL SHIELDED CABLE
L2 BLACK N RED YELLOW
L3 BLACK
N LIGHT BLUE VOLTAGE <50VAC
MIN. DIAMETER 0,75mm
VOLTAGE 230VAC+N L GREY
MIN. DIAMETER 1,5mm N GREY
L1 BLACK
N LIGHT BLUE VOLTAGE <50VDC
MIN. DIAMETER PLC - 0,5mm
OTHER - 0,75mm
+ DARK BLUE
- DARK BLUE

VOLTAGE VCC EXTERNAL SOURCE


MIN. DIAMETER 0,75mm
ALL ORANGE

GENERAL REMARKS
COLORCODE ABBREVIATIONS ACCORDING IEC 757 COLORCODING SHIELDED CABLES ACCORDING DIN 47100

BK =BLACK 00 10 20 30 40 50 60
BN =BROWN 0 VT PK/BN YE/PK PK/RD BN/GN/BK BN/RD/BK
RD =RED 1 WH GY/PK WH/BU GN/BU GY/BK WH/YE/BK BK/WH
WARNING
OG =ORANGE 2 BN RD/BU BN/BU YE/BU PK/BK YE/BN/BK
BY THE TRANSPORT OF THIS SWITCH PANEL AND COMPONENTS
YE =YELLOW 3 GN WH/GN WH/RD GN/RD BU/BK WH/GY/BK THERE MAY BE LOOSE SCREWCONNECTIONS.
GN =GREEN 4 YE BN/GN BN/RD YE/RD RD/BK GY/BN/BK BEFORE COMMISSIONING, CHECK AND TIGHTEN ALL
SCREWCONNECTIONS WITH APPROPRIAT EQUIPMENT AND FORCE.
BU =BLUE 5 GY WH/YE WH/BK GN/BK WH/BN/BK WH/PK/BK
WE ACCEPT NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGE, CAUSED BY LOOSE

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


VT =VIOLET 6 PK YE/BN BN/BK YE/BK YE/GN/BK PK/BN/BK
SCREW CONNECTIONS.
GY =GREY 7 BU WH/GY GY/GN GY/BU GY/PK/BK WH/BU/BK
WH =WHITE 8 RD GY/BN YE/GY PK/BU RD/BU/BK BN/BU/BK
PK =PINK 9 BL WH/PK PK/GN GY/RD WH/GN/BK WH/RD/BK
GD =GOLD
WAARSCHUWING
TQ =TURQOIS
SR =SILVER
DOOR HET TRANSPORT VAN DIT SCHAKELPANEEL EN COMPONENTEN
GNYE =GREEN/YELLOW KUNNEN ER SCHROEFVERBINDINGEN ZIJN LOSGERAAKT.
VOOR HET IN BEDRIJFSTELLEN, EERST ALLE SCHROEFVERBINDINGEN

Q-Filter
CONTROLEREN EN NADRAAIEN MET PASSEND GEREEDSCHAP EN KRACHT.

WIJ AANVAARDEN GEEN ENKELE AANSPRAKELIJKHEID VOOR


Appendix C- 62

SCHADE, VEROORZAAKT DOOR LOSZITTENDE SCHROEFVERBINDINGEN.

R
user manual
1 PREVIOUS NEXT 3
DATE 16-10-2014 LOMAPRO INDEX/WIRINGINFO = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
bv PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE PAGE INDEX PAGE PAGE INDEX

/1 COVER
/2 INDEX/WIRINGINFO
/3 PAGE INDEX
/4 POWER CIRCUITS
/4a MOTOR PROPERTIES
/5 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS
/6 PLC ANALOG INPUTS
/7 PLC INPUTS
/8 PLC OUTPUTS
/9 PLC INPUTS
/10 PLC OUTPUTS
/11 PLC OUTPUT; ANALOG
/12 PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS
/13 CONTROL PANEL 1 LAYOUT
/14 CONTROL PANEL 2 LAYOUT
/15 Klemmenstrookoverzicht : =+-ETHERNET - =+-XDOOR
/18 LABELS
/19 RESOPALS
=KLE/351 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-ETHERNET
=KLE/352 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X1
=KLE/353 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X2
=KLE/354 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X3
=KLE/355 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X4
=KLE/356 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X5
=KLE/357 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X31
=KLE/358 Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-XDOOR
=ART/501 PARTS LIST ELECTRO TECHNICAL
=ART/501.a PARTS LIST ELECTRO TECHNICAL
=ART/502 PARTS LIST MECHANICAL
=ART/503 PARTS LIST TERMINALS
=ART/504 PARTS TOTAL OVERVIEW
=ART/504.a PARTS TOTAL OVERVIEW

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


=KAB/601 Kabeloverzicht : =+-4W2 - =+-9W6
=KAB/602 HOSE OVERVIEW

Q-Filter
Appendix C- 63

R
user manual
2 PREVIOUS NEXT 4
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PAGE INDEX = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13 1 3
4F03 4F05 4F07 -4F09
4..6,3A 14 1,6..2,5A 14 0,63A..1A 14 6A C 2 4
..A ..A ..A S202-C6

/7.3

/7.3

/7.3
SEE PAGE 4a I> I> I> SEE PAGE 4a I> I> I> SEE PAGE 4a I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

PE

L1 L2
2 4 6 8 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
-4U09
-4Q01 -8Q01 -8Q03 -8Q06 WDR-120-24
25A /8.1 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 /8.3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 /8.5 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 PSU 200-500VAC/24VDC-5A
1 3 5 7
MAINSWITCH
P1-25/EA/SVB-SW/N/HI11
24VDC 0VDC

PE PE PE PE PE

-X2 1 2 3 PE -X2 4 5 6 PE -X2 7 8 9 PE -X4 24 25 -XDOOR + + + - - -

-4W2 -4W4 -4W6 + -


4G1,5 1 2 3 GNYE 4G1,5 1 2 3 GNYE 4G1,5 1 2 3 GNYE

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


FRAME

+ -
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 5.0 5.0

M M M
-X1 L1 L2 L3 PE P-01 P-02 M-01
PROPERTIES 3~ PROPERTIES 3~ PROPERTIES 3~
SEE PAGE 4a SEE PAGE 4a SEE PAGE 4a
PE PE PE

Q-Filter
POWER SUPPLY P-01 P-02 M-01 24VDC
3PH 440VAC 60Hz + PE EFFLUENT PUMP VACUUM PUMP FILTER CLOTH TRANS.
Appendix C- 64

P=3,15 kW - 6,45kW
(DEPENDS ON CONFIGURATION)

R
user manual
3 PREVIOUS NEXT 4a
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO POWER CIRCUITS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1
+
4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P-01 EFFLUENT PUMP


SELECTION

MERK NORM BB ARTIKEL P(kW) V(VAC) I(Amp) rpm STAR DELTA MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH

KSB - 22KSB3021 2,20 400 4,5 2890 GV2ME10 (4-6,3A)


KSB - 22KSB3026 3,00 400 6,1 2905 GV2ME14 (6-10A)
KSB - 22KSB3025 4,00 400 7,8 2950 GV2ME14 (6-10A)

CUBICON - 22CUB3024 3,00 400 4,8 2900 GV2ME10 (4-6,3A)


CUBICON - 22CUB3025 4,00 400 9,2 2900 GV2ME14 (6-10A)
CUBICON - 22CUB3022 2,2 460/60Hz ? ? GV2ME10 (4-6,3A)

P-02 VACUUM PUMP


SELECTION

MERK NORM BB ARTIKEL P(kW) V(VAC) I(Amp) rpm STAR DELTA MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH

BUSCH - 720001203 0,70 400 2,2 2850 GV2ME07 (1,6-3,5A)


BUSCH - 720001204 2,2 400 5,6 2850 GV2ME10 (4-6,3A)
BUSCH - 720001203 0,83 460/60Hz 2,2 2850 GV2ME07 (1,6-3,5A)

M-01 FILTER CLOTH TRANSPORT


SELECTION

MERK NORM BB ARTIKEL P(kW) V(VAC) I(Amp) rpm STAR DELTA MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


LENZE - 720001200 0,25 400 0,82 1,5 GV2ME05 (0,63-1A )
LENZE - 720001200 0,25 460/60Hz 0,82 1,5 GV2ME05 (0,63-1A )

Q-Filter
Appendix C- 65

R
user manual
4 PREVIOUS NEXT 5
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO MOTOR PROPERTIES = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 4a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4.9 / + + / 6.0

-X4 8 -X4 12

-5W1 1 -5W2 BK

11 13 13 23
5S01.1 -5S02 -5S03
HE-04 12 14 24
14

/9.5
-5W1 2 -5W2 BU

-X4 9 -X4 13

11 61
-5S01.2 -8Q06
HE-05 12 /8.5 62

-5K01
XPSAC5121
13 23 33 Y43
A1 Y1 Y2

A2
14 24 34 Y44

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


4.9 / - - / 6.0
13 14 /8.1
23 24 /9.4
33 34
43 44
SCH.XPSAC5121

Q-Filter
HE-04 XS-07 H-06
Appendix C- 66

HE-05 SAFETY SWITCH OVERRIDE SAFETY


ESD COVER SWITCH COVER

R
user manual
4a PREVIOUS NEXT 6
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5.9 / + + / 7.0
5.9 / - - / 7.0

-X3 3 -X3 6 -X4 1 -X4 4 -X3 1 -X3 4 -X3 2 -X3 5 -6F01


0,5A
2

x1 -6W3 BN BU x1 x1

-6R07 -6R04 -6R06 PE


500 OHM 500 OHM 500 OHM
x2 x2 x2

-12PS09 +1 -6U04 -12PS06 +1 -12PS07 +1 -6U01


-300..+300mBAR +1 -3 -300..+300mBAR -0..+100mBAR L+ PE M
12-6 12-6 12-6
PS PS PS LOGO! TD
4 2 X60 X70

-2 -2 -2 LAN1 LAN2

-6W3 BK WH
ETHERNET
NETWORK
CONNECTION

-X3 9 -X4 2 -X4 3 -X4 PE -X3 7 -X3 8

PE
Name value
Main pars
OU2 U
ASP 100
AEP 900
EF pars
diS rd3
Uni mm

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


-6U03 I7 I8 I1 I2 X1-P1
/7.1 20 20
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 LAN
/8.0
L+ 1M

PT-01 XT-01 LT-01 LT-02 COMMUNICATION

Q-Filter
VACUUM X-01A CLOTH SENSOR LEVEL X-01A LEVEL X-01B TO LOGO! TDE
Appendix C- 67

R
user manual
5 PREVIOUS NEXT 7
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO PLC ANALOG INPUTS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6.9 / + + / 8.0
6.9 / - - / 8.0

PE

1 13 13
7S03 4F03 -X4 5 -X4 7 -X4 PE
2 14 /4.3 14

-7W5 BN BU BK

13
7U01
4F05
/4.5 1 3 PE
14

13
4F07
/4.7 14
-7W5 WH

-X4 6

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


-6U03
/6.1 I3 I4 I5 I6

H - 01 P-01/P-02/M-01 LS-04HH SPARE

Q-Filter
RESET/ON THERMAL SWITCH LEVEL NOT HH
SWITCH NOT TRIPPED
Appendix C- 68

R
user manual
6 PREVIOUS NEXT 8
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO PLC INPUTS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

7.9 / + + / 9.0

13
-5K01
/5.2 14

-6U03
/6.1 Q1-1 Q2-1 Q3-1 Q4-1

SPARE

Q1-2 Q2-2 Q3-2 Q4-2

A1 A1 A1
-8Q01 -8Q03 -8Q06
24V A2 24V A2 24V A2

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


7.9 / - - / 9.0
1/L1 2/T1 /4.3 1/L1 2/T1 /4.5 1/L1 2/T1 /4.7
3/L2 4/T2 /4.3 3/L2 4/T2 /4.5 3/L2 4/T2 /4.7
5/L3 6/T3 /4.3 5/L3 6/T3 /4.5 5/L3 6/T3 /4.7
13 14 13 14 13 14
SCH.LP1K0910BD SCH.LP1K0910BD 53 54
61 62 /5.4

Q-Filter
SCH.LP1K0910BD
SCH.LA1KN11

EFFLUENT VACUUM FILTER CLOTH SPARE


Appendix C- 69

PUMP PUMP TRANSPORT


P-01 P-02 M-01

R
user manual
7 PREVIOUS NEXT 9
DATE 5-1-2015 LOMAPRO PLC OUTPUTS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8.9 / + + / 10.0
8.9 / - - / 10.0

-X4 16 JUMPER -X4 14 -X4 10


INSTALLED IN
PRODUCTION

-9W6 BN 5W1 3

13 23 23 1 13
-12PS01 P -5K01 -5S03 -9S05 9S06
14 /5.2 24 /5.3 24 H-02 2 H-03 14
FOOT_SWITCH

-9W6 BK 5W1 4

-X4 17 -X4 15 -X4 11

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-9U01
/10.1 L+ 1M I9 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16

PS-03 XS-09 - ENABLE SIGNAL SAFETY RELAY H-06 H-02/03 SPARE SPARE SPARE

Q-Filter
INSTRUMENT AIR FROM MAIN OVERRIDE FILTER CLOTH
MONITOR CONTROL SYSTEM COVERSWITCH TRANSPORT
Appendix C- 70

R
user manual
8 PREVIOUS NEXT 10
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO PLC INPUTS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9.9 / + + / 11.1

-X5 1 -X5 3

-9U01
/9.0 Q1-1 Q2-1 Q3-1 Q4-1 Q5-1 Q6-1 Q7-1 Q8-1
Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12

Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12


Q1-2 Q2-2 Q3-2 Q4-2 Q5-2 Q6-2 Q7-2 Q8-2

-BEACON 3 2 1
x1 x1 x1
-10H02 -10H03 -10H04 -X5 2 -X5 4 X5 5 -X4 22
RD x2 OR x2 GN x2

A1 13 1 1
-10K06 12SV04 -12SV05
C A2 14 2 2

X5 6 -X4 23

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


9.9 / - - / 11.1

A1 A2
14
12 11
24
22 21

Q-Filter
13 14 /10.6
PCX.2903334

LA-03 LA-04 LI-02 XA-03 XA-04 XS-08 XSV-11 XSV-03 XSV-02


ALARM FAULT PRE-ALARM SYSTEM GO ALARM FAULT PRE-ALARM ENABLE INFLUENT DIRTY TANK CLEAN TANK
Appendix C- 71

CONDITION (FILTER CLOTH) CONDITION (FILTER CLOTH) INFLUENT SHUT-OFF VLV FLUSH VLV PULSING

R
user manual
9 PREVIOUS NEXT 11
DATE 6-1-2015 LOMAPRO PLC OUTPUTS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-11U01

AQ1 AQ2

L+ M V1 M1 I1 L+ M V2 M2 I2

-12SV03
24VDC 0,3A 2 4
12-4 -X31 1 2

1 3 5

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


10.9 / +
10.9 / -

Q-Filter
PCV-01
VACUUM SPARE
Appendix C- 72

CONTROL VLV

R
user manual
10 PREVIOUS NEXT 12
DATE 6-1-2015 LOMAPRO PLC OUTPUT; ANALOG = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

11-3

6R06

6R07
X3 2 8 5 PE 3 9 6 PE

6R04
12PS01 1 7 4 PE
12SV03
9-2

PS-03(1) 2 PVC-01(1)

1
10-9
12PS06 12PS07 12PS09
PS-03(2) PVC-01(2)

LT-01(1) LT-02(1)
PS-03(3) 12SV05

XSV-02 CLEAN TANK PULSE VALVE

10-8

CONTROL PANEL 1 PS-03(4)

SPARE 12SV04
CONNECTION
XSV-03 DIRTY TANK FLUSH VALVE LT-01(2) LT-02(2) PT-01(1)

8mm 8mm 8mm 8mm 8mm 10mm

PS-03(5) PCV-01(3) LT-01(3) LT-02(3)

12XV06 -12XV07

LT-01(4)

LT-02(4)
XV-04 XV-05

20 5

PS-03(6) PS-03(7)

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


LS-04 INSTRUMENT AIR 12PV04 LT-01(5) LT-02(5) PT-01(2)
SUPPLY
SET AT 4,5 BAR 10mm 10mm

Q-Filter
PCV-01 LT-01 LT-02 PT-01
VACUUM CONTROL LEVEL X-01A LEVEL X-01B VACUUM X-01A
VALVE
Appendix C- 73

R
user manual
11 PREVIOUS NEXT 13
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TOPCABINET

10H02
LA-03 RD

10H03
LA-04 OG

10H04
380 mm LI-02 GN

SIEMENS LOGO! TDE


XDOOR
12PS09 (TERMINALSTRIP
X3 DOOR)

6U01
12PS07
F1 F2 F3 F4 EXC ENTER

12SV03
300 mm

7S03 5S01.2 5S03 6U03 9U01 11U01


H-01 HE-05 H-06 12PS06
RESET/ON MAINTENANCE
5S03

12PS01
12SV04
MAIN SWITCH
12SV05
4Q01

210 mm

LEFT SIDE FRONT VIEW DOOR VIEW


VIEW INSIDE

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


BOTTOM VIEW

Q-Filter
Appendix C- 74

R
user manual
12 PREVIOUS NEXT 14
DATE 5-1-2015 LOMAPRO CONTROL PANEL 1 LAYOUT = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 13
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

380 mm
-14M3
LOWERCABINET
-Schrank 1
210 mm
30 57

40

52,5
PT-01

25 25
PS-03

25 25
LT-02
PCV-01
SPARE
LT-01

6F01
4F03 4F05 4F07 4F09

600 mm
AE.1038500
4U09 1
10K06

5K01

8Q01 8Q03 8Q06


X01

X05

X31

X02 X04

RIGHT SIDE
FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW
VIEW
INSIDE

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M25

M25 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16

Q-Filter
BOTTOM VIEW
TOP VIEW
Appendix C- 75

R
user manual
13 PREVIOUS NEXT 15
DATE 6-1-2015 LOMAPRO CONTROL PANEL 2 LAYOUT = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1
+
14
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TERMINAL-STRIP OVERVIEW
TERMINAL
GRAPHICAL PAGE OF
TERMINAL-STRIP TERMINAL-STRIP DEFINITION TEXT
FIRST LAST TOTAL PE TOTAL N
TOTAL TERMINAL SCHEDULE
NUMBER
-ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET 0 0 1 =KLE/351
-X1 L1 PE 1 0 4 =KLE/352
-X2 1 PE 3 0 21 =KLE/353
-X3 1 9 0 0 9 =KLE/354
-X4 1 PE 2 0 23 =KLE/355
-X5 1 6 0 0 6 =KLE/356
-X31 1 2 0 0 2 =KLE/357
-XDOOR + - 0 0 6 =KLE/358

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 76

R
user manual
14 PREVIOUS NEXT 18
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenstrookoverzicht : =+-ETHERNET - = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
=+-XDOOR +
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

15 mm
TEXT
US-WMTB(44x15)

60 mm

FIELD ELECTRIC FIELD PNEUMATIC

KABEL LS-04 XSV-02

H-02 LS-04 XSV-02

H-02 XS-07 XSV-02

XS-07 XS-07 XSV-02

XS-07 XSV-02

XT-01 XSV-02

XT-01

XT-01

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


XT-01

LS-04

Q-Filter
LS-04
Appendix C- 77

R
user manual
15 PREVIOUS NEXT 19
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO LABELS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 18
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RESOPALS
COMPONENT TAG LANGUAGE SIZE/COLOR

DUTCH ENGLISH GERMAN

CABLE GLAND 1 - ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET 27x18 mm GREY


CABLE GLAND 2 - SIGNAALKABEL SIGNAL CABEL SIGNALKABEL 27x18 mm GREY
CABLE GLAND 3 - VOEDINGSKABEL POWER SUPPLY STROMVERSORGUNG 27x18 mm GREY

4Q01 - HOOFDSCHAKELAAR MAIN SWITCH HAUPTSCHALTER 45x15 mm GREY


5S01.1E HE-04 NOOD UIT EMERGENCY STOP NOT AUS 27x8 mm YELLOW
5S01.2E HE-05 NOOD UIT EMERGENCY STOP NOT AUS 60 mm YELLOW
5S03 H-06 ONDERHOUD MAINTENANCE WARTUNG 27x8 mm WHITE
7S03 H-01 RESET/AAN RESET/ON RESET/EIN 27x8 mm WHITE
9S06 H-03 DOEK DOORVOER CLOTH TRANSPORT VLIES FRDERN 27x8 mm WHITE

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 78

R
user manual
18 PREVIOUS NEXT =KLE/351
DATE 23-1-2015 LOMAPRO RESOPALS = DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 19
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/6.7
MACH.
TERMINAL

ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER
ETHERNET
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-ETHERNET
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
X70

TERMINAL
-6U01

ODC

PAGE/PATH
/6.7

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 79

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
=/19 PREVIOUS NEXT 352
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-ETHERNET = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 351
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/4.1

/4.1

/4.1

/4.1
MACH.
TERMINAL

5
-4Q01

-4Q01

-4Q01

PE
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER L1 L2 L3 PE
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-X1
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
TERMINAL

ODC

PAGE/PATH

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 80

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
351 PREVIOUS NEXT 353
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X1 = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 352
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/4.3

/4.3

/4.3

/4.3

/4.5

/4.5

/4.5

/4.5

/4.7

/4.7

/4.7

/4.7
MACH.

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3
TERMINAL

-8Q01

-8Q01

-8Q01

PE

-8Q03

-8Q03

-8Q03

PE

-8Q06

-8Q06

-8Q06

PE
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER 1 2 3 PE 4 5 6 PE 7 8 9 PE
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-X2
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
-4W2 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G1,5 1 2 3 GNYE
-4W4 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G1,5 1 2 3 GNYE
-4W6 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G1,5 1 2 3 GNYE
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
W1

W1

W1
U1

U1

U1
V1

V1

V1
PE

PE

PE
TERMINAL
-P-01

-P-01

-P-01

-P-01

-P-02

-P-02

-P-02

-P-02

-M-01

-M-01

-M-01

-M-01
ODC

PAGE/PATH
/4.3

/4.3

/4.3

/4.3

/4.5

/4.5

/4.5

/4.5

/4.7

/4.7

/4.7

/4.7

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION

FILTER CLOTH TRANS.

FILTER CLOTH TRANS.

FILTER CLOTH TRANS.

FILTER CLOTH TRANS.


EFFLUENT PUMP

EFFLUENT PUMP

EFFLUENT PUMP

EFFLUENT PUMP

VACUUM PUMP

VACUUM PUMP

VACUUM PUMP

VACUUM PUMP

M-01

M-01

M-01

M-01
P-01

P-01

P-01

P-01

P-02

P-02

P-02

P-02

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 81

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
352 PREVIOUS NEXT 354
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X2 = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 353
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/6.5

/6.6

/6.2

/6.5

/6.6

/6.2

/6.5

/6.6

/6.2
MACH.

1M
L+

I1

I2

I7
M
TERMINAL

4
-X4

-6F01

-6U03

-X4

-6U01

-6U03

-6U03

-6U03

-6U03
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-X3
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
+1

+1

+1

x1

x1

x1

-2

-2

-2
TERMINAL
-12PS06

-12PS07

-12PS09

-6R04

-6R06

-6R07

-12PS06

-12PS07

-12PS09
ODC

PAGE/PATH
/6.5

/6.6

/6.2

/6.5

/6.6

/6.2

/6.5

/6.6

/6.2

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION
VACUUM X-01A

VACUUM X-01A
LEVEL X-01A

LEVEL X-01A
LEVEL X-01B

LEVEL X-01B
PT-01

PT-01
LT-01

LT-02

LT-01

LT-02

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 82

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
353 PREVIOUS NEXT 355
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X3 = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 354
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/10.7

/10.7
/6.3

/6.3

/6.4

/6.4

/5.1

/5.1

/5.2

/5.2

/9.6

/9.6

/9.3

/9.3

/6.4
/4.8

/4.8
/9.7

/9.7
/7.5

/7.5

/7.5

/7.6
MACH.

Q5

A1

A1

A2
13

11

12

23

13
I8

+
TERMINAL

-
-X3

-6U03

-X3

-4F03

-6U03

-6U01

-XDOOR

-9U01

-9U01

-5S01.2

-5S01.2

-5K01

-5S03

-9U01

-12PS01

-9U01

-10K06

-10K06

-XDOOR

-XDOOR

PE

PE
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 22 23 24 25 PE PE
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-X4
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
-6W3 BN BK WH BU
-7W5 BN WH BU BK
-5W1 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 5G1 1 3 4 2
-5W2 BK BU
CABLE

-9W6 BN BK

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
+1

PE
11

13

14

12

13

14

13

14

x1

x2
-3
4

2
TERMINAL
-6U04

-6U04

-6U04

-6U04

-7U01

-7U01

-7U01

-5S01.1

-9S06

-9S06

-5S01.1

-5S02

-5S02

-9S05

-9S05

-UNK

-UNK

-10Y6

-10Y6

-7U01
ODC

PAGE/PATH

/10.7

/10.7
/6.3

/6.3

/6.4

/6.4

/5.1

/5.1

/5.2

/5.2

/9.6

/9.6

/9.3

/9.3
/9.7

/9.7
/7.5

/7.5

/7.5

/7.6

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


FROM MAIN CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION

INFLUENT SHUT-OFF VLV


SAFETY SWITCH COVER

XS-09 - ENABLE SIGNAL


CLOTH SENSOR

FOOT_SWITCH
LEVEL NOT HH
LS-04HH

XSV-11
HE-04

HE-04

XS-07
XT-01

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 83

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
354 PREVIOUS NEXT 356
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X4 = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 355
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

/10.4

/10.4

/10.5

/10.5

/10.6

/10.6
PAGE/PATH

MACH.

Q9
TERMINAL

-9U01
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-X5
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0 0 0 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
Q8

Q8

Q9

13

14

TERMINAL
-9U01

-9U01

-9U01

-10K06

-10K06

ODC

PAGE/PATH
/10.4

/10.4

/10.5

/10.6

/10.6

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION
PRE-ALARM (FILTER CLOTH)
ALARM FAULT CONDITION

ENABLE INFLUENT
XA-03

XA-04

XS-08
=

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 84

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
355 PREVIOUS NEXT 357
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X5 = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 356
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/11.7

/11.7
MACH.

M2

I2
TERMINAL

-11U01

-11U01
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER 1 2
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-X31
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
TERMINAL

ODC

PAGE/PATH

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 85

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
356 PREVIOUS NEXT 358
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-X31 = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 357
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PAGE/PATH

/4.9

/4.9

/4.9

/4.9

/4.9

/4.9
MACH.

-4U09 24VDC

0VDC
TERMINAL

-4U09
ODC

FROM/INTERNAL
TERM. NUMBER + + + - - -
TERMINALSTRIP
=+-XDOOR
TERM. LEVEL(*) 0 0 0 0 0 0

ODC TYPE NUMBER/DIAM.


OF CODUCTOR
CABLE

TO/EXTERNAL MACH.
A2
8

TERMINAL
-X4

-5K01

ODC

PAGE/PATH
/5.1

/5.2

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


DESCRIPTION
SAFETY SWITCH COVER
HE-05 ESD
HE-04

XS-07

Q-Filter
(*) LEVEL 3
TERMINAL LEVEL 3 = THIRD LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
TERMINAL LEVEL 2 = SECOND LEVEL, ABOVE TERMINAL LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
Appendix C- 86

TERMINAL LEVEL 1 = FIRST LEVEL, CLOSEST TO THE MOUNTINGPLATE


TERMINAL LEVEL 0 = STANDARD TERMINAL, NO LEVELS

R
MOUNTINGPLATE

user manual
357 PREVIOUS NEXT =ART/501
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Klemmenaansluitlijst =+-XDOOR = KLE DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 358
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ELECTROTECHNICAL PARTLIST
PARTCODE AMOUNT DESCRIPTION PARTNUMBER MANUFACTURER ORDERNUMBER

-BEACON 1 FIXING PLATE VERTICAL SURFACE XVBC12 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC XVBC12


-BEACON 1 70 MM BASE UNIT + COVER - BLACK XVBC21 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC XVBC21
-BEACON 1 70 MM ILLUMINATED UNIT - STEADY - GREEN - IP65 - 24 V XVBC2B3 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC XVBC2B3
-BEACON 1 70 MM ILLUMINATED UNIT - STEADY - RED - IP65 - 24 V XVBC2B4 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC XVBC2B4
-BEACON 1 70 MM ILLUMINATED UNIT - STEADY - ORANGE - IP65 - 24 V XVBC2B5 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC XVBC2B5
-XDOOR 6 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3209510
-4F03 1 MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH 4..6,3A GV2ME10 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC GV2ME10
-4F05 1 MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH 1,6..3,5A GV2ME07 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC GV2ME07
-4F07 1 MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH 0,63A..1A GV2ME05 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC GV2ME05
-4F09 1 MINI CIRCUIT BREAKER 6A C 2POLE S202-C6 ABB 2CDS252001R0064
-4Q01 1 MAIN SWITCH 25A 3P+N P1-25/EA/SVB-SW/N/HI11 EATON 050740
-4U09 1 PSU 200-500VAC/24VDC-5A WDR-120-24 MEANWELL 4743829
-5K01 1 SAFETY RELAY 24AC/DC XPSAC5121 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC XPSAC5121
-5S01.1 1 30 EMERG. SWITCH PUSHBUTTONHEAD ZB5AS44 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB5AS44
-5S01.1 1 SINGLE CONT. BLOCK 22 SCREW CLAMP NC ZENL1121 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZENL1121
-5S01.2 1 RED 40 EMERGENCY STOP, 22 MOUNT ZB4BS844 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BS844
-5S01.2 1 BODY WITH 1NC CONTACT ZB4BZ102 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BZ102
-5S01.2 1 EMERGENCY STOP/LOGO ISO13850 ZBY9330 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZBY9330
-5S01.2 1 LEGEND HOLDER 30 X 40 MM 22 ZBZ32 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZBZ32
-5S03 1 KEY SWITCH HEAD 22 2-POSITION (0-1) STAY PUT ZB4BG2 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BG2
-5S03 1 BODY WITH 1NO CONTACT ZB4BZ101 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BZ101
-5S03 1 CONTACT BLOCK FOR HEAD 22 1NO ZBE101 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZBE101
-5S03 1 LEGEND HOLDER 30 X 40 MM 22 ZBZ32 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZBZ32
-6F01 1 FUSE 5X20 500MA 5X20 500MA INELV D4508
-6F01 1 FUSE PLUG P-FU 5X20 P-FU 5X20 PHOENIX CONTACT 3036806
-6F01 1 KNIFE DISCONNECT TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5-TWIN-MT (COMPONENT) PT 2,5-TWIN-MT PHOENIX CONTACT D1247
-6F01 1 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886
-6F01 1 END COVER DS-ST 2,5 DS-ST 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3036602
-6U01 1 LOGO! TDE TEXT DISPLAY 6 LINES 3BG COLORS 2 ETH 6ED1055-4MH00-0BA1 SIEMENS 6ED1055-4MH00-0BA1
-6U03 1 LOGO! 12/24RCE 8DI (4AI)/4DO 6ED1052-1MD00-0BA8 SIEMENS 6ED1052-1MD00-0BA8
-6U03 1 PATCHCABLE 2M SHIELDED STRAIGHT/270 RJ45 FOR TDE-DISPLAY LOGO_TDE_CABLE SIEMENS L0001A0199
-7S03 1 SELECTOR SWITCH HEAD 22 90 0-1 STAY PUT ZB4BD2 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1977214
-7S03 1 BODY WITH 1NO CONTACT ZB4BZ101 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BZ101
-8Q01 1 CONTACTOR TESYS LP1-K - 3P - AC-3 440V 9 A LP1K0910BD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC LP1K0910BD

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


-8Q03 1 CONTACTOR TESYS LP1-K - 3P - AC-3 440V 9 A LP1K0910BD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC LP1K0910BD
-8Q06 1 CONTACTOR TESYS LP1-K - 3P - AC-3 440V 9 A LP1K0910BD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC LP1K0910BD
-8Q06 1 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TeSys 1 NO + 1 NC LA1KN11 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC LA1KN11
-9S06 1 WHITE FLUSH PUSHBUTTON HEAD 22 SPRING RET. ZB5AA1 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB5AA1
-9S06 1 SINGLE CONT.BLOCK 22 HEAD SCREW CLAMP 1NO ZENL1111 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZENL1111
-9U01 1 LOGO! DM16 24R 8DI 8DO (RELAY) 6ED1055-1NB10-0BA2 SIEMENS 6ED1055-1NB10-0BA2
-10K06 1 RIF 1 RELAY+SOCKET 24VDC 2X CHANGE OVER RIF-1-RPT-LDP-24VDC/2X21 PHOENIX CONTACT 2903334
-11U01 1 LOGO! AM 2AQ 0-10V 6ED1055-1MM00-0BA2 SIEMENS 6ED1055-1MM00-0BA2
-12PS01 1 PRESSURE SWITCH PMN10A METAL WORK PMN10A

Q-Filter
-12PS06 1 PRESSURE SENSOR T PMC131-A15F1D39 ENDRESS+HAUSER T PMC131-A15F1D39
-12PS07 1 PRESSURE SENSOR T PMC131-A15F1D10 ENDRESS+HAUSER T PMC131-A15F1D10
-12PS09 1 PRESSURE SENSOR T PMC131-A15F1D39 ENDRESS+HAUSER T PMC131-A15F1D39
Appendix C- 87

R
user manual
=KLE/358 PREVIOUS NEXT 501.a
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PARTS LIST ELECTRO TECHNICAL = ART DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 501
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ELECTROTECHNICAL PARTLIST
PARTCODE AMOUNT DESCRIPTION PARTNUMBER MANUFACTURER ORDERNUMBER

-12SV03 1 PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE REGULATOR ED02/R414002403 BOSCH REXROTH AG ED02/R414002403


-12SV04 1 VALVE 3/2 ELECTRIC SOV-33-SOS-NC METAL WORK SOV-33-SOS-NC
-12SV05 1 VALVE 3/2 ELECTRIC SOV-33-SOS-NC METAL WORK SOV-33-SOS-NC

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 88

R
user manual
501 PREVIOUS NEXT 502
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PARTS LIST ELECTRO TECHNICAL = ART DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 501.a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

MECHANICAL PARTLIST
PARTCODE AMOUNT LENGTH DESCRIPTION PARTNUMBER MANUFACTURER ORDERNUMBER

-12XV06 1 NEEDLE VALVE IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION METAL WORK IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION
-12XV07 1 NEEDLE VALVE IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION METAL WORK IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION
-13SCH1 1 AE1031.500 380/300/210 AE1031.500 RITTAL AE1031.500
-14SCH1 1 RITTAL KAST 380x600x210 INCL. MONTAGEPLAAT 1038.500 RITTAL 1038.500

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 89

R
user manual
501.a PREVIOUS NEXT 503
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PARTS LIST MECHANICAL = ART DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 502
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ELECTROTECHNICAL PARTLIST TERMINALS


PARTCODE AMOUNT DESCRIPTION PARTNUMBER MANUFACTURER ORDERNUMBER

-X1 1 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886


-X1 1 TERMINAL STRIP MARKERS KLM-A KLM-A PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348
-X1 3 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 4 PT 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 3211757
-X1 1 GROUND MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 4-PE PT 4-PE PHOENIX CONTACT 3211766
-X1 1 END COVER D-ST 2,5 D-ST 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3030417
-X2 2 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886
-X2 1 TERMINAL STRIP MARKERS KLM-A KLM-A PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348
-X2 9 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3209510
-X2 3 GROUND MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5-PE PT 2,5-PE PHOENIX CONTACT 3209536
-X2 1 END COVER D-ST 2,5 D-ST 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3030417
-X3 1 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886
-X3 1 TERMINAL STRIP MARKERS KLM-A KLM-A PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348
-X3 9 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3209510
-X4 2 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886
-X4 1 TERMINAL STRIP MARKERS KLM-A KLM-A PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348
-X4 21 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3209510
-X4 2 GROUND MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5-PE PT 2,5-PE PHOENIX CONTACT 3209536
-X4 1 END COVER D-ST 2,5 D-ST 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3030417
-X5 2 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886
-X5 1 TERMINAL STRIP MARKERS KLM-A KLM-A PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348
-X5 6 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3209510
-X5 2 END COVER D-ST 2,5 D-ST 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3030417
-X31 2 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3209510
-X31 1 END COVER D-ST 2,5 D-ST 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3030417
-X31 1 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 90

R
user manual
502 PREVIOUS NEXT 504
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PARTS LIST TERMINALS = ART DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 503
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

COMPONENT OVERVIEW
Order number Quantity description Type number part number manufacturer

XVBC12 1 FIXING PLATE VERTICAL SURFACE XVBC12 SCH.XVBC12 SCH


XVBC21 1 70 MM BASE UNIT + COVER - BLACK XVBC21 SCH.XVBC21 SCH
XVBC2B3 1 70 MM ILLUMINATED UNIT - STEADY - GREEN - IP65 - 24 V XVBC2B3 SCH.XVBC2B3 SCH
XVBC2B4 1 70 MM ILLUMINATED UNIT - STEADY - RED - IP65 - 24 V XVBC2B4 SCH.XVBC2B4 SCH
XVBC2B5 1 70 MM ILLUMINATED UNIT - STEADY - ORANGE - IP65 - 24 V XVBC2B5 SCH.XVBC2B5 SCH
GV2ME10 1 MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH 4..6,3A GV2ME10 SCH.GV2ME10 SCH
GV2ME07 1 MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH 1,6..3,5A GV2ME07 SCH.GV2ME07 SCH
GV2ME05 1 MOTOR OVERLOAD SWITCH 0,63A..1A GV2ME05 SCH.GV2ME05 SCH
2CDS252001R0064 1 MINI CIRCUIT BREAKER 6A C 2POLE S202-C6 ABB.2CDS252001R0064_S202-C6 ABB
D4508 1 FUSE 5X20 500MA 5X20 500MA ILV.FUSE 5X20 500MA ILV
3036806 1 FUSE PLUG P-FU 5X20 P-FU 5X20 PXC.3036806 PHX
D1247 1 KNIFE DISCONNECT TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5-TWIN-MT (COMPONENT) PT 2,5-TWIN-MT PXC.3210169 PHX
0800886 10 END CLAMP E/NS 35 N E/NS 35 N PXC.0800886 PHX
3036602 1 END COVER DS-ST 2,5 DS-ST 2,5 PXC.3036602 PHX
XPSAC5121 1 SAFETY RELAY 24AC/DC XPSAC5121 SCH.XPSAC5121 SCH
2903334 1 RIF 1 RELAY+SOCKET 24VDC 2X CHANGE OVER RIF-1-RPT-LDP-24VDC/2X21 PCX.2903334 PHX
PMN10A 1 PRESSURE SWITCH PMN10A MTW. PMN10A MTW
T PMC131-A15F1D39 2 PRESSURE SENSOR T PMC131-A15F1D39 E&H. T PMC131-A15F1D39 E&H
T PMC131-A15F1D10 1 PRESSURE SENSOR T PMC131-A15F1D10 E&H. T PMC131-A15F1D10 E&H
050740 1 MAIN SWITCH 25A 3P+N P1-25/EA/SVB-SW/N/HI11 EAT.P1-25/EA/SVB-SW/N/HI11 EAT
LP1K0910BD 3 CONTACTOR TESYS LP1-K - 3P - AC-3 440V 9 A LP1K0910BD SCH.LP1K0910BD SCH
LA1KN11 1 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TeSys 1 NO + 1 NC LA1KN11 SCH.LA1KN11 SCH
ZB5AS44 1 30 EMERG. SWITCH PUSHBUTTONHEAD ZB5AS44 SCH.ZB5AS44 SCH
ZENL1121 1 SINGLE CONT. BLOCK 22 SCREW CLAMP NC ZENL1121 SCH.ZENL1121 SCH
ZB4BS844 1 RED 40 EMERGENCY STOP, 22 MOUNT ZB4BS844 SCH.ZB4BS844 SCH
ZB4BZ102 1 BODY WITH 1NC CONTACT ZB4BZ102 SCH.ZB4BZ102 SCH
ZBY9330 1 EMERGENCY STOP/LOGO ISO13850 ZBY9330 SCH.ZBY9330 SCH
ZBZ32 2 LEGEND HOLDER 30 X 40 MM 22 ZBZ32 SCH.ZBZ32 SCH
ZB4BG2 1 KEY SWITCH HEAD 22 2-POSITION (0-1) STAY PUT ZB4BG2 SCH.ZB4BG2 KEY SCH
ZB4BZ101 2 BODY WITH 1NO CONTACT ZB4BZ101 SCH.ZB4BZ101 SCH
ZBE101 1 CONTACT BLOCK FOR HEAD 22 1NO ZBE101 SCH.ZBE101 SCH
1977214 1 SELECTOR SWITCH HEAD 22 90 0-1 STAY PUT ZB4BD2 SCH.ZB4BD2 SCH
ZB5AA1 1 WHITE FLUSH PUSHBUTTON HEAD 22 SPRING RET. ZB5AA1 SCH.ZB5AA1 SCH
ZENL1111 1 SINGLE CONT.BLOCK 22 HEAD SCREW CLAMP 1NO ZENL1111 SCH.ZENL1111 SCH
AE1031.500 1 AE1031.500 380/300/210 AE1031.500 RIT.AE 1031.500 RITTAL

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


1038.500 1 RITTAL KAST 380x600x210 INCL. MONTAGEPLAAT 1038.500 RIT.AE1038.500 RITTAL
ED02/R414002403 1 PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE REGULATOR ED02/R414002403 REX.ED02/R414002403 REX
SOV-33-SOS-NC 2 VALVE 3/2 ELECTRIC SOV-33-SOS-NC MTW.SOV-33-SOS-NC MTW
4743829 1 PSU 200-500VAC/24VDC-5A WDR-120-24 MEA.WDR-120-24 MEA
6ED1055-4MH00-0BA1 1 LOGO! TDE TEXT DISPLAY 6 LINES 3BG COLORS 2 ETH 6ED1055-4MH00-0BA1 SIE.6ED1055-4MH00-0BA1 SIEMEN
6ED1052-1MD00-0BA8 1 LOGO! 12/24RCE 8DI (4AI)/4DO 6ED1052-1MD00-0BA8 SIE.6ED1052-1MD00-0BA8 SIEMEN
L0001A0199 1 PATCHCABLE 2M SHIELDED STRAIGHT/270 RJ45 FOR TDE-DISPLAY LOGO_TDE_CABLE SIE.LOGO_TDE_CABLE SIEMEN
6ED1055-1NB10-0BA2 1 LOGO! DM16 24R 8DI 8DO (RELAY) 6ED1055-1NB10-0BA2 SIE.6ED1055-1NB10-0BA2 SIEMEN
6ED1055-1MM00-0BA2 1 LOGO! AM 2AQ 0-10V 6ED1055-1MM00-0BA2 SIE.6ED1055-1MM00-0BA2 SIEMEN

Q-Filter
1119304 3 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G1,5 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 LAPP.1119304 LAPP
1119205 1 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 5G1 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 LAPP.1119205 LAPP
Appendix C- 91

R
user manual
503 PREVIOUS NEXT 504.a
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PARTS TOTAL OVERVIEW = ART DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 504
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

COMPONENT OVERVIEW
Order number Quantity description Type number part number manufacturer

1004348 3,10 5 TERMINAL STRIP MARKERS KLM-A KLM-A PXC.1004348 PHX


3211757 3 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 4 PT 4 PXC.3211757 PHX
3211766 1 GROUND MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 4-PE PT 4-PE PXC.3211766 PHX
3030417 6 END COVER D-ST 2,5 D-ST 2,5 PXC.3030417 PHX
3209510 53 FEED-THROUGH MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5 PT 2,5 PXC.3209510 PHX
3209536 5 GROUND MODULAR TERMINAL BLOCK PT 2,5-PE PT 2,5-PE PXC.3209536 PHX
IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION 2 NEEDLE VALVE IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION MTW.IN-LINE 8mm BI-DIRECTION MTW

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 92

R
user manual
504 PREVIOUS NEXT =KAB/601
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO PARTS TOTAL OVERVIEW = ART DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 504.a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CABLE OVERVIEW
CONDUCTORS CROSS-SECTION LENGTH
CABLE NAME SOURCE (FROM) TARGET(TO) CABLE TYPE ALL CONDUCTORS FUNCTION TEXT
USED (mm) [m]
-4W2 -X2 -P-01 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G 4 1,5 1,3 P-01 EFFLUENT PUMP

-4W4 -X2 -P-02 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G 4 1,5 1,6 P-02 VACUUM PUMP

-4W6 -X2 -M-01 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 4G 4 1,5 1,12 M-01 FILTER CLOTH TRANS.

-5W1 -X4 -5S01.1 LFLEX CLASSIC 110 5G 4 1 1,8 H-03/HE-04

-9S06

-5W2 -X4 -5S02 2 XS-07 SAFETY SWITCH COVER

-6W3 -X4 -6U04 4 XT-01 CLOTH SENSOR

-7W5 -X4 -7U01 4 LS-04HH LEVEL NOT HH

-9W6 -X4 -9S05 2 FOOT-SWITCH

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


Q-Filter
Appendix C- 93

R
user manual
=ART/504.a PREVIOUS NEXT 602
DATE 27-1-2015 LOMAPRO Kabeloverzicht : =+-4W2 - =+-9W6 = KAB DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 601
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HOSE/CABLE OVERVIEW
EQUIPMENT CLIENT TAGGING ID TAG TAG PLATE LENGTH TYPE CABLE/HOSE REMARKS

PNEUMATIC
CABINET
CLEAN TANK LEVEL (LT-01) LT-01 (1) PRINTED 152 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-01 (2) PRINTED 150 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
DIRTY TANK LEVEL (LT-02) LT-02 (1) PRINTED 133 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-02 (2) PRINTED 173 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
INST. AIR MONITORS (PS-03) PS-03 (1) PRINTED 51 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= PS-03 (2) PRINTED 93 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= PS-03 (3) PRINTED 58 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= PS-03 (4) PRINTED 172 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
VACUUM CONTROL VALVE (PCV-01) PVC-01 (1) PRINTED 143 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= PVC-01 (2) PRINTED 200 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
VACUUM (PT-01) PT-01 (1) PRINTED 339 COPU 55 SHD 10x1
FIELD
CLEAN TANK LEVEL (LT-02) LT-01 (3) PRINTED 160 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-01 (4) PRINTED 280 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-01 (5) PRINTED 50 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-01 (6) PRINTED 770 COPU 55 SHD 10x1
DIRTY TANK LEVEL (LT-02) LT-02 (3) PRINTED 280 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-02 (4) PRINTED 190 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-02 (5) PRINTED 60 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= LT-02 (6) PRINTED 200 COPU 55 SHD 10x1
INST. AIR MONITOR (PS-03) PS-03 (5) PRINTED 290 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= PS-03 (6) PRINTED 150 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
= PS-03 (7) PRINTED 250 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
VACUUM CONTROL VALVE (PCV-01) PCV-01 (3) PRINTED 415 COPU 55 SHD 8x1
VACUUM (PT-01) PT-01 (2) PRINTED 510 COPU 55 SHD 10x1
ELECTRICAL
EFFLUENT PUMP (P-01) P-01 PRINTED 1300 OLFLEX CL.100 4G1,5

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


EXHAUSTER (P-02) P-02 PRINTED 1600 OLFLEX CL.100 4G1,5
DRIVE CLOTH TRANSP (M-01) M-01 PRINTED 1120 OLFLEX CL.100 4G1,5
ESD / CLOTH (H-03/HE-04) H-03/HE-04 PRINTED 1800 OLFLEX CL.110 5G1,5
CLOTHSENSOR (XT-01) XT-01 US-WMTB (44x15) 4X
HH LEVEL (LS-04) LS-04 US-WMTB (44x15) 4X
COVER SWITCH (XS-07) XS-07 US-WMTB (44x15) 4X
FOOT SWITCH (H-02) H-02 US-WMTB (44x15) 4X

Q-Filter
Appendix C- 94

R
user manual
601 PREVIOUS NEXT
DATE 5-1-2015 LOMAPRO HOSE OVERVIEW = KAB DRAWINGNUMBER:

REVISION DATE NAME


ENG.
CHK
ORIGIN
eplan2 PROJECTNUMBER: XXXXX
PROJECTDESCIPTION: KLANT/EINDGEBRUIKER
REPLACEMENT FROM CHANGED BY
+
PROJECTNUMBER: 14312 ISSUE 1.1 602
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix D. Data sheets.

95
Lomapro b.v.
Tel. +31 73 2200030
Email: business@q-filtration.eu
WWW: q-filtration.eu

START SYSTEM

First: Than: Messages when incoming flow is


Switch to the
right. briefly interrupted.

Switch to
the left.

ALARMS

No active alarm; Active alarm;


start system. see reverse side.

RETRIEVE PROCESS DATA

Key switch to the


right.

Cover can be opened and filter cloth can be


changed without the system shutting down.

WARNINGS

Signal from main control a. Runs >85% of the time Filter cloth is nearly The incoming flow
system (jumper) is not b. Level does not drop finished; a new roll must exceeds the capacity of
there. (fast enough). be placed shortly. the system.

Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge


Lomapro b.v.
Tel. +31 73 2200030
Email: business@q-filtration.eu
WWW: q-filtration.eu

ACTIVE ALARMS
Level clean tank. Circuit breaker in control
a. LS-04 sensor actuated panel.
(level too high) One or more circuit breakers
b. LT-01 sensor signal outside off
range

Acknowledge Acknowledge
Level dirty tank. Instrument air sensor;
a. Filter cloth indexes to Pressure is too low or sensor
frequently PS-03 adjustment error
b. LT-02 sensor signal outside
range

Acknowledge Acknowledge
Cloth sensor Shut down button actuated or
a. Cloth is gone; place new cover opened without key
roll of cloth. switch in ON position
b. XT-01 sensor signal
outside range

Acknowledge Acknowledge
Vacuum sensor
PT-01 sensor signal outside
range

Acknowledge

USER FUNCTIONS

+ +
Switches inlet on Switches inlet off

hold for 3
seconds
F4 pressed= Effluent pump P-01 ON.
USER PARAMETER
(See C1 setpoints for the actually set values.)

Press and hold


Limit for 3 seconds
maximum Press to enter
vacuum editing

Select a
digit

Minimum
Change a
cloth length
digit
when
indexing.
Press to store
value

F4 pressed = Flush LT-02 ON (Level measurement blocked!!)


Suparator Systems Europe b.v.
Lomapro b.v.
Tel. +31 73 2200030
Email: business@suparator.eu
WWW: www.suparator.eu

(RE)LOADING A PROGRAM IN A SIEMENS LOGO! CONTROLLER


(Logo! versions 0BA8 and later)

The application program stored in a Siemens Logo! controller To load the application program you will need to
can not be lost, changed or erased by itself and there is have a 'binary' file called "LOGO_U_P.bin" with
normally no need to reload the program. In case of a hardware the application software.
failure, if the base module needs replacement, follow these This file must be stored on a micro SD card
instructions to load the program. formatted in FAT32 format..

Contact us if you cannot locate this file.


STEP 1:

Turn off the power.

STEP 2:
Pull the memory card adaptor out from the Logo!
base module and Insert the micro SD memory
card in the adaptor as shown in the picture.

Make sure the card is fully and properly inserted.


It should latch when fully inserted. To release the
card, push it in once.

STEP 3:
Push the adaptor back into the base module as
shown. The adaptor should slide in easily. Do not
excercise great force. Try re-aligning the adaport
if it does not slide in easily.

STEP 4:
Turn on the power. The Logo! will automatically
download the program from the memory card into
the internal memory..

STEP 5:
Once powered up, the Logo! display will show
the menu on the left. Use 'Start' to start the
application program.

Remove the micro SD card after the program is


loaded. Otherwise the Logo! will reload the
program, each time the power is switched on.
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E. Suppliers manuals.

99
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! ___________________
Preface

___________________
Getting started with LOGO! 1
___________________
LOGO! installation and
wiring 2
___________________
Programming LOGO! 3
___________________
LOGO! functions 4
___________________
Web server 5
LOGO!
___________________
UDF (User-Defined
Function) 6
___________________
Data log 7
Manual
___________________
Configuring LOGO! 8
___________________
Using memory cards 9
___________________
Security 10
___________________
LOGO! software 11
___________________
Applications 12
___________________
Technical data A
___________________
Determining the cycle time B
___________________
LOGO! without display
("LOGO! Pure") C
___________________
LOGO! menu structure D
___________________
Order numbers E
___________________
Abbreviations F

This manual applies to LOGO! 0BA8 device series


only.

06/2014
A5E33039675

Appendix E- 100
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E33039675 Copyright Siemens AG 2014.


Industry Sector 06/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY

Appendix E- 101
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.1 Modular LOGO! setup

Overview: Connecting an additional expansion module to an expansion module

Expansion module Additional expansion modules


DM8 DM8 24, DM8 24R DM8 AM2,
12/24R, DM16 24 230R, AM2 RTD,
DM16 DM16 AM2 AQ
24R 230R
DM8 12/24R, x x x - x
DM16 24R
DM8 24, x x x - x
DM16 24
DM8 24 R x x x - x
DM8 230R, - - - x x
DM16 230R
AM2, x x x - x
AM2 RTD,
AM2 AQ

2.1.4 Compatibility
You can only use the LOGO! TDE module with equipment series 0BA8. The LOGO! TDE is
fully compatible with LOGO! 0BA8.
The LOGO! TDE module provides two Ethernet ports for network connection and six-line text
display specifically for the LOGO! 0BA8 device.
All expansion modules (with the order number of 6ED1055-1XXXX-0BA2) are completely
compatible with the LOGO! Base Modules of equipment series 0BA8 and you can only use
them with equipment series 0BA8.
LOGO! 0BA8 supports micro SD cards only.
You cannot edit message texts from the LOGO! Base Module that contain any of the
following parameters:
Par
Time
Date
EnTime
EnDate
Analog input
Digital I/O status
Special characters (for example: , )
You can only edit such message texts from LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 31

Appendix E- 102
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

Dimensions
The LOGO! installation dimensions are compliant with DIN 43880.
LOGO! can be snap-mounted to 35 mm DIN rails according to EN 60715 or mounted on the
wall with two M4 screws.
LOGO! width:
LOGO! TDE has a width of 128.2 mm.
LOGO! 0BA8 Base Modules have a width of 71.5 mm.
LOGO! expansion modules have a width of 35.5 mm (DM8...) or 71.5 mm (DM16...).

Note
The figures below show you an example of the installation and removal of a LOGO!
12/24RCE and a digital module. The measures shown apply to all other LOGO! Base
Module versions and expansion modules.

WARNING
Risk to life when you touch live parts
Death or serious injury can result when you touch live parts.
Always switch off power before you remove or insert an expansion module.

LOGO!
32 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 103
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

2.2.1 DIN rail mounting

Mounting
To mount a LOGO! Base Module and a digital module onto a DIN rail, follow these steps:
1. Hook the LOGO! Base Module onto the rail.
2. Push down the lower end to snap it on. The mounting interlock at the rear must engage.

3. On the right side of the LOGO! Base Module/LOGO! expansion module, remove the
connector cap.
4. Place the digital module onto the DIN rail on the right-hand side of the LOGO! Base
Module.
5. Slide the digital module towards the left until it contacts the LOGO! Base Module.
6. Using a screwdriver, push the interlock to the left. In its end position the slide interlock
engages in the LOGO! Base Module.

Repeat the digital module steps to mount further expansion modules.

Note
Be sure to cover the expansion interface on the last expansion module.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 33

Appendix E- 104
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

Removal
To remove LOGO! if you have installed only one LOGO! Base Module, follow these steps:
1. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and move the latch
downward.
2. Swing the LOGO! Base Module off the DIN rail.

To remove LOGO! if you have connected at least one expansion module to the LOGO! Base
Module, follow these steps:
1. Using a screwdriver, push the integrated slide interlock to the right.
2. Slide the expansion module off towards the right.
3. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and lever it
downward.
4. Swing the expansion module off the profile rail.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all other expansion modules.

Note
When removing modules, be sure to disengage the slide interlock of the module that
connects it to the next module. When removing multiple modules, it is easier to start with the
last module on the right side.

LOGO!
34 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 105
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

2.2.2 Wall-mounting
Follow the instructions below to wall-mount LOGO! by means of two mounting slides and two
M4 screws (tightening torque 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm).

Note
When you do not wall-mount LOGO!, always keep the mounting slides in the factory default
positions, that is, within the data area given in the illustration above; otherwise, the mounting
slides may deform if they are exposed to hot and humid surroundings for a long term.

Drilling template for wall-mounting


Before you can wall-mount LOGO!, you need to drill holes using the template shown below:

All dimensions in mm
Bore hole for M4 screw, tightening torque 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
LOGO! Base Module

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 35

Appendix E- 106
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

LOGO! expansion modules, DM8 ..., AM...


LOGO! expansion modules, DM16 ...

2.2.3 Mounting the LOGO! TDE

Note
Make sure you mount the LOGO! TDE vertically on a flat surface of an IP 65 or Type 4X/12
enclosure.

To prepare the mounting surface for the optional LOGO! TDE and mount it, follow these
steps:
1. Cut a 119 mm 78.5 mm (tolerance: +0.5 mm) hole in the mounting surface.

2. Place the included gasket on the frontplate of the LOGO! TDE.


3. Fit the LOGO! TDE into the cutout you made in the mounting surface.
4. Attach the mounting brackets (included) to the LOGO! TDE.
5. Tighten the mounting screws on the mounting brackets to 0.2 Nm torque to secure the
LOGO! TDE.

Mounting brackets
Mounting screws
Gasket
Cabinet door or control panel
(Thickness: 1.5 mm to 4 mm)

You can then connect the LOGO! TDE to the LOGO! Base Module through the Ethernet
interface.

LOGO!
36 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 107
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.2.4 Labeling LOGO!


The rectangular areas on the LOGO! modules are intended for labeling.

In the case of expansion modules, you can use the rectangular areas for labeling the inputs
and outputs, for example. In this connection, you can enter a delta factor of +8 for the inputs
or +4 for the outputs if the LOGO! Base Module already has 8 inputs or 4 outputs.

2.3 Wiring LOGO!


Wire LOGO! using a screwdriver with a 3 mm blade.
You do not need to wire ferrules for the terminals. You can use conductors fulfilled the
following requirements:
Cross-sections of up to the following thicknesses:
1 2.5 mm2
2 1.5 mm2 for each second terminal chamber
Conductor material: Cu
Insulation temperature rating: 75 C
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm or 4.5 in-lbf to 5.3 in-lbf.

Note
Always cover the terminals after you have completed the installation. To protect LOGO!
adequately from impermissible contact to live parts, comply with local standards.

2.3.1 Connecting the power supply


The 230 V versions of LOGO! are suitable for operation with rated voltages of 115 VAC/VDC
and 240 VAC/VDC. The LOGO! 24 V and 12 V versions can be operated with a 24 VDC,
24 VAC or 12 VDC power supply. For information on permissible voltage tolerances, line
frequencies and power consumption, refer to the installation instructions in the Product
Information supplied with your device and to the technical data in Appendix A.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 37

Appendix E- 108
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

The LOGO! TDE must be supplied with a voltage of 12 VDC or 24 VAC/VDC.

CAUTION

Expansion modules DM8 230R and DM16 230R must be operated with the same type of
power supply (DC or AC) as for the connected 230 V version of the LOGO! Base Module.
The same supply output "+/- "on DC power supplies or "N/L" on AC power supplies must
connect to the same phase on both the expansion module DM8/16 230R and the
connected LOGO! 230 .... Failure to follow the instructions could result in personal injury.

Note
A power failure might cause an additional edge triggering signal at the special functions. The
stored data will be from the last uninterrupted cycle.

Connecting LOGO!
Connect LOGO! to the power supply as shown below, depending on whether your power
supply is DC or AC:

Note
LOGO! is a double-insulated switchgear. You must connect its FE terminal to earth ground.

Circuit protection with AC voltage


To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, you can install a metal oxide varistor
(MOV). Make sure the operating voltage of the varistor (MOV) used lies at least 20% above
the rated voltage (for example S10K275).

LOGO!
38 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 109
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Circuit protection with DC voltage


To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, install a protection device, for example
DEHN (order number 918 402).

2.3.2 Connecting the LOGO! TDE power supply


You must connect the LOGO! TDE to an external power supply that supplies a voltage of
12 VDC or 24 VAC/VDC. The LOGO! TDE includes a power connector. Connect the power
supply to the power connector then plug the power conncetor to the power supply interface
on LOGO! TDE.

Ethernet interfaces
Power supply
The power connection is non-polar. If you connect a DC power supply to the LOGO!
TDE, you can connect the positive supply wire or negative supply wire to either pin 1
or pin 2.
Pin 3 must be connected to the ground.

Note
Siemens recommends that you protect the LOGO! TDE with a 0.5 A safety fuse on the
power supply.

2.3.3 Connecting LOGO! inputs

Requirements
At the inputs you connect sensor elements such as: momentary pushbuttons, switches, light
barriers, daylight control switches etc.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 39

Appendix E- 110
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Sensor characteristics for LOGO!

LOGO! 12/24RCE LOGO! 24CE LOGO! DM8 LOGO! DM8


LOGO! 12/24RCEo LOGO! 24CEo 12/24R 24
I3 ... I6 I1,I2,I7,I8 I3 ... I6 I1,I2,I7,I8 I1 ... I8 I1 ... I8
Signal status 0 < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC
Input current < 0.85 mA < 0.05 mA < 0.85 mA < 0.05 mA < 0.85 mA < 0.85 mA
Signal status 1 > 8.5 VDC > 8.5 VDC > 12 VDC > 12 VDC > 8.5 VDC > 12 VDC
Input current > 1.5 mA > 0.1 mA > 2 mA > 0.15 mA > 1.5 mA > 2 mA

LOGO! 24RCE (AC) LOGO! 24RCE (DC) LOGO! 230RCE (AC) LOGO! 230RCE (DC)
LOGO! 24RCEo (AC) LOGO! 24RCEo (DC) LOGO! 230RCEo (AC) LOGO! 230RCEo (DC)
LOGO! DM8 24R (AC) LOGO! DM8 24R (DC) LOGO! DM8 230R (AC) LOGO! DM8 230R (DC)
Signal status 0 < 5 VAC < 5 VDC < 40 VAC < 30 VDC
Input current < 1.0 mA < 1.0 mA < 0.03 mA < 0.03 mA
Signal status 1 > 12 VAC > 12 VDC > 79 VAC > 79 VDC
Input current > 2.5 mA > 2.5 mA > 0.08 mA > 0.08 mA

LOGO! DM16 24R LOGO! DM16 24 LOGO! DM16 230R (AC) LOGO! DM16 230R (DC)
Signal status 0 < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 40 VAC < 30 VDC
Input current < 1.0 mA < 1.0 mA < 0.05 mA < 0.05 mA
Signal status 1 > 12 VDC > 12 VDC > 79 VAC > 79 VDC
Input current > 2.0 mA > 2.0 mA > 0.08 mA > 0.08 mA

Note
LOGO! 230RCE/230RCEo and expansion module DM16 230R each contains two groups of
four inputs, for a total of eight. Within each group, you must operate all inputs on the same
phase. Different phases are only possible between the groups.
Example: I1 to I4 on phase L1, I5 to I8 on phase L2.
You must not connect the inputs of the LOGO! DM8 230R to different phases.

Sensor connections
Connecting glow lamps and two-wire proximity switches (Bero) to LOGO! 230RCE/230RCEo
or LOGO! DM8 230R (AC) and LOGO! DM16 230R (AC)
The figure below shows how you connect a switch with a glow lamp to LOGO!. The current
that flows through the glow lamp allows LOGO! to detect a "1" signal even though the switch
contact is not closed. If, however you use a switch that has the glow lamp fitted with a power
supply, this response does not occur.

LOGO!
40 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 111
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Take into account the quiescent current of any two-wire proximity switches that you use. The
level of the quiescent current of some two-wire proximity switches is high enough to trigger a
logical "1" signal at the LOGO! input. You should therefore compare the quiescent current of
the proximity switches with the technical data of inputs (Page 291).
Remedy
To suppress this response, use an X1/X2-type capacitor rated at 100 nF and 275 VAC. In a
destructive situation, this type of capacitor safely disconnects. You must choose the voltage
level for which the capacitor is rated such that it is not destroyed in the case of overvoltage!
At 230 VAC, the voltage between N and an input I(n) must not be greater than 40 V to
guarantee a "0" signal. You can connect approximately ten glow lamps to the capacitor.

Restrictions
Signal status transitions 0 1/1 0
After a 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 transition, the signal must remain constant at the input at least for the
duration of one program cycle, so that LOGO! can detect the new signal status.
The size of the circuit program determines the program execution time. The appendix
"Determining the cycle time (Page 319)" contains a benchmark test routine that you can use
to determine the current scan cycle time.

Special features of LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo


Fast digital inputs: I3, I4, I5 and I6
These modules include fast digital inputs (up/down counters, threshold triggers). The
restrictions mentioned earlier do not apply to these fast digital inputs.

Note
Expansion modules do not have fast digital inputs.

Analog inputs: I1 and I2, I7 and I8


You can use the inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 of LOGO! versions 12/24RCE/RCEo and
24CE/24CEo as either digital inputs or analog inputs. The LOGO! circuit program defines the
input mode (digital or analog).

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 41

Appendix E- 112
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

The inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 provide digital inputs, and the inputs AI3, AI4, AI1 and AI2 provide
analog inputs, as described in the topic "Constants and connectors (Page 115)". AI3
corresponds to the input terminal I1; AI4 corresponds to I2; AI1 corresponds to I7; AI2
corresponds to I8. The use of AI3 and AI4 is optional. You configure your LOGO! to use
either two or four analog inputs as the topic "Setting the number of AIs in LOGO!
(Page 266)" describes.
When using inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 as analog inputs, only the range from 0 to 10 VDC is
available.
Connecting a potentiometer to inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8
To allow you to achieve 10 V as the maximum value when you completely turn the
potentiometer once, you must connect a series resistor on the potentiometer's input side
regardless of the input voltage (see figure below).
We suggest the following sizes of potentiometers and associated series resistors:

Voltage Potentiometer Series Resistor


12 V 5 k -
24 V 5 k 6.6 k

When using a potentiometer and 10 V input voltage as the maximum value, you must ensure
that with a connected input voltage of 24 V, 14 V must release via the series resistor to
ensure a maximum supply of 10 V when you turn the potentiometer one full rotation. With a
voltage of 12 V, you can neglected this.

Note
The LOGO! AM2 expansion module provides additional analog inputs. The LOGO! AM2
RTD expansion module provides PT100/PT1000 inputs.
Always use twisted and shielded cables for analog signals, and keep these as short as
possible.

LOGO!
42 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 113
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Sensor connections
Connect sensors to LOGO! as shown below.

LOGO! 12/24.... and LOGO! 24...

The inputs of these devices are not isolated


and therefore require a common reference
potential (chassis ground).
With LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO!
24CE/24CEo modules, you can tap analog
signals between the supply voltage and
chassis ground (* = series resistor (6.6 k) at
24 VDC).

Connection example

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 43

Appendix E- 114
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

LOGO! 230....

The inputs of these devices are in two groups,


each consisting of four inputs. Different
phases are only possible between blocks, but
not within the blocks.

Connection example

WARNING

Current safety regulations (VDE 0110, ... and IEC 61131-2, ... as well as cULus) do not
permit the connection of different phases to an AC input group (I1 to I4 or I5 to I8) or to the
inputs of a digital module.

LOGO!
44 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 115
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

LOGO! AM2

FE terminal for connecting earth and Cable shielding


shielding the analog measuring cable
Earth Standard DIN rail

The illustration above shows an example of four-wire current measurement and two-wire
voltage measurement.
Connecting a two-wire sensor to the LOGO! AM2
Wire up the two-wire sensor's connecting wires as follows:
1. Connect the sensor's output to connection U (0 V to 10 V voltage measurement) or to
connection I (0/4 mA to 20 mA current measurement) of the AM2 module.
2. Connect the plus connector on the sensor to the 24 V supply voltage (L+).
3. Connect the ground connection of the current output M (on the right side of the sensor, as
shown in the figure above) to the corresponding M input (M1 or M2) on the AM2 module.

LOGO! AM2 RTD


You can connect a maximum of two PT100 sensors or two PT1000 or one PT100 plus one
PT1000 sensor in a two-wire or three-wire connection or in a mixed use of two-wire and
three-wire connection to the module. Note that the sensor type supported by the module is
only PT100 or PT1000 with the default temperature coefficient of = 0.003850.
For a two-wire connection, you need to short-circuit terminals U1- and IC1 or U2- and IC2.
Errors caused by the ohmic resistance of the measuring line are not compensated for this
type of connection. If a PT100 sensor is connected, a line resistance of 1 is proportional to
measuring error of +2.5 C; if a PT1000 sensor is connected, a line resistance of 1 is
proportional to measuring error of +0.25 C.
A three-wire technique suppresses the influence of the cable length (ohmic resistance) on
the result of the measurement.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 45

Appendix E- 116
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Note
Fluctuating analog values can occur if you do not mount/correctly mount the screening on
the connecting wire from the analog valuator device to the analog AM2 / AM2 RTD LOGO!
expansion module (encoder wire).
To avoid fluctuating analog values when using these expansion modules, take the following
measures:
Use only shielded encoder wires.
Shorten the encoder wire as much a possible. The encoder wire must not be more than
10 meters long.
Clamp the encoder wire on one side only and clamp it only to the FE terminal on the
AM2/AM2 AQ/AM2 RTD expansion module.
Connect ground on the encoder supply to the FE terminal on the expansion module.
Avoid operating the LOGO! AM2 RTD expansion module with a power supply that is not
grounded (potential-free). If you cannot avoid this, connect the negative output/ground
output on the power supply to the shielding on the resistance thermometer's measuring
wires.

2.3.4 Connecting outputs

LOGO! ...R...
The LOGO! ...R... version includes relay outputs. The potential of the relay contacts is
isolated from the power supply and the inputs.

LOGO!
46 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 117
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Requirements for relay outputs


You can connect various loads to the outputs; e.g., lamps, fluorescent lamps, motors,
contactor relays, etc. For information on the properties required for the loads connected to
LOGO! ...R..., refer to the technical data (Page 291).

Connecting
Connect the load to LOGO! ...R... as shown below:

LOGO! with solid-state outputs


You can identify LOGO! versions with solid-state outputs by the fact that the letter R is
missing from their type name. The outputs are short circuit-proof and overload-proof. An
auxiliary load voltage supply is not necessary, because LOGO! supplies the load voltage.

Requirements for solid-state outputs


The load connected to LOGO! must have the following characteristics:
The maximum switched current is 0.3 A per output.

Connecting
Connect the load to a LOGO! with solid-state outputs as shown below:

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 47

Appendix E- 118
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.3 Wiring LOGO!

LOGO! AM2 AQ
The illustration below shows an example of how to connect the voltage or current load.

Earth
Standard DIN rail

2.3.5 Connecting the Ethernet interface

LOGO! ...E
The LOGO! ...E version is equipped with a 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet RJ45 interface.

Requirements for the network cable


Use a shielded Ethernet cable to connect to the Ethernet interface. To minimize
electromagnetic interference, make sure you use a standard Category 5 shielded twisted-
pair Ethernet cable with a shielded RJ45 connector on each end.

LOGO!
48 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 119
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.4 Putting into operation

Connecting
You connect the FE terminal to earth ground, and connect a network cable to the Ethernet
interface.

Earth ground
Ethernet cable, for connecting to the Ethernet interface
Ethernet status LED

Ethernet status LED

LED type Color Description


Status LED Flashing orange LOGO! is receiving/sending data across Ethernet.
Steady green LOGO! is already connected to Ethernet.

2.4 Putting into operation

2.4.1 Powering on LOGO!


LOGO! does not have a power switch. The reaction of LOGO! during startup depends on the
following:
Whether a circuit program is stored in LOGO!
Whether a micro SD card is inserted
Whether this is a LOGO! version without display unit (LOGO!...o)
Whether LOGO! is in RUN mode or STOP mode at the time of power failure
To ensure that the expansion module on LOGO! changes to RUN mode, check the following:
Has the sliding contact between LOGO! and the expansion module snapped into place
properly?
Is the power supply connected to the expansion module?
In addition, always ensure that you switch on the power supply to the expansion module
first before activating the power supply to the LOGO! Base Module (or activate both
power supplies at the same time); if you do not do this, the system does not detect the
expansion module when you start up the LOGO! Base Module.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 49

Appendix E- 120
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.4 Putting into operation

The following illustration shows all possible reactions of LOGO!:

You can also memorize four simple rules for starting LOGO! :

LOGO!
50 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 121
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.4 Putting into operation

1. If neither LOGO! nor the inserted card contains a circuit program, the LOGO! Basic
displays the following:

2. LOGO! automatically copies the circuit program on the card to memory and overwrites
the existing circuit program.
3. If there is a circuit program in LOGO! or on the card, LOGO! adopts the operational state
it had prior to power-off. Versions without a display unit (LOGO!...o) automatically change
from STOP to RUN (LED changes from red to green).
4. If you have enabled retentivity for at least one function, or a function is permanently
retentive, LOGO! retains the current values at power-off.

Note
When a power failure occurs while you are entering a circuit program, the program in LOGO!
is missing after power is returned.
Before you modify the circuit program, save a backup copy of your original to a card or to a
computer using LOGO!Soft Comfort.

2.4.2 Operating states

LOGO! Base Module operating states


LOGO! Base Modules (LOGO! Basic or LOGO! Pure) have two operating states: STOP and
RUN.

STOP RUN
The display shows that the program is Display: Screen mask for monitoring I/O and
empty when you start the program messages (after START in the main menu) or for
the parameter assignment menu
(except for LOGO!...o devices)
Switching LOGO! to programming mode (except for LOGO!...o devices)
(except for LOGO!...o devices) Switching LOGO! to parameter assignment mode
LED is red (except for LOGO!...o devices)
(only for LOGO!...o devices) LED is green
(only for LOGO!...o devices)

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 51

Appendix E- 122
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! installation and wiring


2.4 Putting into operation

STOP RUN
Action of LOGO!: Action of LOGO!:
The input data is not read. LOGO! reads the status of the inputs.
The circuit program is not executed. LOGO! uses the circuit program to calculate the
The relay contacts are permanently open status of the outputs.
or the solid-state outputs are switched off. LOGO! switches the relay/solid-state outputs on
or off.

Note
After switching the power on, the system briefly switches through the outputs on the LOGO!
24CE/24CEo. With an open circuit, a voltage of > 8 V can occur for up to approximately 100
ms; when the circuit is loaded, this time reduces to a matter of microseconds.

LOGO! expansion modules, operating states


LOGO! expansion modules have three operating states. The color of the LED (RUN/STOP)
indicates one of three operating states for LOGO! expansion modules.

Green (RUN) Red (STOP) Orange/Yellow


The expansion module The expansion module does not Initialization phase of the
communicates with the device communicate with the device to expansion module
to the left. its left.

LOGO!
52 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 123
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Programming LOGO!
3.5 Configuring menu access protection for LOGO!

3.5 Configuring menu access protection for LOGO!


LOGO! provides two access levels, administrator and operator, to limit access to specific
menus in programming mode. As an administrator, you can access all menu commands;
while as an operator, some specific menu commands are not visible (see section "Overview
of LOGO! menus (Page 65)"). LOGO!'s default setting is administrator at delivery, and you
can switch to operator at any time. When switching from operator to administrator, you need
to enter a valid password ("LOGO" by default). LOGO! always saves its access level before
power-off.

Note
The access level of the LOGO! TDE is operator by default, and you can switch it to
administrator with the password "LOGO".
The LOGO! TDE saves its access level before power-off if it connects to the same Base
Module after power-on. If you connect a different Base Module to it, however, the LOGO!
TDE restores its access level to operator after power-on.
The access level setting on the LOGO! TDE is independent of that on the Base Module.

Switching LOGO! from administrator to operator


To switch LOGO!'s access level from administrator to operator, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to "" on the main menu of programming mode: Press or

2. Confirm "": Press OK


3. Move the cursor to "": Press or

4. Confirm "": Press OK


LOGO! now switches to the access level of operator and returns to the main menu.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 63

Appendix E- 124
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Programming LOGO!
3.5 Configuring menu access protection for LOGO!

Switching LOGO! from operator to administrator


To switch LOGO!'s access level from operator to administrator, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to "" on the main menu of programming mode: Press or

2. Confirm "": Press OK


3. Move the cursor to "": Press or

4. Confirm "": Press OK. The display appears as follows:

5. Press or to move up and down the alphabet to select your letters (for example,
"LOGO").

6. Confirm the password: Press OK


LOGO! now switches to the access level of administrator and returns to the main menu.

LOGO!
64 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 125
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Programming LOGO!
3.6 Overview of LOGO! menus

3.6 Overview of LOGO! menus


The following illustration shows an overview of LOGO! 0BA8 menus:

* These menu commands are visible only with the access level of administrator.
For more details on the menus, refer to the Appendix "LOGO! Basic (Page 323)".
The following illustration shows an overview of LOGO! TDE menus:

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 65

Appendix E- 126
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO! 8
Parameter assignment refers to the configuration of the block parameters. You can set delay
times for time functions, the switching times of timers, counter threshold values, the
monitoring interval of an hours counter, the on and off thresholds of the trigger, and more.
You can configure the parameters:
In programming mode
In parameter assignment mode
Parameter assignment mode allows the editing of parameters without having to modify the
circuit program. This feature is available so that you can edit parameters without having to
change to programming mode. The advantage is that you can edit program parameters, but
the circuit program remains protected.

Note
In parameter assignment mode, LOGO! continues execution of the circuit program.

8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode


Press ESC to access the parameter assignment mode:

For more information about the menu commands in parameter assignment mode, refer to
Section "LOGO! Basic (Page 323)".
Follow these steps to stop your circuit program and thus change to the main menu of
programming mode:
1. Move the cursor to "": Press or

2. Confirm "": Press OK

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 255

Appendix E- 127
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

3. Move the cursor to "": Press

4. Confirm placing LOGO! in STOP mode by pressing OK with the cursor on "".
LOGO! shows the main menu of the programming mode:

For more information about switching LOGO! to RUN mode, refer to Section "Switching
LOGO! to RUN mode (Page 78)".

Description of other menu commands of the parameter assignment menu

Menu command
For information on the various settings, refer to the following topics:
Parameters (Page 257)
Selecting the parameters (Page 258)
Modifying parameters (Page 259)
Assigning a circuit program name (Page 73)
Menu command
For information on the various settings, refer to the following topics:
Setting the time of day and date (Page 262)
Summertime/wintertime conversion (Page 93)
Synchronization (Page 96)
Setting the start screen (Page 267)
Setting the display contrast and backlight choice (Page 263)
Setting the default values for LOGO! (Page 261)

LOGO!
256 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 128
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

Menu command
For information on the various settings, refer to the topic "Configuring network settings
(Page 99)".
Menu command
For information on the various settings, refer to the topic "Diagnosing errors from LOGO!
(Page 105)".

8.1.1 Parameters

Note
You can only view and edit parameters in the parameter assignment mode when they have
the read/write ("+") designation. See the "Parameter protection (Page 129)" topic and the
"Synchronization (Page 96)" topic.

Parameters are, for example:


The delay times of a timer relay
The switching times (cams) of a timer switch
Counter thresholds
The monitoring time for hour counters
The trigger thresholds
A block number (Bx) and the short name of the parameter identifies each parameter.
Examples:
T: ...is a configurable time
MI: ...is a configurable time interval

Note
LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign names to blocks (for more information, refer to
the chapter entitled "LOGO! Software (Page 283)".

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 257

Appendix E- 129
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

8.1.2 Selecting the parameters


To select a parameter:
1. On the parameter assignment menu, move the cursor to "": Press or

2. Confirm "" with OK.


3. Move the cursor to "": Press or

4. Confirm "" with OK.


LOGO! shows the list of all available blocks, for example:

If no parameter can be set, the display shows as follows, and you can press ESC to
return to the parameter assignment menu.

5. Press or to move the cursor to the block that you desire to change its parameter, and
confirm with OK.

6. Now, select the desired parameter: Press or


7. Select the parameter you want to edit, and press OK.

LOGO!
258 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 130
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

8.1.3 Modifying parameters


You first select the parameter you want to edit (Page 258).
You change the value of the parameter in the same way as you did in programming mode:
1. Move the cursor to the point at which you want to make the change: Press or
2. To change this value: Press or
3. To apply the value: OK

Note
When changing the time parameter when the system is in RUN, you can also change the
timebase (s=seconds, m=minutes, h=hours). This does not apply if the time parameter
represents the result of another function (for an example, see the "On-delay (Page 136)"
topic). In this case you can neither change the value nor the timebase. The current time is
reset to zero when you change the timebase.

Current value of a time T


View of a time T in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the configured time T.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 259

Appendix E- 131
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

Current timer value


View of a timer cam in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the on/off times and the day.

Current value of a counter


View of a counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the on/off threshold. This does not apply if the on or off threshold represents
the result of another function (In the "Up/down counter (Page 173)" topic, this is B021).

Current value of an hour counter


View of an hour counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:

You can edit the configured time interval MI.

LOGO!
260 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 132
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

Current value of a threshold trigger


View of the parameter of a threshold trigger in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the on/off threshold.

8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!


You can set the following default values for a LOGO! Basic:

Clock settings
You can set the default values for time-of-day and date (Page 262) , summertime/wintertime
conversion (Page 93) and synchronization (Page 96) in programming mode or parameter
assignment mode through the following menu commands:

Contrast and backlight settings


You can set the default value for the backlight (Page 263) and the default value for the
display contrast (Page 263) in programming mode or parameter assignment mode through
the following menu commands:

Menu language
You can set the language (Page 265) in which LOGO! displays the menus in programming
mode through the following menu commands:

Number of Base Module analog inputs


The LOGO! Base Modules LOGO! 24CE, LOGO! 24CEo, LOGO! 12/24RCE, and LOGO!
12/24RCEo support four analog inputs. Formerly they supported two. You can choose
whether to use two or four analog inputs (Page 266) on these modules in programming
mode through the following menu commands:

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 261

Appendix E- 133
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

Start screen settings


You can select the default setting for the start screen (Page 267) that displays on LOGO!
when LOGO! transfers to RUN mode in programming mode or parameter assignment mode
through the following menu commands:

Message text settings


You can select settings that apply to all message text function blocks (Page 200) in
programming mode or parameter assignment mode through the following menu commands:

8.2.1 Setting the time of day and date


You can set the time of day and the date in programming mode or parameter assignment
mode.

Setting the time of day and the date in parameter assignment mode
Follow these steps to set the time of day and the date:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 255).
2. On the parameter assignment menu, move the cursor to "": Press or

3. Confirm "": Press OK


4. Move the cursor to "": Press or

5. Confirm "": Press OK


6. Move the cursor to "": Press or

LOGO!
262 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 134
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

7. Confirm "": Press OK


LOGO! shows the following display.

8. To set the correct time of day, press or to move the cursor to the desired position,
and press or to change the value.
9. To set the correct date, press or to move the cursor to the desired position, and press
or to change the value.
10.To confirm your entries: Press OK

Setting the time of day and the date in programming mode


If you want to set the time of day and the date in programming mode, select "" in the main
menu, then menus "" and "". You can now set the date and the time as described
earlier.

8.2.2 Setting the display contrast and backlight choice


You can set the default value for the display contrast and backlight in programming mode or
parameter assignment mode.

Setting the display contrast in parameter assignment mode


Follow these steps to set the display contrast:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 255).
2. On the parameter assignment menu, move the cursor to "": Press or

3. Confirm "": Press OK

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 263

Appendix E- 135
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

4. Move the cursor to "": Press or

5. Confirm "": Press OK


6. Move the cursor to "": Press or

7. Confirm "": Press OK


LOGO! shows the following display:

8. To change the display contrast: Press or


9. To confirm your entry: Press OK

Setting the display contrast in programming mode


If you want to set the display contrast in programming mode, select menu command "" in
the main menu, then menus "" and "". You can now set the display contrast as
described earlier.

Setting the backlight choice in parameter assignment mode


Follow these steps to set the backlight choice:
1. On the parameter assignment menu, move the cursor to "": Press or

2. Confirm "": Press OK


3. Move the cursor to "": Press or

LOGO!
264 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 136
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

4. Confirm "": Press OK


5. Move the cursor to "": Press or

6. Select "": Press or


7. Confirm "": Press OK

8. Move the cursor to "" or "": Press or


9. Confirm "" or "": Press OK
The default setting is that the backlight is not on. To set the backlight to always be on,
select "".

Setting the backlight choice in programming mode


If you want to set the backlight in programming mode, select menu command "" in the
main menu, then menus "" and "". You can now set the backlight as described earlier.

Note
The backlight lifetime of the LOGO! TDE is 20000 hours.
You can change the backlight colors of the LOGO! onboard display or the LOGO! TDE by
means of some special flags (M25, M26, M28 to M31). For more information, refer to section
"Constants and connectors (Page 115)". If you use these special flags in your circuit
programs, the backlight setting through the above menu commands takes no effect.

8.2.3 Setting the menu language


The language of the LOGO! menus can be one of ten predefined languages:

German English French Spanish Italian


Chinese Dutch Turkish Russian Japanese

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 265

Appendix E- 137
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

Setting the menu language in programming mode


You can set the menu language in programming mode only:
1. In the main menu of programming mode, move the cursor to "": Press or

2. Confirm "": Press OK


3. Move the cursor to "": Press or

4. Confirm "": Press OK


5. Move the cursor to the language of your choice: Press or
6. Confirm language selection: Press OK

8.2.4 Setting the number of AIs in LOGO!


LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo support up to four onboard inputs that
can be used as either digital or analog inputs (0 V to 10V). Inputs I7 (AI1) and I8 (AI2) are
available as analog inputs by default, whether you use them or not. Inputs I1 (AI3) and I2
(AI4) are optional analog inputs. LOGO! provides a menu where you can choose to use two
analog inputs (the default, AI1 and AI2), or four, or even zero. Regardless of the settings,
inputs I1 and I2 can be used as digital inputs. To use them as analog inputs AI3 and AI4, you
must set the number of analog inputs to four. Note that the number of configured analog
inputs on LOGO! affects the subsequent numbering of analog inputs on attached expansion
modules (see the "Maximum setup (Page 29)" topic).
You can set the number of AIs in programming mode only.

LOGO!
266 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 138
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

Setting the number of AIs in programming mode


Follow these steps to set the number of analog inputs:
1. In the main menu of programming mode, select "": Press or

2. Confirm "": Press OK


3. Select "": Press or

4. Confirm "": Press OK


5. Move to "0 AI", "2 AIs" or "4 AIs": Press or
6. Confirm your selection with OK, and the setting takes effect immediately.

8.2.5 Setting the start screen


You can select the default setting for the start screen that LOGO! displays in RUN mode.
You make this selection from LOGO! in either parameter assignment mode or programming
mode.

Selecting the start screen in parameter assignment mode


Follow these steps to select the start screen for LOGO!:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 255).
2. On the parameter assignment menu, move the cursor to "": Press or

3. Confirm "": Press OK


4. Move the cursor to "": Press or

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 267

Appendix E- 139
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

5. Confirm "": Press OK


The display now shows:

The current setting of the start screen is indicated by the circle with a dot. The default
setting is "".
You can choose to display the current time-of-day and date (), the values of the digital
inputs (), or the parameter assignment menu ().
6. Select the desired default setting: Press or
7. To confirm your entry: Press OK
Power LOGO! off then on to make your changes take effect. When LOGO! is in RUN mode,
it displays the start screen that you selected.

LOGO!
268 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 140
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards 9


LOGO! supports only micro SD cards that support FAT32 file system format for program
storage. You can store and copy-protect a circuit program, with or without the data log of
process data, from a LOGO! device to a micro SD card, or copy a circuit program from the
card to a LOGO! device.
LOGO! allows you to store only one circuit program in its memory. If you want to modify the
circuit program or create an additional one without deleting the first, you must archive it
somewhere.
For detailed information about how to format micro SD cards, see Section "Formatting micro
SD cards (Page 269)".
For detailed information about the copy protection function, see Section "Program copy
protection (Page 281)".
For detailed information about the data log, see Chapter "Data log (Page 253)".

Upward compatibility of circuit programs


You can transfer circuit programs written for the previous versions 0BA0...0BA7 to 0BA8
devices from LOGO!Soft Comfort.

9.1 Formatting micro SD cards


As LOGO! 0BA8 only supports micro SD cards that support FAT32 file system format for
program storage, you must format the micro SD card first if it supports other file systems.
The following examples describe how to format a micro SD card under operating systems
Windows 7, Linux Suse and Mac OS respectively.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 269

Appendix E- 141
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.1 Formatting micro SD cards

Formatting under Windows OS


Follow the steps below to format the micro SD card under Windows OS:

1.

2.

LOGO!
270 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 142
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.1 Formatting micro SD cards

3.

4.

Formatting under Linux OS


1. Open the following terminal in the application browser to enter commands:

2. Enter the first command "fdisk -1" in the terminal to search for the removable device block
name and "/dev/sdc1" is found.
3. Enter "sudo umount /dev/sdc1" to umount this device.
4. Enter "sudo mkfs.vfat -f 32 /dev/sdc1" and formatting is completed.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 271

Appendix E- 143
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.1 Formatting micro SD cards

Formatting under Mac OS


Follow the steps below to format the micro SD card under MAC OS:

1.

2.

LOGO!
272 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 144
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.2 Inserting and removing the card from LOGO!

3.

4.

9.2 Inserting and removing the card from LOGO!


When you remove a micro SD card that contains a circuit program with copy protection
attributes, note the following: LOGO! can only execute the circuit program stored on the card
if the card remains inserted during system runtime.
A removal of the card during RUN mode can lead to impermissible operating states.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 273

Appendix E- 145
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.2 Inserting and removing the card from LOGO!

Removing the micro SD card


To remove the micro SD card, carefully insert a screwdriver with a 3-mm blade into the
groove on the front of the socket, and lever the socket partially out of the slot. Press the two
sides of the socket and pull it out. You can now remove the micro SD card from the socket.

Inserting the micro SD card


The entry of the card slot is chamfered on its bottom right. The edge of the cards is
chamfered accordingly. This encoding prevents you from inserting cards in the wrong way.
Insert the card into the socket, insert the socket into the slot and push it in until it engages.

Note
Make sure that you insert the card into the right position in the socket until you hear an
audible sound of a click.

LOGO!
274 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 146
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the card

9.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the card

Copying data from LOGO! to the card manually


To manually copy the circuit program to the micro SD card, follow the steps shown in the
illustration below:

Press OK. LOGO! starts copying the circuit program to the card.
If power fails while LOGO! is copying the circuit program, repeat the process after power-on.

Note
If the program is empty, a message will display on the screen to remind you the program
in LOGO! is empty.
The password of a protected circuit program in LOGO! also applies to the copied program
version on your card.

Copying data from LOGO! to the card automatically


LOGO!Soft Comfort provides an option for automatically copying the circuit program to the
micro SD card when transferring the circuit program to LOGO!. This option is available in the
dialog for PC->LOGO! transfer. If you select this option, LOGO!Soft Comfort transfers the
circuit program to LOGO! and to the micro SD card.

Note
To successfully copy the circuit program from LOGO! to the micro SD card, make sure that
the free memory space available on the micro SD card is at least 100 Kbytes.

Generating the data log on the micro SD card


If your circuit program in LOGO! includes a Data Log function block configured from
LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can save the data log in your LOGO! or on the micro SD card. If
there is a micro SD card inserted into the slot of your LOGO!, then when LOGO! switches

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 275

Appendix E- 147
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.4 Copying data from the card to LOGO!

from STOP to RUN, it attempts to copy the data log to the micro SD card; otherwise, LOGO!
saves the data log in memory. At every STOP to RUN transition, LOGO! determines the
destination of the data log storage.
If LOGO! copies the data log to the micro SD card, it saves the data log by default as .CSV
file format, which you can then open from a PC. Each line in the .CSV file includes a time
stamp, the function block number and the actual values recorded. For more information
about the data log, refer to Chapter "Data log (Page 253)".

Note
When LOGO! with an inserted micro SD card is in STOP mode, you can upload the most
recent data log file on the micro SD card to LOGO!Soft Comfort using a transfer menu
command in LOGO!Soft Comfort. For more information about the data log uploading
command, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.

9.4 Copying data from the card to LOGO!


You can copy a circuit program from a micro SD card to LOGO! in one of the following ways:
Automatically during the startup of LOGO! (POWER ON)
By means of the card specific menu of LOGO!

Note
If the program on the card is protected with a password, the copied program in LOGO! is
also protected with the same password. For more information about the Card menu, refer to
Section "Overview of LOGO! menus (Page 65)".

Automatic copying during the startup of LOGO!


To automatically copy the circuit program to the card, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the power supply to LOGO!.
2. Insert the card into the relevant slot.

LOGO!
276 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 148
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Using memory cards


9.4 Copying data from the card to LOGO!

3. Switch on the power supply to LOGO!.


LOGO! copies the program from the program module/card to LOGO!. When LOGO!
finishes copying, it opens the LOGO! main menu:

Note
Before you switch LOGO! to RUN, you must ensure that the system you are controlling
with LOGO! does not represent a source of hazard.

4. Move the cursor to the first menu command in Step 3: Press or .


5. Press OK.

Copying by means of the card specific menu


For more information about the replacement of a micro SD card, refer to Section "Inserting
and removing the card from LOGO! (Page 273)".
To copy a program from the card to LOGO!, insert the card and follow the steps shown in the
illustration below:

Press OK. LOGO! copies the circuit program from the card to LOGO!. When LOGO! has
finished copying, it automatically returns to the LOGO! main menu.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 277

Appendix E- 149
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data A
A.1 General technical data

Criterion Tested in accordance with Values


LOGO! Base Modules (0BA8)
LOGO! Basic
Dimensions (WxHxD) 71.5 x 90 x 60 mm
Weight
Modules with relay output Approx. 240 g
Modules with transistor output Approx. 195 g
Installation On a 35 mm profile rail four
module widths or wall mounting

LOGO! Pure
71.5 x 90 x 58 mm
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Modules with relay output Approx. 200 g
Approx. 160 g
Modules with transistor output
On a 35 mm profile rail four
Installation module widths or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion modules DM16...
Dimensions (WxHxD) 71.5 x 90 x 58 mm
Weight
Modules with relay output Approx. 225 g
Modules with transistor output Approx. 165 g
On a 35 mm profile rail four
Installation
module widths or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion modules
DM8...
Dimensions (WxHxD) 35.5 x 90 x 58 mm
Weight
Modules with relay output Approx. 130 g
Modules with transistor output Approx. 95 g
On a 35 mm profile rail two
Installation
module widths or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion modules
AM...
Dimensions (WxHxD) 35.5 x 90 x 58 mm
Weight Approx. 95 g
Installation On a 35 mm profile rail two
module widths or wall mounting

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 291

Appendix E- 150
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.1 General technical data

Criterion Tested in accordance with Values


LOGO! TDE (Text Display with
Ethernet interfaces)
Dimensions (WxHxD) 128.2 x 86 x 38.7 mm
Weight Approx. 220 g
Installation Bracket mounting
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature Low temperature to IEC
60068-2-1 0 C to 55 C
Horizontal installation
High temperature to IEC 0 C to 55 C
Vertical installation
60068-2-2
Storage/shipping - 40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 From 10% to 95% no
condensation
Air pressure 795 hPa to 1080 hPa
Pollutants IEC 60068-2-42 SO2 10 cm3/m3, 21 days
IEC 60068-2-43 H2S 1 cm3/m3, 21 days
Ambient mechanical conditions
Degree of protection IP20 for LOGO! Base Modules,
expansion modules, and the
LOGO! TDE excluding the TDE
front panel
IP65 for LOGO! TDE front
panel
Vibrations: IEC 60068-2-6 5 Hz to 8.4 Hz
(constant amplitude 3.5 mm)
8.4 Hz to 150 Hz
(constant acceleration 1 g)
Shock IEC 60068-2-27 18 shocks
(half-sine wave 15 g/11 ms)
Free fall (packaged) IEC 60068-2-32 0.3 m
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Noise emission EN 55011/A Limit class B group 1
EN 55022/B
EN 50081-1
(domestic area)
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge
Severity 3 6 kV contact discharge
Electromagnetic fields IEC 61000-4-3 Field strength 1 V/m and 10
V/m
HF currents on cables and cable IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
shielding
Burst pulses IEC 61000-4-4Severity 3 2 kV (supply and digital signal
lines), 1 kV (analog signal lines)
High-energy surge pulse (applies only IEC 61000-4-5Severity 3 1 kV (power lines) symmetrical
to LOGO! 230 ...) 2 kV (power lines) asymmetrical
Safety to IEC

LOGO!
292 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 151
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

Criterion Tested in accordance with Values


Clearance and creepage distance IEC 60664, IEC 61131-2, Fulfilled
rating EN 50178
cULus to UL 508, CSA
C22.2 No. 142
Insulation strength IEC 61131-2 Fulfilled
Cycle time
Cycle time per function < 0.1 ms
Startup
Startup time at power-up Typ. 9 s
S7 communication
Delay time Max. 100 ms

A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

LOGO! 230RCEo LOGO! 230RCE


Power supply
Input voltage 115 VAC/VDC to 115 VAC/VDC to
240 VAC/VDC 240 VAC/VDC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 265 VAC 85 VAC to 265 VAC
100 VDC to 253 VDC 100 VDC to 253 VDC
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Power consumption
115 VAC 15 mA to 40 mA 15 mA to 40 mA
240 VAC 15 mA to 25 mA 15 mA to 25 mA
115 VDC 5 mA to 10 mA 5 mA to 10 mA
240 VDC 2 mA to 8 mA 2 mA to 8 mA
Voltage failure buffering
115 VAC/VDC Typ. 10 ms Typ. 10 ms
240 VAC/VDC Typ. 20 ms Typ. 20 ms
Power loss at
115 VAC 1.7 W to 4.6 W 1.7 W to 4.6 W
240 VAC 3.6 W to 6.0 W 3.6 W to 6.0 W
115 VDC 0.6 W to 1.2 W 0.6 W to 1.2 W
240 VDC 0.5 W to 2.0 W 0.5 W to 2.0 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 Typ. 20 days Typ. 20 days
C
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. 2 s/day Typ. 2 s/day
Digital inputs
Number 8 8
Electrical isolation No No

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 293

Appendix E- 152
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

LOGO! 230RCEo LOGO! 230RCE


Number of high speed inputs 0 0
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz Max. 4 Hz
High speed input -- --
Max. continuous permissible 265 VAC 265 VAC
voltage 253 VDC 253 VDC
Input voltage L1
Signal 0 < 40 VAC < 40 VAC
Signal 1 > 79 VAC > 79 VAC
Signal 0 < 30 VDC < 30 VDC
Signal 1 > 79 VDC > 79 VDC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.05 mA AC < 0.05 mA AC
Signal 1 > 0.08 mA AC > 0.08 mA AC
Signal 0 < 0.06 mA DC < 0.06 mA DC
Signal 1 > 0.13 mA DC > 0.13 mA DC
Delay time at 0 to 1:
120 VAC Typ. 40 ms Typ. 40 ms
240 VAC Typ. 30 ms Typ. 30 ms
120 VDC Typ. 25 ms Typ. 25 ms
240 VDC Typ. 20 ms Typ. 20 ms

Delay time at 1 to 0:
120 VAC Typ. 45 ms Typ. 45 ms
240 VAC Typ. 70 ms Typ. 70 ms
120 VDC Typ. 60 ms Typ. 60 ms
240 VDC Typ. 75 ms Typ. 75 ms
Line length (unshielded) max. 100 m max. 100 m
Digital outputs
Number 4 4
Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes Yes
In groups of 1 1
Control of a digital input Yes Yes
Continuous current Ith Recommended range of Recommended range of
application 100 mA at application 100 mA at
12 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC
Max. 10 A per relay Max. 10 A per relay

LOGO!
294 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 153
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R

LOGO! 230RCEo LOGO! 230RCE


Surge current Max. 30 A Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at
230/240 VAC 1000 W 1000 W
115/120 VAC 500 W 500 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
compensated (25000 switching
cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
(25000 switching cycles)
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A Power protection B16, 900 A
Derating None; across the entire None; across the entire
temperature range temperature range
Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay (if Max. 16 A, characteristic B16 Max. 16 A, characteristic B16
desired)
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, you must consider the technical data of
fluorescent lamp ballasts. If the current exceeds the maximum allowed surge current,
appropriate contactor relays must switch the flourescent lamps.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7 F.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R

LOGO! DM8 230R LOGO! DM16 230R


Power supply
Input voltage 115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC 115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 265 VAC 85 VAC to 265 VAC
100 VDC to 253 VDC 100 VDC to 253 VDC
Permissible mains frequency 47Hz to 63 Hz

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 295

Appendix E- 154
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R

LOGO! DM8 230R LOGO! DM16 230R


Power consumption
115 VAC 10 mA to 30 mA 10 mA to 60 mA
240 VAC 10 mA to 20 mA 10 mA to 40 mA
115 VDC 5 mA to 15 mA 5 mA to 25 mA
240 VDC 5 mA to 10 mA 5 mA to 20 mA
Voltage failure buffering
115 VAC/VDC Typ. 10 ms Typ. 10 ms
240 VAC/VDC Typ. 20 ms Typ. 20 ms
Power loss at
115 VAC 1.1 W to 3.5 W 1.1 W to 4.5 W
240 VAC 2.4 W to 4.8 W 2.4 W to 5.5 W
115 VDC 0.5 W to 1.8 W 0.6 W to 2.9 W
240 VDC 1.2 W to 2.4 W 1.2 W to 4.8 W
Digital inputs
Number 4 8
Electrical isolation No No
Number of high speed inputs 0 0
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz Max. 4 Hz
High speed input -- --
Max. continuous permissible 265 VAC 265 VAC
voltage 253 VDC 253 VDC
Input voltage L1
Signal 0 < 40 VAC < 40 VAC
Signal 1 > 79 VAC > 79 VAC
Signal 0 < 30 VDC < 30 VDC
Signal 1 > 79 VDC > 79 VDC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.05 mA AC < 0.05 mA AC
Signal 1 > 0.08 mA AC > 0.08 mA AC
Signal 0 < 0.06 mA DC < 0.06 mA DC
Signal 1 > 0.13 mA DC > 0.13 mA DC

LOGO!
296 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 155
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R

LOGO! DM8 230R LOGO! DM16 230R


Delay time at 0 to 1:
120 VAC Typ. 40 ms Typ. 40 ms
240 VAC Typ. 30 ms Typ. 30 ms
120 VDC Typ. 25 ms Typ. 25 ms
240 VDC Typ. 20 ms Typ. 20 ms

Delay time at 1 to 0:
120 VAC Typ. 45 ms Typ. 45 ms
240 VAC Typ. 70 ms Typ. 70 ms
120 VDC Typ. 60 ms Typ. 60 ms
240 VDC Typ. 75 ms Typ. 75 ms
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m Max. 100 m
Digital outputs
Number 4 8
Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes Yes
In groups of 1 1
Control of a digital input Yes Yes
Continuous current Ith Recommended range of Recommended range of
application 100 mA at application 100 mA at
12 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC
Max. 5 A per relay Max. 5 A per relay
Surge current Max. 30 A Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at:
230/240 VAC 1000 W 1000 W
115/120 VAC 500 W 500 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
conventionally compensated
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A Power protection B16, 900 A
Derating None; across the entire None; across the entire
temperature range temperature range
Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay (if Max. 16 A, Max. 16 A,
desired) characteristic B16 characteristic B16
Switching rate

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 297

Appendix E- 156
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24...

LOGO! DM8 230R LOGO! DM16 230R


Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, you must consider the technical data of
fluorescent lamp ballasts. If the current exceeds the maximum allowed surge current,
appropriate contactor relays must switch the flourescent lamps.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7 F.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24...

LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Permissible mains frequency --
Power consumption from 24 VDC 15 mA to 50 mA (no load on digital output)
1.2 A (with max. load on digital output)
Voltage failure buffering --
Power loss at 24 VDC 0.4 W to 1.2 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 C Typ. 20 days
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. 2 s/day
Digital inputs
Number 8
Electrical isolation No
Numbef of high speed inputs 4 (I3, I4, I5, I6)
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz
High speed input Max. 5 kHz
Max. continuous permissible voltage 28.8 VDC
Input voltage L+
Signal 0 < 5 VDC
Signal 1 > 12 VDC

LOGO!
298 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 157
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24...

LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.9 mA (I3 to I6)
< 0.07 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
Signal 1 > 2.1 mA (I3 to I6)
> 0.18 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
Delay time at
0 to 1 Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
1 to 0 Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m
Analog inputs
Number 4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1, I8=AI2)
Range 0 VDC to 10 VDC
Input impedance 72 k
Cycle time for analog value generation 300 ms
Line length (shielded and twisted) Max. 10 m
Error limit 1.5% at FS
Digital outputs
Number 4
Output type Transistor,
current-sourcing 1)
Electrical isolation No
In groups of --
Control of a digital input Yes
Output voltage Supply voltage
Output current Max. 0.3 A per channel
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof Yes
Short circuit current limitation Approx. 1 A per channel
Derating None; across the entire temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 --
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 --
Parallel output circuit for power increase Not permitted
Protection of output relay (if desired) --
Switching rate 2)
Mechanical --
Electrical 10 Hz

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 299

Appendix E- 158
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24

LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Ohmic load/lamp load 10 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz
1) When you switch on LOGO! 24CE/24CEo, LOGO! DM8 24 or LOGO! DM16 24, the CPU sends
signal 1 to the digital outputs for about 50 s. Take this into account, especially when using
devices that react to short pulses.
2) The maximum switching rate is only dependent on the switching program's cycle time.

A.5 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24

LOGO! DM8 24 LOGO! DM16 24


Power supply
Input voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes
Permissible mains frequency -- --
Power consumption from 15 mA to 40 mA (no load on 15 mA to 60 mA (no load on
24 VDC digital output) digital output)
1.2 A (with max. load on digital 2.4 A (with max. load on digital
output ) output )
Power loss at 24 V 0.4 W to 1.0 W 0.4 W to 1.5 W
Digital inputs
Number 4 8
Electrical isolation No No
Number of high speed inputs 0 0
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz Max. 4 Hz
High speed input -- --
Max. continuous permissible 28.8 VDC 28.8 VDC
voltage
Input voltage L+ L+
Signal 0 < 5 VDC < 5 VDC
Signal 1 > 12 VDC > 12 VDC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.88 mA < 0.85 mA
Signal 1 > 2.1 mA > 2 mA
Delay time at
0 to 1 Typ. 1.5 ms Typ. 1.5 ms
1 to 0 Typ. 1.5 ms Typ. 1.5 ms
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m Max. 100 m

LOGO!
300 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 159
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...

LOGO! DM8 24 LOGO! DM16 24


Digital outputs
Number 4 8
Output type Transistor, Transistor,
current-sourcing 1) current-sourcing 1)
Electrical isolation No No
In groups of -- --
Control of a digital input Yes Yes
Output voltage Supply voltage Supply voltage
Output current Max. 0.3 A per channel Max. 0.3 A per channel
Short circuit-proof and overload- Yes Yes
proof
Short circuit current limitation Approx. 1 A per channel Approx. 1 A per channel
Derating None; across the entire None; across the entire
temperature range temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 -- --
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 -- --
Parallel output circuit for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay (if -- --
desired)
Switching rate
Mechanical -- --
Electrical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 10 Hz 10 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz
1) When you switch on LOGO! 24CE/24CEo, LOGO! DM8 24 or LOGO! DM16 24, the CPU sends
signal 1 to the digital outputs for about 50 s. Take this into account, especially when using
devices that react to short pulses.

A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...

LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VAC to 26.4 VAC
20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection --
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 301

Appendix E- 160
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...

LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
Power consumption
24 VAC 15 mA to 150 mA
24 VDC 15 mA to 130 mA
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 5 ms
Power loss
24 VAC 0.4 W to 3.6 W
24 VDC 0.4 W to 3.2 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 C Typ. 20 days
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. 2 s/day
Digital inputs
Number 8, optional positive voltage or negative voltage
Electrical isolation No
Number of high speed inputs 0
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz
High speed input --
Max. continuous permissible voltage 26.4 VAC
28.8 VDC
Input voltage L
Signal 0 < 5 VAC/VDC
Signal 1 > 12 VAC/VDC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 1.2 mA
Signal 1 > 2.6 mA
Delay time at
0 to 1 Typ. 1.5 ms
1 to 0 Typ. 15 ms
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m
Analog inputs
Number --
Range --
max. Input voltage --
Digital outputs
Number 4
Output type Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes
In groups of 1
Control of a digital input Yes

LOGO!
302 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 161
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R

LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
Continuous current Ith Recommended range of application 100 mA at
12 VAC/VDC
Max. 10 A per relay
Surge current Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching 1000 W
cycles) at
Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000 10 x 58 W
switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally 1 x 58 W
compensated (25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 10 x 58 W
switching cycles)
Derating None; across the entire temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A
Parallel output circuits for power increase Not permitted
Protection of output relay Max. 16 A,
(if desired) characteristic B16
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, you must consider the technical data of
fluorescent lamp ballasts. If the current exceeds the maximum allowed surge current,
appropriate contactor relays must switch the flourescent lamps.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7 F.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.7 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R

LOGO! DM8 24R LOGO! DM16 24R


Power supply
Input voltage 24 VAC/VDC 24 VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VAC to 26.4 VAC
20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection -- Yes
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz --

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 303

Appendix E- 162
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R

LOGO! DM8 24R LOGO! DM16 24R


Power consumption
24 VAC 20 mA to 100 mA --
24 VDC 8 mA to 50 mA 15 mA to 65 mA
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 5 ms Typ. 5 ms
Power loss
24 VAC 0.5 W to 2.4 W --
24 VDC 0.2 W to 1.2 W 0.35 W to 1.6 W
Digital inputs
Number 4, optional positive voltage or 8
negative voltage
Electrical isolation No No
Number of high speed inputs 0 0
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz Max. 4 Hz
High speed input -- --
Max. continuous permissible 26.4 VAC --
voltage
28.8 VDC 28.8 VDC
Input voltage L
Signal 0 < 5 VAC/VDC < 5 VDC
Signal 1 > 12 VAC/VDC > 12 VDC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 1.1 mA < 0.85 mA
Signal 1 > 2.63 mA > 2.0 mA
Delay time at
0 to 1 Typ. 1.5 ms Typ. 1.5 ms
1 to 0 Typ. 15 ms Typ. 1.5 ms
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m Max. 100 m
Digital outputs
Number 4 8
Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes Yes
In groups of 1 1
Control of a digital input Yes Yes
Continuous current Ith Recommended range of Recommended range of
application 100 mA at application 100 mA at
12 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC
Max. 5 A per relay Max. 5 A per relay
Surge current Max. 30 A Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000 1000 W 1000 W
switching cycles) at

LOGO!
304 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 163
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! DM8 24R LOGO! DM16 24R


Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 1 x 58 W 1 x 58 W
conventionally compensated
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)
Derating None; across the entire None; across the entire
temperature range temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A Power protection B16, 900 A
Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay (if Max. 16 A, Max. 16 A,
desired) characteristic B16 characteristic B16
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, you must consider the technical data of
fluorescent lamp ballasts. If the current exceeds the maximum allowed surge current,
appropriate contactor relays must switch the flourescent lamps.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7 F.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! 12/24RCEo LOGO! DM8 12/24R


LOGO! 12/24RCE
Power supply
Input voltage 12/24 VDC 12/24 VDC
Permissible range 10.8 VDC to 28.8 VDC 10.8 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes
Power consumption
12 VDC 30 mA to 140 mA 10 mA to 80 mA
24 VDC 15 mA to 90 mA 10 mA to 40 mA

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 305

Appendix E- 164
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! 12/24RCEo LOGO! DM8 12/24R


LOGO! 12/24RCE
Voltage failure buffering
12 VDC Typ. 2 ms Typ. 2 ms
24 VDC Typ. 5 ms Typ. 5 ms
Power loss
12 VDC 0.4 W to 1.7 W 0.2 W to 1.0 W
24 VDC 0.4 W to 2.2 W 0.3 W to 1.0 W
Backup of the real-time clock at Typ. 20 days --
25 C
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. 2 s/day --
Electrical isolation No No
Digital inputs
Number 8 4
Electrical isolation No No
Number of high speed inputs 4 (I3, I4, I5, I6) 0
Input frequency
Normal input Max. 4 Hz Max. 4 Hz
High speed input Max. 5 kHz --
Max. continuous permissible 28.8 VDC 28.8 VDC
voltage
Input voltage L+
Signal 0 < 5 VDC < 5 VDC
Signal 1 > 8.5 VDC > 8.5 VDC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.88 mA (I3 to I6) < 0.88 mA
< 0.07 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
> 1.5 mA (I3 to I6) > 1.5 mA
Signal 1
> 0.12 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
Delay time at
0 to 1 Typ. 1.5 ms Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
1 to 0 Typ. 1.5 ms Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m Max. 100 m
Analog inputs
Number 4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1, I8=AI2) - -
Range 0 VDC to 10 VDC --
Input impedance 72 k
Cycle time for analog value 300 ms --
generation
Line length (shielded and Max. 10 m --
twisted)
Error limit 1.5% at FS --

LOGO!
306 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 165
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! 12/24RCEo LOGO! DM8 12/24R


LOGO! 12/24RCE
Digital outputs
Number 4 4
Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes Yes
In groups of 1 1
Control of a digital input Yes Yes
Continuous current Ith (per terminal) Recommended range of Recommended range of
application 100 mA at application 100 mA at
12 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC
Max. 10 A per relay Max. 5 A per relay
Surge current Max. 30 A Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000 1000 W 1000 W
switching cycles) at
Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 1 x 58 W 1 x 58 W
conventionally compensated
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)
Derating None; across the entire None; across the entire
temperature range temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A Power protection B16, 900 A
Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay Max. 16 A, Max. 16 A,
(if desired) characteristic B16 characteristic B16
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, you must consider the technical data of
fluorescent lamp ballasts. If the current exceeds the maximum allowed surge current,
appropriate contactor relays must switch the flourescent lamps.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7 F.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 307

Appendix E- 166
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.9 Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs

A.9 Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs

Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with ohmic loading (heating):

Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with high inductive load to IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/AC
15 (contactors, solenoid coils, motors):

Note
To ensure the switching capacity and service life, keep the minimum switching load of the
relay outputs at 100 mA with the voltage of 12 VAC/VDC.

LOGO!
308 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 167
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.10 Technical data: LOGO! AM2

A.10 Technical data: LOGO! AM2

LOGO! AM2
Power supply
Input voltage 12/24 VDC
Permissible range 10.8 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Power consumption 15 mA to 30 mA
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 10 ms
Power loss at
12 VDC 0.2 W to 0.4 W
24 VDC 0.4 W to 0.8 W
Electrical isolation No
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Ground terminal For connecting ground and shielding of the analog
measuring line
Analog inputs
Number 2
Type Unipolar
Input range 0 VDC to 10 VDC (input impedance 76 k) or
0/4 mA to 20 mA (input impedance <250 )
Resolution 10 bit, normalized to 0 to 1000
Cycle time for analog value generation 50 ms
Electrical isolation No
Line length (shielded and twisted) Max. 10 m
Encoder supply voltage None
Error limit 1.5%
Interference frequency suppression 55 Hz

A.11 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 RTD

LOGO! AM2 RTD


Power supply
Input voltage 12/24 VDC
Permissible range 10.8 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Power consumption 15 mA to 30 mA
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 10 ms
Power loss at
12 VDC 0.2 W to 0.4 W
24 VDC 0.4 W to 0.8 W
Electrical isolation No

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 309

Appendix E- 168
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.12 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ

LOGO! AM2 RTD


Reverse polarity protection Yes
Ground terminal For connecting ground and shielding of the measuring
line.
Sensor inputs
Number 2
Type PT100 or PT1000 with the default temperature
coefficient of = 0.003850 for both Types, or
compatible sensors.
Connection of sensors
2-wire technique Yes
3-wire technique Yes
Measurement range -50 C to +200 C
-58 F to +392 F
Settings for the measurement display on
the LOGO! Basic:
1 C steps Offset: -50, Gain: 0.25
0.25 C steps Offset: -500, Gain: 2.50
(rounded to one decimal)
1 F steps Offset: -58, Gain: 0.45
0.25 F steps Offset: -580, Gain: 4.50
(rounded to one decimal)
Curve linearization No
Measuring current Ic Pulse current signal:
PT100: 0.5 mA
PT1000: 0.5 mA
Measurement rate Depends on the installation
Typ. 50 ms
Resolution 0.25 C
Error limits (3-wire technique) Of the final measured value:
0 C to +200 C 2 C
-50 C to 200 C 2 C
Electrical isolation No
Cable length (twisted) Max. 10 m
Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz, 60 Hz

A.12 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ

LOGO! AM2 AQ
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VDC

LOGO!
310 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 169
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.13 Technical data: LOGO! Power 12 V

LOGO! AM2 AQ
Permissible range 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Power consumption 15 mA to 82 mA
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 10 ms
Power loss at 24 VDC 0.4 W to 2.0 W
Electrical isolation No
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Ground terminal For connecting ground and shielding of the analog
output line.
Analog outputs
Number 2
Voltage range 0 VDC to 10 VDC
Voltage load 5 k
Current output 0/4 mA to 20 mA
Curreny load 250
Resolution 10 bit, normalized to 0 to 1000
Cycle time for analog output Depending on installation (50 ms)
Electrical isolation No
Line length (shielded and twisted) Max. 10 m
Error limit Voltage output: 2.5% FS
Short circuit protection Voltage output: Yes
Overload protection Current output: Yes
Voltage output: Yes

A.13 Technical data: LOGO! Power 12 V


LOGO! Power 12 V is a primary-switched power supply unit for LOGO! devices. Two current
ranges are available.

LOGO! Power LOGO! Power


12 V/1.9 A 12 V/4.5 A
Input data
Input voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 264 VAC
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Voltage failure buffering > 40 ms (at 187 VAC)
Input current 0.53 A to 0.3 A 1.13 A to 0.61 A
Make current (25C) 15 A 30 A
Device protection Internal
Recommended circuit breaker 16 A characteristic B
(IEC 898) in mains line 10 A characteristic C
Output data

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 311

Appendix E- 170
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.14 Technical data: LOGO! Power 24 V

LOGO! Power LOGO! Power


12 V/1.9 A 12 V/4.5 A
Output voltage 12 VDC
Overall tolerance 3%
Adjustment range 10.5 VDC to 16.1 VDC
Residual ripple < 200/300 mVpp
Output current 1.9 A 4.5 A
Overcurrent limiting Typ. 2.5 A Typ. 5.9 A
Efficiency Typ. 80% Typ. 85%
Parallel circuit for power Yes
increase
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression EN 50081-1, Class B to EN 55022
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
Safety
Electrical isolation, Yes, SELV (to EN 60950 and EN 50178)
primary/secondary
Safety class II
Degree of protection IP20 (to EN 60529)
CE marking Yes
UL/cUL certification Yes; UL 508/UL 60950
FM approval Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
GL approval Yes
General details
Ambient temperature range -20 C to +55 C, natural convection
Storage and shipping -40 C to +70 C
temperature
Connections at input One terminal (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L1 and N
Connections at output Two terminals (1x.2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per + and -
Installation On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on
Dimensions (WxHxD) 54 x 80 x 55 mm 72 x 90 x 55 mm
Weight Approx. 0.2 kg Approx. 0.3 kg

A.14 Technical data: LOGO! Power 24 V


LOGO! Power 24 V is a primary-switched power supply module for LOGO! devices. Two
current ranges are available.

LOGO! Power LOGO! Power


24 V/1.3 A 24 V/2.5 A
Input data
Input voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 264 VAC
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz

LOGO!
312 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 171
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.14 Technical data: LOGO! Power 24 V

LOGO! Power LOGO! Power


24 V/1.3 A 24 V/2.5 A
Voltage failure buffering 40 ms (at 187 VAC)
Input current 0.70 A to 0.35 A 1.22 A to 0.66 A
Inrush current (25C) < 15 A < 30 A
Device protection Internal
Recommended circuit breaker 16 A characteristic B
(IEC 898) in mains line 10 A characteristic C
Output data
Output voltage 24 VDC
Overall tolerance 3%
Adjustment range 22.2 VDC to 26.4 VDC
Residual ripple < 200/300 mVpp
Output current 1.3 A 2.5 A
Overcurrent limiting Typ. 2.0 A Typ. 3.4 A
Efficiency > 82% > 87%
Parallel circuit for power Yes
increase
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression EN 50081-1, Class B to EN 55022
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2,
EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
Safety
Electrical isolation, Yes, SELV (to EN 60950 and EN 50178)
primary/secondary
Safety class II
Degree of protection IP20 (to EN 60529)
CE marking Yes
UL/cUL certification Yes; UL 508/UL 60950
FM approval Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
GL approval Yes
General details
Ambient temperature range -20 C to +55 C, natural convection
Storage and shipping -40 C to +70 C
temperature
Connections at input One terminal (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L1 and N
Connections at output Two terminals (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per + and -
Installation On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on
Dimensions (WxHxD) 54 x 80 x 55 mm 72 x 90 x 55 mm
Weight Approx. 0.2 kg Approx. 0.3 kg

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 313

Appendix E- 172
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.15 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230

A.15 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230


LOGO! Contact 24 and LOGO! Contact 230 are switching modules for direct switching of
ohmic loads up to 20 Amps and motors up to 4 kW (without noise emission, hum-free). Both
modules have a built-in protective circuit for damping surges.

LOGO! LOGO!
Contact 24 Contact 230
Operating voltage 24 VDC 230 VAC;
50/60 Hz
Power consumption
24 VDC 170 mA --
230 VAC -- 20 mA
Switching capacity
Utilization category AC-1: Switching of ohmic loads at 55C
Operating current at 400 V 20 A
Output with three-phase loads at 400 V 13 kW
Utilization category AC-2, AC-3: Motor with slip ring induction/cage
armature
Operating current at 400 V 8.4 A
Output with three-phase loads at 400 V 4 kW
Short-circuit protection:
Assignment type 1 25 A
Assignment type 2 10 A
Connecting leads Fine-wire with wire end ferrules
Solid wire
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2
2 x (1 to 2.5) mm2
1 x 4 mm2
Dimensions (WxHxD) 36 x 72 x 55 mm
Ambient temperature -25 C to +55 C
Storage temperature -50 C to +80 C

A.16 Technical data: LOGO! TDE (Text Display with Ethernet interfaces)

LOGO! TDE
Mechanical data
Keyboard Membrane keypad with 10 keys
Display FSTN-Graphic Display with 160 x 96 (columns x rows), LED
backlight (white/amber/red)
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VAC/VDC
12 VDC

LOGO!
314 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 173
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical data
A.17 Technical data: LOGO! CSM12/24

LOGO! TDE
Permissible range 20.4 VAC to 26.4 VAC
10.2 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Permissible mains frequency 47Hz to 63 Hz
Power consumption (Ethernet and
white backlight active)
12 VDC Typ. 145 mA
24 VDC Typ. 70 mA
24 VAC Typ. 75 mA
Degree of protection
IP20 for LOGO! TDE excluding front panel
IP65 for LOGO! TDE front panel
Communication port
Ethernet performance Two Ethernet interfaces with 10/100 M full/half duplex data
transmission rate
Connection distance Max. 30 m
LCD Display and Backlight
Backlight lifetime 1) 20,000 hours
Display lifetime 2) 50,000 hours
Mounting
Mounting hole dimensions (WxH) (119 + 0.5 mm) x (78.5 + 0.5 mm)
Mounting conditions Mount the LOGO! TDE vertically on a flat surface of an IP
65 or Type 4x/12 enclosure.
1) The backlight lifetime is when the final brightness is 50% of the original brightness.
2) The display lifetime is calculated under ordinary operating and storage conditions: room
temperature (20 8 C), normal humidity below 65% relative humidity, and not in exposure to
direct sunlight.

A.17 Technical data: LOGO! CSM12/24


The CSM12/24 is a communications switch module with Ethernet. It can support the current
range of 12 VDC to 24 VDC.

LOGO! CSM12/24
Ethernet interface
Communications connector 4 x RJ45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 10/100 Mbps (half/full
duplex), autopolarity, autonegotiation
Network cable Use a shielded Ethernet cable to connect to the Ethernet interface.
To minimize electromagnetic interference, make sure you use a
standard Category 5 shielded twisted-pair Ethernet cable with a
shielded RJ45 connector on each end.
Largest data packet 1518 byte
Smallest data packet 64 byte

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 315

Appendix E- 174
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure") C


Because some specific applications do not require operator control and interface elements
such as buttons or a display, Siemens provides the LOGO! 12/24RCEo, LOGO! 24RCEo,
LOGO! 24CEo and LOGO! 230RCEo versions without display.

Less is definitely more!


The versions without display offer you the following benefits:
Even more cost-effective without the operating elements
Requires less switch cabinet space than conventional hardware
Substantial benefits with regard to flexibility and prime costs compared to standalone
electronic switchgear
Advantageous even for applications in which it replaces merely two or three conventional
switching devices
Very easy to use
Access-protected
Compatible to LOGO! versions with display
Offers the option to read data by means of LOGO!Soft Comfort

Creating a circuit program without operator panel


You can use one of two ways to create a circuit program for a LOGO! without display:
You create the circuit program with LOGO!Soft Comfort on your PC and then download it
to LOGO!.
You download the circuit program from a micro SD card (Page 269) to your LOGO!
without display.

Network communication indication


When you create a circuit program with LOGO!Soft Comfort, you need to connect the
module to your PC with an Ethernet cable. You can refer to the chapter Connecting the

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 321

Appendix E- 175
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure")

Ethernet interface (Page 48) to find the details about the wiring of the Ethernet interface and
also about the status of the Ethernet LEDs.

Operating characteristics
LOGO! is ready for operation when you switch on power. Switching off a LOGO! without
display is equivalent to disconnecting the power supply.
You can not start or stop the circuit program of LOGO!...o versions by means of buttons,
therefore, this is why the LOGO!...o versions have other startup characteristics.

Startup characteristics
If there is no circuit program in LOGO! or on the inserted micro SD card, LOGO! remains in
STOP mode.
If there is a valid circuit program in LOGO! memory or on the micro SD card, LOGO!
automatically switches from STOP mode to RUN mode when you switch on power.
LOGO! automatically copies the circuit program on an inserted micro SD card to memory,
immediately after you switch on power. LOGO! rewrites the existing circuit program in
memory if one exists, and then changes from STOP mode to RUN mode.
By connecting an Ethernet cable to LOGO! (Page 285), you can use LOGO!Soft Comfort to
download the circuit program and place LOGO! in RUN mode.

Operating status indication


An LED on the front panel indicates the operating state:
Lights red: Power On/STOP
Lights green: Power On/RUN
The LED lights red after Power On and in all LOGO! states other than RUN mode. The LED
lights green when LOGO! is in RUN mode.

Reading current data


LOGO!Soft Comfort provides an online test for reading the current data of all functions while
the system is in RUN.
If your LOGO! without display holds a protected micro SD card, you cannot read the current
data unless you enter the correct password (Page 281) for the circuit program. LOGO!
deletes the circuit program from memory when you remove the micro SD card.

Deleting the circuit program


Use LOGO!Soft Comfort to delete the circuit program and password if a password exists.

LOGO!
322 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 176
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure D


D.1 LOGO! Basic

D.1.1 Menu overview


All of the following menu commands are valid for LOGO! Basic with the ADMIN access level.
If you operate the LOGO! with the OP access level, some menu commands are invisible. For
more information see section Overview of LOGO! Menus (Page 65).

D.1.2 Main menu

See "Start menu (Page 328)" See "Network menu (Page 326)"
See "Programming menu (Page 324)" See "Diagnostic menu (Page 327)"
See "Setup menu (Page 325)" See "Card menu (Page 324)"

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 323

Appendix E- 177
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.1 LOGO! Basic

D.1.3 Programming menu

Note
When LOGO! is in RUN mode, only the menu commands with an asterisk (*) are available in
the programming menu.

D.1.4 Card menu


This menu is available only when LOGO! is in programming mode.

LOGO!
324 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 178
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.1 LOGO! Basic

D.1.5 Setup menu

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 325

Appendix E- 179
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.1 LOGO! Basic

Note
When LOGO! is in RUN mode, only the menu commands with an asterisk (*) are available in
the setup menu.

D.1.6 Network menu

Note
When LOGO! is in RUN mode, only the menu commands with an asterisk (*) are available in
the network menu.

LOGO!
326 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 180
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.1 LOGO! Basic

D.1.7 Diagnostics menu

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 327

Appendix E- 181
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.1 LOGO! Basic

D.1.8 Start menu

LOGO!
328 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 182
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

D.2 LOGO! TDE

D.2.1 Menu overview


All of the following menu commands are valid for the LOGO! TDE with the ADMIN access
level. If you operate the LOGO! TDE with the OP access level, some menu commands are
invisible. For more information, see section Overview of LOGO! menus (Page 65).

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 329

Appendix E- 183
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

D.2.2 Main menu

See "LOGO! selection menu (Page 331)". See "Diagnostic menu (Page 331)".
See "Start menu (Page 331)". See "Card menu (Page 331)".
See "Programming menu (Page 331)". See "TDE setup menu (Page 334)".
See "Setup menu (Page 331)". See "TDE network menu (Page 334)".
See "Network menu (Page 331)". See "TDE diagnostic menu (Page 334)".

LOGO!
330 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 184
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

D.2.3 LOGO! selection menu

D.2.4 LOGO! settings menu


The LOGO! TDE allows you to view and configure settings of the connected LOGO! Base
Module in its LOGO! settings menu.

Program menu
The program menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Programming
menu (Page 324)" for more information.

Card menu
The card menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Card menu
(Page 324)" for more information.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 331

Appendix E- 185
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

Setup menu
The setup menu is different from that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Setup menu
(Page 325)" for the complete setup menu for LOGO! Basic.

Note
When LOGO! 0BA8 is in RUN mode, only the menu commands with an asterisk (*) are
avaiable in the above menu.

LOGO!
332 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 186
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

Network menu
The network menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Network menu
(Page 326)" for more information.

Diagnostics menu
The diagnostics menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Diagnostics
menu (Page 327)" for more information.

Start menu
The start menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Start menu
(Page 328)" for more information.

Note
The start screen of the LOGO! TDE is always the clock display when LOGO! Basic is in RUN
mode.

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 333

Appendix E- 187
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

D.2.5 LOGO! TDE settings menu


The LOGO! TDE allows you to view and configure settings of the LOGO! TDE itself.
The following LOGO! TDE settings menu structure applys both when the connected LOGO!
Basic is in RUN or STOP mode.

LOGO! TDE setup menu

LOGO!
334 Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675

Appendix E- 188
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

LOGO! menu structure


D.2 LOGO! TDE

LOGO! TDE network menu


You can use the menu below to set the LOGO! TDE network configurations.

Note
The IP address of the LOGO! TDE is read-only when it is in RUN mode.

LOGO! TDE diagnostics menu

LOGO!
Manual, 06/2014, A5E33039675 335

Appendix E- 189
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Betriebsanleitung | Operating instructions | Notice d'instruction |


Istruzioni per l'uso | Instrucciones de servicio | Bruksanvisning

Druckregelventil
Pressure regulator
Rgulateur de pression
Valvola riduttrice di pressione
Vlvula reguladora de presin
Tryckregulator

ED02

R414002573/06.2016, Replaces: 05.2014, DE/EN/FR/IT/ES/SV

Appendix E- 190
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

14
4 1 14 13
2
3 13 12
12

00125294
4
7 5
Befestigungssatz fr Montageplatte montieren
9 Mounting kit for mounting plate assembly
Montage du set de fixation pour plaque de montage
6 Montaggio del set di fissaggio per piastra di montaggio
00125319
Montaje con juego de fijacin para placa de montaje
1 Montering av monteringssats fr monteringsplatta
Gertebersicht
Device overview
Aperu de lappareil
Panoramica dellapparecchio 16
Vista general de los aparatos
versikt ver enheten
15

00125296

10 5
Befestigungssatz fr Tragschiene montieren
Mounting kit for rail assembly
9 Montage du set de fixation pour rail porteur
Montaggio del set di fissaggio per guida portante
Montaje con juego de fijacin para ral
6 00135404 Montering av monteringssats fr brskena

2
Gerte verketten
Linking devices
O N
Combinaison dappareils
Collegamento in batteria degli apparecchi 17
Concatenar aparatos
Sammankoppling av enheter
18

19

6 M 00125297

Funktionsplan des ED02-Druckregelventils mit analogem Ausgang


Function block diagram of the ED02 pressure regulator with analog output
Schma fonctionnel du rgulateur de pression ED02 avec sortie analogique
Schema di funzionamento della valvola riduttrice di pressione ED02 con uscita analogica
11 10 Plan de funcionamiento de la vlvula reguladora de presin ED02 con salida analgica
Funktionsschema fr tryckregulator ED02 med analog utgng

6
00135409

3
Montage mit Schrauben auf eine Montageplatte
Mounting with screws to a mounting plate
Montage par vis sur une plaque de montage
Montaggio con viti su una piastra di montaggio
Montaje con tornillos sobre una placa de montaje
Montering med skruvar p en monteringsplatta

Appendix E- 191
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Ausgangsdruck/Outlet pressure/Pression de sortie/ 25


Pressione di uscita/Presin de salida/Utgngstryck
R7
max./
Max./
mx.

3
5.

Sollwert/Istwert
Set point/actual value

302
Valeur consigne/Valeur relle
Valore nominale/valore effettivo
min./ Valor nominal/Valor real
Min. Brvrde/rvrde
mn. von/From/de/ bis/To// 40
da/desde/frn a/hasta/till 00135405
7 762
Linearer Verlauf der Kennlinie
Linear course of the characteristic curve
Trac linaire de la courbe caractristique 5.31 5.31
Andamento lineare della caratteristica
Desplazamiento lineal de la curva caracterstica
Linjr kurva

(662)
602
bar1)

2.5
10
9 Pv = 11 bar
8
Pv = 9 bar
7
6 Pv = 7 bar

22.5
5 Pv = 5 bar
4
3 Pv = 3 bar
2
32 20
1
9 00135406
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 Mazeichnung
l/min2) Dimensioned drawing
Plan cot
1) 2) Disegno quotato
Ausgangsdruck Durchflussmenge
1) 2) Esquema acotado
Outlet pressure Flow rate
1) 2) Mttritning
Pression de sortie Dbit
1) Pressione di uscita 2) Portata
1) 2)
Presin de salida Caudal
1) 2)
Utgngstryck Flde

8
Kennlinie
Characteristic curve
Courbe caractristique
Linea caratteristica
Curva caracterstica
Kurva

Appendix E- 192
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
AVENTICS | ED02 | R414002573BAL001AE | English 7

English Safety sign, signal word Meaning


Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
DANGER
1 About this Documentation will certainly result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
Documentation validity WARNING could result in death or serious injury.
This documentation applies to the following pressure regulators: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
CAUTION could result in minor or moderate injury.
Material number Output pressure Set point Actual value
Indicates that damage may be inflicted on the product
R414001197 0 to 1 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V NOTICE or the environment.
R414001198 1 to +1 bar 0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
R414001199 1 to +1 bar 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
R414001200 1 to +1 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V Symbols
R414002405 0 to 0.3 bar 0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
If this information is disregarded, the product cannot be used or operated
R414002406 0 to 0.3 bar 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA optimally.
R414002407 0 to 0.3 bar 0 to 10 V 10 V constant1)
R414002408 0 to 0.3 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
R414003364 0 to 1 bar 0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Abbreviations
This documentation uses the following abbreviations:
R414003365 0 to 1 bar 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
R414004660 0 to 1 bar 0 to 10 V 10 V constant1) Abbreviation Meaning
R414003879 0 to 1 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V ED02 E = Electropneumatic pressure regulator,
D = Directly controlled
R414003370 0 to 2 bar 0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
02 = Nominal width 2
R414003371 0 to 2 bar 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
DC Direct current
R414003372 0 to 2 bar 0 to 10 V 10 V constant1)
WS Wrench size
R414003373 0 to 2 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
R414002400 0 to 6 bar 0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
R414002401 0 to 6 bar 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 2 Notes on Safety
R414002402 0 to 6 bar 0 to 10 V 10 V constant 1)
R414002403 0 to 6 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V About this chapter
The ED02 pressure regulator has been manufactured according to the accepted
R414002410 0 to 10 bar 0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA rules of current technology. Even so, there is risk of injury and damage to equipment
R414002411 0 to 10 bar 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA if the following chapter and safety instructions of this documentation are not
followed.
R414002412 0 to 10 bar 0 to 10 V 10 V constant1) O Read this documentation completely before working with the ED02 pressure
R414002413 0 to 10 bar 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V regulator.
O Keep these instructions in a location where they are accessible to all users at all
1) To supply a set point potentiometer
times.
O Always include the operating instructions when you pass the ED02 pressure
regulator on to third parties.
If you do not find your part number in the table in chapter 1, your device is custom-
made. In this case, the technical data will be provided by AVENTICS. The address is
Intended use
printed on the back cover of these instructions. The ED02 pressure regulator is a pneumatic device with integrated electronics that
This documentation is intended for installers, operators, and system owners. is only designed to regulate pneumatic pressures.
It contains important information on the safe and appropriate assembly, operation, Air that is dry and free of condensate is the permissible medium. Operation with pure
and maintenance of the ED02 pressure regulator and how to remedy simple oxygen is not permitted.
malfunctions yourself. O The ED02 pressure regulator is for industrial applications only.
An individual license must be obtained from the authorities or an inspection center
Required documentation if the ED02 pressure regulator is to be used in a residential area (residential,
The ED02 pressure regulator is a system component. Also observe business, and commercial areas). In Germany, these individual licenses are issued
W The instructions for the other system components, by the Regulating Agency for Telecommunications (Regulierungsbehrde fr
W The system documentation from the system manufacturer. Telekommunikation).
O The pressure regulator may only be used within the limits listed in the technical
Presentation of information data.
O Only use the ED02 pressure regulator inside.
Safety instructions The ED02 pressure regulator is not a safety component.
In this documentation, there are safety instructions before the steps whenever there O Contact AVENTICS if you would like to use the device in a safety control sequence.
is a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The measures described to avoid The address is printed on the back cover of these instructions.
these hazards must be followed.
Safety instructions are set out as follows: Improper use
Any use other than that described under Intended use is improper and is not
SIGNAL WORD permitted.
The installation or use of unsuitable products in safety-relevant applications can
Hazard type and source result in unanticipated operating states in the application that can lead to personal
Consequences injury or damage to equipment. Therefore, only use a product in safety-relevant
O Precautions applications if such use is specifically stated and permitted in the product
documentation. For example, in areas with explosion protection or in safety-related
O <List>
components of control systems (functional safety).
AVENTICS GmbH is not liable for any damages resulting from improper use. The user
alone bears the risks of improper use of the product.

Appendix E- 193
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
AVENTICS | ED02 | R414002573BAL001AE | English 8

Personnel qualifications 3 General Instructions on Equipment and


Assembly and commissioning require basic electrical and pneumatic knowledge,
as well as knowledge of the appropriate technical terms. Assembly and Product Damage
commissioning may therefore only be carried out by qualified electrical or
pneumatic personnel or an instructed person under the direction and supervision
of qualified personnel. NOTICE
Qualified personnel are those who can recognize possible hazards and institute the Malfunction caused by closed housing ventilation port!
appropriate safety measures, due to their professional training, knowledge,
and experience, as well as their understanding of the relevant regulations pertaining There is no atmospheric equalization and the characteristics curve will change.
to the work to be done. Qualified personnel must observe the rules relevant to the O Ensure that the air can circulate freely through the housing ventilation port
subject area. ( 1 5).

General safety instructions O Never operate the device in an atmosphere containing oil.

W Observe the regulations for accident prevention and environmental protection. Danger due to electrostatic discharge (ESD)!
W Observe the safety instructions and regulations of the country in which the Device defect or destruction!
product is used or operated.
O Do not touch the pins in the integrated XPC, M12 plug ( 1 7).
W Only use AVENTICS products that are in perfect working order.
W Follow all the instructions on the product. Danger due to mechanical loads!
W Persons who assemble, operate, disassemble, or maintain AVENTICS products Damage to the device!
must not consume any alcohol, drugs, or pharmaceuticals that may affect their
O Do not place any mechanical loads on the device under any circumstances.
ability to respond.
W To avoid injuries due to unsuitable spare parts, only use accessories and spare Danger due to reverse polarity!
parts approved by the manufacturer.
Device defect or destruction!
W Comply with the technical data and ambient conditions listed in the product
O Only use tested cables.
documentation.
W If unsuitable products are installed or used in safety-relevant applications, Loss of the protection category IP65 if the device is opened!
this may result in unintended system operating states that may lead to injuries
Fluids and foreign bodies may damage the device.
and/or equipment damage. Therefore, only use a product in safety-relevant
applications if such use is specifically stated and permitted in the product O Never open the device.
documentation.
W You may only commission the product if you have determined that the end
product (such as a machine or system) in which the AVENTICS products are 4 Delivery Contents
installed meets the country-specific provisions, safety regulations, The delivery contents include:
and standards for the specific application. W 1 ED02 pressure regulator
W Do not modify or convert the product.
W 1 set of operating instructions
Safety instructions related to the product and technology
5 Applications for the ED02 Pressure
WARNING
Regulator
Dangerous movements!
The ED02 pressure regulator converts an electrical set point into pressure. In doing
Danger of death, injuries or damage to property! so, a pressure sensor integrated in the ED02 pressure regulator records the outlet
O Make sure the relevant system component is not under pressure or voltage pressure.
before assembling or when connecting and disconnecting plugs. Protect the The integrated control electronics regulate the outlet pressure via two 2/2
system against being switched on. directional valves. Due to this, the controlled outlet pressure remains constant
O Ensure personnel safety before switching on the device. if there are disturbance variables such as flow changes or supply pressure
fluctuations.
With the ED02 pressure regulator, you can
W Electrically change pressures,
CAUTION W Remotely adjust pressures.
Danger of burns caused by hot proportional solenoids! Additionally, you can use the ED02 pressure regulator as an actuator to control brake
Touching the proportional solenoids during operating may lead to burns. forces, clamping forces, flow rates, or turbine speeds.
O Observe the warning sign on the right located on the device.
O Do not touch the device during operation. 6 Device description 1
O Let the device cool off before disassembling it.

Improperly laid cables! 1 Inlet connection 1/vacuum 6 Through-hole


connection 7 Integrated XPC plug, M12
Danger of injury!
2 Outlet connection 2 8 Alternative inlet connection
O Lay the cables so that no one can trip over them.
3 Exhaust 3 with silencer/vacuum 9 Blanking screw (pre-assembled
connection in the alternative inlet connection)
4 Proportional solenoid
5 Housing ventilation port

The position of the blanking screw (9) and type of exhaust (3) may deviate
in custom-made devices. For more information, contact AVENTICS
(see back cover for address).

Appendix E- 194
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
AVENTICS | ED02 | R414002573BAL001AE | English 9

7 Assembly Assembling on a mounting plate


Fastening with screws in the through holes 3
NOTICE 1. Make sure the blanking screw is inserted correctly.
Hazardous movements due to incorrect fastening! 2. Position the device on the assembly surface so the blanking plugs are on the side
of the mounting panel.
Other system parts may be damaged by uncontrolled device movements.
3. Slide the cylinder head screws (WS 4) into the through holes (6) and the mounting
O Make sure that the device is securely fastened. plate (11).
O Always fasten the ED02 pressure regulator Tightening torque: 6 Nm
with screws in the through holes or
with mounting kits (see Accessories in chapter 15) to a rail or an mounting Fastening with a mounting kit for mounting plate
plate. A mounting kit R414002582 is needed to assemble the device on a mounting plate.
The mounting kit for the mounting plate contains:
Malfunction caused by closed housing ventilation port! W 2 mounting panels (12)
If the housing ventilation port is closed, there is no atmospheric equalization and W 2 toothed lock washers (13)
the characteristics curve will change. W 2 cylinder head screws (WS 4) (14), tightening torque: 6 Nm
O Before installation, ensure that the housing ventilation port ( 1 5) is open and 1. See the dimensional drawing for the hole spacing 9 .
not, for example, painted shut. 2. Assemble the mounting kit for the mounting plate as shown in 4 .
O Ensure that the air can circulate freely through the housing ventilation The mounting panels (12) catch in the recesses and can thus be aligned in three
port ( 1 5). directions at right angles to the device.
3. Fasten a single device with two mounting panels or stacked devices with at least
You can assemble the ED02 pressure regulator in three different ways: four mounting panels to the mounting plate.
1. To a mounting plate using screws in the through holes,
Assembling on a rail
2. Using the mounting kit for assembly on a mounting plate (R414002582),
3. Using the rail mounting kit for TH35-7.5 rails (R414002583). To assemble the device on a rail, you will need the TH35-7.5 rail mounting kit
R414002583. The mounting kit includes:
Up to four devices can be linked pneumatically with each mounting type. W 1 mounting plate (15)
Before assembly W 1 cylinder head screw (WS 4) (16), tightening torque: 1 Nm
O Make sure the relevant system part is not under voltage or pressure. 1. Assemble the mounting kit as shown in 5 .
O Let the ED02 pressure regulator acclimate itself for several hours before The mounting panel (15) catches in the recesses and can thus be aligned in three
installation, otherwise water may condense in the housing. directions at right angles to the device.
2. Fasten a single device with one mounting panel or stacked devices with at least
Installation conditions two mounting panels to the rail.

Connecting the pneumatics


NOTICE
Malfunction due to atmosphere containing oil! CAUTION
Oil may clog the housing ventilation port. This will change the characteristic curve. Danger caused by escaping compressed air!
O Never operate the device in an atmosphere containing oil.
Device is operating under pressure. If the alternative inlet connection (8) is
opened, the blanking screw (9) may be forced out by the compressed air and
Mounting orientation cause injuries or damage.
The device can be mounted in any orientation if the compressed air is dry O Always use your personal protective clothing or safety glasses as the least.
and oil-free. O Only connect an additional supply pressure connection in a pressure-free
Stacking devices state.
2
O Never open the blanking screw while the device is in operation.

NOTICE The inside diameter of the supply line must be at least 4 mm (6 mm with four
Pressure feedback in the entire used inlet channel! stacked devices) to attain the air flow rate stipulated in the specifications.
Mutual interaction of valve functions is possible.
O Only link a maximum of four devices. To avoid changing the dynamics of the ED02 pressure regulator,
we recommend using push-in fittings.
O If necessary, connect an additional supply line at the alternative inlet
connection (8).
O If necessary, decouple the devices.
To connect push-in fittings, slide the tubing up to the stop in the push-in fitting and
Up to four devices can be linked pneumatically. To do this, you will need the gently tug to see if the tubing is tightly inserted.
appropriate stacking kit, depending on the number of devices (see Accessories Pressure regulators for positive pressure range
in chapter 15).
The kit includes:
(e.g. 0 to 2 bar, 0 to 6 bar, 0 to 10 bar) 1
W 2 M5 cylinder screws, length depending on kit 1. Connect the supply line at inlet connection 1 (1) or at the alternative inlet
W 2 M5 nuts DIN 934 connection (8).
W O-rings, number depending on kit
1. Remove the unused blanking screws (WS 2.5) (9). You can increase the air flow rate in stacked devices by connecting
the supply line at inlet connection 1 (1) and at the alternative inlet
2. Insert the seal (O-ring) (10) between the linked supply connections as shown
connection (8).
in 2 .
If you want to fasten the devices using mounting kits:
3. Slide the cylinder head screws (SW 4) included in the stacking kit into the through
holes (6) and tighten the nuts (WS 8). 2. Close the unused inlet connection with a blanking screw (WS 2.5), if necessary.
Tightening torque: 6 Nm Tightening torque: 1.2 Nm
If you want to fasten the devices using screws in the through holes: 3. Connect the outlet line at outlet connection 2 (2).
4. Slide the cylinder head screws (SW 4) included in the stacking kit into the through
holes (6) and mounting plate (11) and tighten the nuts (WS 8) (see 2 ). Pressure regulators for 1 to +1 bar 1
Tightening torque: 6 Nm 1. Connect the supply line at inlet connection 1 (1) or at the alternative inlet
connection (8).
2. Close the unused inlet connection with a blanking screw (WS 2.5), if necessary.
3. Connect the outlet line at outlet connection 2 (2).
4. Remove the silencer from exhaust 3 (3) and connect the vacuum line at vacuum
connection 3 (3).

Appendix E- 195
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
AVENTICS | ED02 | R414002573BAL001AE | English 10

Pressure regulators for 0 to 1 bar 1 Switching on the pneumatic and electrical supplies

NOTICE NOTICE
Malfunction due to contaminated air at the exhaust! Danger of destruction to connected devices if switched on in the wrong order!
Contaminated air sucked in via exhaust 3 (3) will damage the device. If the valve is first connected to the electric supply and then the pneumatic supply,
O Observe the specifications for compressed air quality listed in the technical overshooting may cause the pressure in the working line to reach a level that
data. is much higher than the set pressure. The pressure in the working line may even
reach the level of the supply pressure before the adjusted pressure is reached.
O Connect an additional filter at exhaust 3, if necessary.
O Make sure that the connected devices are resistant to the max. supply
pressure.
1. Connect the vacuum line at vacuum connection 1 (1) or at the alternative inlet
connection (8). O Always comply with the order for switching on the devices.
2. Close the unused connection (1 or 8) with a blanking screw, if necessary (WS 2.5). Connected devices may be destroyed due to process-related leaks!
3. Connect the outlet line at outlet connection 2 (2).
If switched on in the proper order, the device is first connected to the pneumatic
4. Connect the filter at exhaust 3 (3).
supply and then the electric supply. If the device has not yet been connected
Connecting the supply voltage and set point to the electric supply, contamination may cause the poppet valve to leak,
causing the pressure in the working line to reach the level of the supply pressure.
To operate the ED02 pressure regulator, you must supply the device with
O Make sure that the connected devices are resistant to the max. supply
compressed air, connect the 24 V DC supply voltage, and control the device
with a set point. pressure.

Selecting the correct supply pressure


In all devices, the actual value () and set point () are always at 0 V
(pin 3). A permanent deviation will occur if the supply pressure is less than the outlet
pressure stipulated by the electrical set point.
O Always select a supply pressure that is higher than the outlet pressure.

Switching on
O Observe the following table containing the pin assignments of the integrated XPC
plug, M12. CAUTION: Before applying compressed air to the system, check the stability
of the compressed air connections and make sure that no personnel are within
the hazardous zone when the compressed air supply is switched on.
XPC Integrated XPC plug, M12, male, 5-pin
Proceed as follows to commission the ED02 pressure regulator:
Pin 1 24 V DC 1. First switch on the pneumatic supply.
4 3 Pin 2 Set point (+): current 0/420 mA 2. Then switch on the 24 V DC supply voltage.
or voltage 010 V
Setting the set point
5 Pin 3 0V O Enter the desired set point in the controller or potentiometer.
Pin 4 Actual value (+): current 0/420 mA
or voltage 010 V or 10 V constant
1 2
9 Control
Pin 5 Functional earth (FE)
00125293 You can continually adjust the pressure once you have connected the electrical and
pneumatic supply on the ED02 pressure regulator.
O To do this, the ED02 pressure regulator is e.g. controlled via a controller
or potentiometer using a set point.
O Make sure before connecting the plugs that all seals and caps are included and The electronics compare the set point with the outlet pressure,
not damaged. which is measured by an internal pressure sensor.
O Only use tested plugs and cables. The electronics generate a control variable.
O Use a shielded cable to connect the integrated XPC plug (7). The control variable is used to control the air supply or exhaust valve
The shield must be connected to the plug housing and the system. with U/I converters and proportional solenoids.
1. Protect the supply voltage with an external M 0.5 A fuse.
This sets the stipulated pressure.
2. Connect the cable at the integrated XPC plug.
Fig. 6 shows a function block diagram for an ED02 pressure regulator with analog
The ED02 pressure regulator can now be supplied with voltage and controlled output.
with a set point.
c Inlet connection 1 for supply pressure 17 Supply voltage
or vacuum 18 Nominal input value
8 Commissioning d Outlet connection 2 19 Actual output value
e Exhaust or vacuum connection 3
CAUTION
Controlling the pressure
Danger of burns caused by hot proportional solenoids!
Touching the proportional solenoids during operating may lead to burns.
O Observe the warning sign on the right located on the device. NOTICE
O Do not touch the device during operation. Malfunction caused by closed housing ventilation port!
O Let the device cool off before disassembling it. If the housing ventilation port is closed, there is no atmospheric equalization and
the characteristics curve will change.
O Ensure that the air can circulate freely through the housing ventilation port (5).
NOTICE O Never operate the device in an atmosphere containing oil.
Defective seals or leaky connections!
Liquids and foreign objects could penetrate the device and plug connections and Depending on the model, the set point can be controlled by the current, voltage,
destroy the electronics. or a potentiometer.
The device generates the supply voltage for the potentiometer in devices with an
O Before commissioning, make sure that all seals and plugs are leaktight.
external potentiometer. The sliding contact of the potentiometer is connected with
O Never open the device. the set point input (see Connecting the supply voltage and set point in chapter 7).
O Depending on the model, control the outlet pressure either via the controller
Malfunction due to atmosphere containing oil!
or a potentiometer.
Oil may clog the housing ventilation port. This will change the characteristic
The characteristic curve 7 depicts the linear interrelation between current and
curve.
outlet pressure or voltage and outlet pressure.
O Never operate the device in an atmosphere containing oil.
The devices have a set point entry of 50 mbar. This means that set points
with an outlet pressure of less than 50 mbar will be set to 0 bar and the
outlet connection exhausted.

Appendix E- 196
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
AVENTICS | ED02 | R414002573BAL001AE | English 11

10 Disassembly and Exchange NOTICE


Disassembling the ED02 pressure regulator Damage to components!
Solvents and aggressive detergents will destroy the surface, labeling and seals
of the device!
CAUTION
O Check that all seals and plugs for the plug connections are firmly fitted so that
Danger of burns caused by hot proportional solenoids! no humidity can penetrate the ED02 pressure regulator during cleaning.
Touching the proportional solenoids during operating may lead to burns. O Only clean the device using a slightly damp cloth. Only use water to do this
O Observe the warning sign on the right located on the device. and, if necessary, a mild detergent.
O Let the device cool off before disassembling it.
O Do not touch the device during operation. Maintaining the ED02 pressure regulator
In normal ambient conditions
NOTICE In normal operation, the ED02 pressure regulator is maintenance-free.
Disconnecting plugs when under voltage will damage the device! O However, the system-specific maintenance intervals must be observed.
Large differences in potential occur when disconnecting plugs under voltage, In aggressive ambient conditions
which could damage the device.
The seals in the ED02 pressure regulator may age faster under aggressive ambient
O Make sure the relevant system component is not under voltage before conditions.
disassembling the device. O Every now and then, check that the seals on the pressure regulator are in perfect
order.
The following switch-off sequence must be observed in order to disassemble the A damaged seal can be recognized by parts of the seal visibly protruding from the
ED02 pressure regulator. housing gaps.
1. Stipulate a set point of 0 bar to exhaust the ED02 pressure regulator and the Defective seals will lead to pneumatic leaks and non-compliance with the IP65
outlet line at the outlet pressure connection 2 (2). protection class.
2. Switch off the 24 V DC supply voltage. O Immediately exchange the device if the seals are defective.
3. Remove the connected plugs.
4. Switch off the supply pressure and exhaust the supply line.
5. Remove the pneumatic lines. 13 Troubleshooting
6. Depending on the type of mounting, remove the mounting screws or loosen the
rail mounting. Malfunction Possible cause Remedy
If several devices are stacked: No output pressure No power supply Connect the power supply.
7. Take the screws out of the through holes and remove the desired device. present
Check the polarity of the
Exchange the ED02 pressure regulator power supply
To exchange the ED02 pressure regulator, you must first disassemble Switch on system component.
it as described above and then assemble a new ED02 pressure regulator
(see 7 Assembly). No set point stipulated Stipulate a set point.
No supply pressure Connect the supply pressure.
available
11 Disposal
Outlet pressure too low Supply pressure too low Increase the supply pressure.
Careless disposal of the ED02 pressure regulator could lead to pollution
of the environment. Outlet pressure less Consumers that use a Reduce air consumption
O Dispose of the ED02 pressure regulator in accordance with the currently than the set point lot of air (>100 std l/min)
Use a device with a larger
applicable regulations in your country. cause a large drop in
nominal width (e.g. ED05)
pressure in the device.

12 Care and Maintenance Outlet pressure does


not correspond to the
Housing ventilation port
is closed.
Ensure that the housing
ventilation port is open
stipulated set point.
WARNING ED02 pressure Exhaust port silencer is Make sure the exhaust port
Dangerous movements! regulator does not clogged. is open
exhaust
Danger of death, injuries or damage to property!
O Always make sure that the relevant system part is not under voltage or Air is audibly escaping. Seal at the inlet Check the seal and exchange,
pressure before you clean or service the device. Protect the system against connection or outlet if necessary
connection is missing
being switched on.
or damaged
Leaks between the With direct assembly: Check
ED02 pressure the pressure line connections
CAUTION regulator and and tighten, if necessary.
Danger of burns caused by hot proportional solenoids! connected pressure With stacking: Tighten screws
Touching the proportional solenoids during operating may lead to burns. line with 6 Nm torque.
O Observe the warning sign on the right located on the device. ED02 pressure Exchange the ED02 pressure
O Let the device cool down before cleaning or servicing it. regulator is not regulator
leaktight
O Do not touch the device during operation.
Pneumatic connections Connect the pneumatics for
confused the pressure lines correctly
(see Connecting the
Servicing the ED02 pressure regulator pneumatics in chapter 7)
No special care is required for the ED02 pressure regulator. Note the following if you
Blanking screw missing Assemble a blanking screw
would like to clean the device:
on additional
compressed air
connection.
ED02 pressure Device with current Stipulate the correct type of
regulator emits short input is operated with set point.
pressure pulses voltage set point
Outlet pressure jumps Set point too high Stipulate the correct set point
to the level of the (> 20 mA or > 10 V)
supply pressure.

Appendix E- 197
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.
AVENTICS | ED02 | R414002573BAL001AE | English 12

14 Technical Data Standards and directives complied with


DIN EN ISO 4414 Pneumatic fluid power General rules and safety
General data requirements for systems and their components
Dimensions 30 mm x 60 mm x 76 mm DIN EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
(width x height x depth) measurement, control, and laboratory use part 1:
general requirements
Weight 0.32 kg
DIN EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Operating temperature range 0C to 50C
(interference immunity in industrial areas)
Storage temperature range 20C to 80C
DIN EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility
Control Analog (interference emission in industrial areas)
Version Poppet valve
Permissible medium Compressed air
Max. particle size 50 m (oil-free and oiled compressed air) 15 Appendix
for pressure range 0 to 1 bar:
5 m (oil-free compressed air) Accessories
Oil content of compressed air 01 mg/m3 Component Material number
The pressure dew point must be at least 15C below the ambient and medium Angled socket M12, 5-pin, for connection on XPC 1824484029
temperatures and must not exceed 3C.
Connecting cable, 2.5 m, for ED02 pressure regulator R419800109
The oil content of compressed air must remain constant during the life cycle.
with integrated M12 socket for connection on XPC
O Use only the approved oils from AVENTICS.
Connecting cable, 5 m, for ED02 pressure regulator R419800110
Protection class according IP65 with integrated M12 socket for connection on XPC
to EN 60529:2000 (only when assembled and with all plugs
assembled) Kit for stacking assembly of 2 units R414002579
Mounting orientation Any Kit for stacking assembly of 3 units R414002580
The housing ventilation port must be open Kit for stacking assembly of 4 units R414002581
Vibration resistance If assembled with screws in the through holes Mounting kit for mounting plate R414002582
10 g
If assembled with mounting kits for mounting Rail mounting kit TH35-7.5 R414002583
plate or rail 1 g
Pneumatics
Flow 0 to 1 bar, 0 to 2 bar, 0 to 6 bar, 0 to 10 bar: Dimensioned drawing
see characteristic curve 8
1 to +1 bar: 70 std l/min See 9
0 to 1 bar: 55 std l/min
Output pressure Supply pressure Reproducibility Hysteresis
At 0 to 1 bar Max. 3 bar 0.01 bar < 0.01 bar
(0 to 14 psi) (43 psi) (0.15 psi) (< 0.15 psi)
At 0 to 2 bar Max. 7 bar 0.015 bar < 0.025 bar
(0 to 29 psi) (101 psi) (0.22 psi) (< 0.36 psi)
At 0 to 6 bar Max. 8 bar 0.03 bar < 0.05 bar
(0 to 87 psi) (116 psi) (0.43 psi) <0.73 psi)
At 0 to 10 bar Max. 12 bar 0.03 bar < 0.05 bar
(0 to 145 psi) (174 psi) (0.43 psi) (<0.73 psi)
At 1 to +1 bar Max. 1.5 bar 0.015 bar 0.025 bar
(14 to 14 psi) (22 psi) (0.22 psi) (0.36 psi)
At 0 to 1 bar 0.01 bar < 0.01 bar
(0 to 14 psi) (0.15 psi) (< 0.15 psi)
Electronics
Supply voltage 24 V DC (20%)
Only use a power pack with safe isolation
for the power supply
Permissible harmonic content 5%
Power consumption max. 300 mA
Input current resistance Supply voltage switched on: 100 W
(set point) Supply voltage switched off: > 3 MW
Input voltage resistance Supply voltage switched on: 1.02 M
(set point) Supply voltage switched off: > 3 MW
Current output (actual value), < 500
external working resistance
Voltage output (actual value), > 1 k
external working resistance

Appendix E- 198
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical Information

Liquiphant T FTL20
Level limit switch
Level limit switch for liquids

Application Your benefits


The Liquiphant T FTL20 is a level limit switch for all
Operational safety, reliability and universal
kinds of fluids and is used in tanks, containers and
applicability through use of the tuning fork measuring
pipelines. It is used in cleaning and filtering systems and
principle
coolant and lubricant tanks as an overspill protection or
External test option using test magnet
as a pump protector.
On-site control using external LED display
The FTL20 is ideal for applications which previously used
Easy to install even at points difficult to access due to
float switches and conductive, capacitive and optical
compact construction
sensors.
Rugged stainless steel housing (316L)
It also works in applications which are unsuitable for
Service-friendly plug-in connections
these measuring methods due to conductivity, build-ups,
For medium temperatures up to 150 C
turbulence, flows or air bubbles.
The FTL20 is not suitable for hazardous areas and areas
where the medium temperature is above 150 C.
For hygienic areas the use of FTL20H is recommended.

TI364F/00/en

Appendix E- 199
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Table of contents

Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10


Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Design, dimensions of the 150 C variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Design, dimensions of the 100 C variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Weight (150 C variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Weight (100 C variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operating modes for variants AC and DC-PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Function test with test magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Light signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CE approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overfill protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Switching delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Marine approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Measured value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Measuring frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Liquiphant T FTL20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Settling time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Influence of ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Socket wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Influence of medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Welding boss G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Influence of medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Welding boss G 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Operating conditions: Installation instructions . . . . . . 8
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Operating conditions: Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ambient temperature limits for 150 C variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ambient temperature limits for 100 C variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Operating conditions: Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9


Medium temperature range for 150 C variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Medium temperature range for 100 C variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
State of aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Gas content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Solids content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 200
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Function and system design


Measuring principle The tuning fork of the FTL20 is brought to its resonance frequency by means of a piezoelectric drive.
If the tuning fork is covered by liquid, this frequency changes. The electronics of the FTL20 monitor the
resonance frequency and indicate whether the tuning fork is freely vibrating or is covered by liquid.

Measuring system The measuring system comprises:


Liquiphant T FTL20 limit switch
Progammable logic control (PLC), miniature contactor, solenoid valve or AS-i bus

AS-interface

PLC
U
...

~ 230 V

L00-FTL20Hxx-14-05-xx-en-001

Example 1): Overfill protection or top level detection


Example 2): Lower level detection or dry running protection
Example 3): Dry running protection for pump

Endress + Hauser 3

Appendix E- 201
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Input
Measured variable Density

Measuring range > 0.7 g/cm3


other density settings on request, e.g. 0.5 g/cm3

Output
Switching outputs

DC-PNP valve connector DC-PNP M 12x1 AC 2-wire AS-i

Function Positive voltage signal at the switch output of the Switching the power Switching the
electronics (PNP) supply line D0 bit

Switch behaviour ON/OFF 0/1


(free / covered)

Relay switching capacity 250 mA D0 bit

Fail-safe mode MIN/MAX (see below) D1 bit


D1: 0 error

Switching delay approx. 0.5 s on coverage / approx. 1.0 s on tuning fork becoming uncovered
other switching time on request

Switching threshold with vertical orientation: 13.0 mm from top of fork


with horizontal orientation: 3.5 mm from fork centre

Hysteresis 3 0.5 mm

Operating modes for variants The FTL20 can be connected in two operating modes. By choosing the suitable operating mode
AC and DC-PNP (MAX or MIN safety), you ensure that the FTL20 switches safely even in the event of a fault (e.g. if the power
supply line is disconnected).

MAX - maximum safety


The FTL20 keeps the electronic switch closed as long as the liquid level is below the fork.
Example of an application: overfill protection

MIN - minimum safety


The FTL20 keeps the electronic switch closed as long as the fork is immersed in liquid.
Example of an application: dry running protection for pumps
The electronic switch opens if the limit is reached, if a fault occurs or the power fails.

4 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 202
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Power supply
Cable entry

27.5 mm
min. 40 mm

L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-001

Pg 11 / NPT / M 12x1 *
QUICKON (Plastic)

* Accessories
4 x 0.34 M 12 elbowed (order number: 52010285)

Electrical connection Variant DC-PNP (direct current) M 12x1 connector


Voltage source: shock-protected voltage or Class 2 circuit (North America)

Suitable for use in non-equivalent operation:


When both outputs are connected, the MIN and MAX outputs take on opposite states in trouble-free operation.
In the event of an alarm condition or a line break, both electronic switches are open. In addition to level
monitoring, function-dependent sensor monitoring can also be performed with the aid of 2-channel evaluation.

Operating mode MAX (NC contact) Operating mode MIN (NO contact)

1 2 1 4

1 2 1 4

L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-002 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-003

2 1 1: BN 2 1 1: BN
2: WT 3: BU
3 4 3: BU 3 4 4: BK

R 0.5 A R 0.5 A

L L+ L L+
L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-009 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-010

Endress + Hauser 5

Appendix E- 203
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Variant DC-PNP (direct current) valve connector

Operating mode MAX (NC contact) Operating mode MIN (NO contact)

3 2 2 3

3 2 2 3

L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-004 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-005

1 2 1 2

+
3 3 +
R
R

0.5 A 0.5 A

PE L L+ PE L L+
(Ground) (Ground)
L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-011 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-012

Variant AC (alternating current) valve connector

Operating mode MAX Operating mode MIN

1 3 1 2

1 3 1 2

L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-006 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-007

1 1 2

3
> 19 V > 19 V

R R
0.5 A 0.5 A

PE L1 N PE L1 N
(Ground) (Ground)
L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-013 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-014

! Note!
Approved for relays with a holding power/rated power >2.5 VA (253 V) or > 0.5 VA (24 V).
Relays with lower holding power/rated power can be operated via a parallel-connected RC-element (option).

6 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 204
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Connect AS-i bus

AS-i + 1: BN
2 1 3: BU

3 4
AS-i

L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-008

Programming instructions for the AS-i


AS-i profile: S-3.A.1

The address is defaulted to 0 (HEX). It is changeable via the bus master or programming unit.
Data bit:

D0:1 Sensor covered D1:1 Status = O.K.

D0:0 Sensor free D1:0 Status = error

D2 and D3 are not used.

Parameter bits (P0...P3) are not used.

Electrical connection DC-PNP valve connector DC-PNP M 12x1 AC 2 wire AS-i

Supply voltage 10...35 V DC 10...35 V DC 19...253 V AC 24.5...31 V DC

Cable entry Pg 11 / NPT M 12x1 Pg 11 / NPT M 12x1

Cable specification Max 1.5 mm2 and IEC 60947-5-2 Max 1.5 mm2 and IEC 62026-2
3.5...6.5 3.5...6.5

Power consumption < 825 mW < 825 mW < 810 mW < 825 mW

Current consumption < 15 mA < 15 mA < 3.8 mA < 25 mA

Residual ripple 5 Vss at 0...400 Hz 5 Vss at 0...400 Hz

Endress + Hauser 7

Appendix E- 205
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Performance characteristics
Switching delay 0.5 s when covering
1.0 s when becoming free
other switching time on request

Reference operating Ambient temperature: 23 C


conditions
Process pressure: 1 bar
Medium: water
Medium density: 1
Medium temperature: 23 C
Installation from above /vertical
Density setting: > 0.7

Measured value resolution < 0.5 mm

Measuring frequency Approx. 1100 Hz in air

Maximum measured error 13.0 1 mm

Repeatability 0.5 mm

Hysteresis 3.0 0.5 mm

Settling time <2s

Influence of Negligible
ambient temperature

Influence of 29.6 x 10-3 mm/C


medium temperature

Influence of 55.2 x 10-3 mm/bar


medium pressure

Operating conditions: Installation instructions


Orientation The Liquiphant T FTL20 can be installed in any position in a container or pipe.
The formation of foam does not impair its function.

L00-FTL20xxx-11-05-xx-xx-001

Example 1): Overfill protection or top level detection


Example 2): Dry running protection for pump
Example 3): Lower level detection

8 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 206
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Connecting cable Up to 1000 m with AC/DC-PNP, AS-i to IEC 62 026-2

Operating conditions: Environment


Ambient temperature range 40...+70 C
25...+70 C (AS-i)

Ambient temperature limits Derating from 90.0 C process temperature: Reduction to max. 50.0 C ambient
for 150 C variant Derating from 90.0 C process temperature: Reduction to max. 150 mA relay switching capacity

Ambient temperature Derating from 80.0 C process temperature: Reduction to max. 50.0 C ambient
limits for 100 C variant Derating from 80.0 C process temperature: Reduction to max. 150 mA relay switching capacity

Storage temperature 40...+85 C

Degree of protection IP65 with valve connector


IP66/67 with M 12x1 connector PPSU (plastic)

Shock resistance to EN 60068-2-27 (30 g)

Vibration resistance to EN 60068-2-64

Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission to EN 61326, Electrical Equipment Class B,


interference immunity to EN 61326, Annex A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC).
AS-interface to EN 50295.

Overvoltage protection Overvoltage category III

Operating conditions: Process


Medium temperature range 40...+150 C,
for 150 C variant see ambient temperature limits

Medium temperature range 40...+100 C,


for 100 C variant see ambient temperature limits

Process pressure 1...40 bar

State of aggregation Liquid

Density > 0.7 g/cm3 (other density setting on request)

Viscosity 1...10000 cSt

Gas content Stagnant mineral water

Solids content < 5 mm

Endress + Hauser 9

Appendix E- 207
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Mechanical construction

! Note!
All dimensions in mm

Design, dimensions
of the 150 C variant M 12x1 QUICKON Valve connector

40
45
30

28.5

36
51.5
45.5

40 40

31.5 31.5 31.5

185.5
179.5
173

32 AF 32 AF 32 AF
38.2

38.2

38.2
*1

*1
*1

13

13
13

2 2
3.5 * 2 3.5 * 3.5 *
17.1 17.1 17.1

2
*2 * *2
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-001

*1 Switch point with vertical installation


*2 Switch point with horizontal installation; the level increases in the direction of the arrow

Switch points at: density 1 / 23 C / 0 bar

10 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 208
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Design, dimensions
of the 100 C variant M 12x1 QUICKON Valve connector

40
45
30

36
28.5

51.5
45.5
40 40
31.5 31.5 31.5

161
155
148.5

32 AF38.2 32 AF 32 AF

38.2

38.2
*1

*1
*1

13

13
13

2 2
3.5 * 2 3.5 * 3.5 *
17.1 17.1 17.1

*2 *2 *2
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-002

*1 Switch point with vertical installation


*2 Switch point with horizontal installation; the level increases in the direction of the arrow

Switch points at: density 1 / 23 C / 0 bar

Process connections Process connection / Order Accessories Pressure


Dimensions code (optional) Temperature

G A, 0 max. 40 bar
GA 1 max. 150 C
DIN ISO 228/I

93
(version 150 C)
68.5 63.9
(version 100 C)
22.7 22.7 16 38

L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-009

GA 1 Welding boss max. 25 bar


DIN ISO 228/I (with defined max. 150 C
for flush-mounted installation in welding boss thread start)
EHEDG with welding boss 52018765 with silicone O-ring max. 40 bar
Endress+Hauser max. 100 C
93 52018765
(version 150 C)
68.5 63.9 FDA-listed materials
(version 100 C) as per
22.7 22.7 16 38 21 CFR Part 175-178

L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-009

Endress + Hauser 11

Appendix E- 209
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Process connection / Order Accessories Pressure


Dimensions code (optional) Temperature

G1A 6 max. 40 bar


DIN ISO 228/l max. 150 C

93 66.5
(version 150 C)

22.7 18.5 38

L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-010

G1A 7 Welding boss max. 25 bar


DIN ISO 228/I (with defined max. 150 C
with sealing surface for flush-mounted installation thread start)
in welding boss with silicone O-ring max. 40 bar
EHEDG with welding boss 52001051 Endress+Hauser max. 100 C
(Seal geometry same as e.g. FTL260) 52001051

93 74.5 FDA-listed materials


(version 150 C)
as per
22.7 18.6 47.9 21 CFR Part 175-178

L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-012

NPT 2 max. 40 bar


ANSI B 1.20.1 max. 150 C

R 4
DIN 2999

93
(version 150 C)

68.5 63.9
(version 100 C)

22.7 22.7 47.9

L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-011

NPT 3 max. 40 bar


ANSI B 1.20.1 max. 150 C

R 5
DIN 2999

93
(version 150 C)

68.5 63.9
(version 100 C)

22.7 22.7 47.9

L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-011

12 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 210
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Weight (150 C variant) Approx. 270 g

Weight (100 C variant) Approx. 210 g

Materials Sensor and housing made of 316L, surface quality Ra < 3.2 m

Housing Pipe housing

Terminals Valve connector,


QUICKON,
M 12x1

Human interface
Function test with test magnet Variants AC and DC-PNP:
On testing, the current state of the electronic switch is reversed.

Variant AS-interface:
On testing, D0 is inverted.

Performing test
Hold the test magnet against the mark on the nameplate:

L00-FTL20xxx-19-05-xx-xx-001

The switching state changes.

Endress + Hauser 13

Appendix E- 211
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Light signals Variants AC and DC-PNP with valve connector/QUICKON

gn rd

L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-001

Green light (gn) lighting:


FTL20 is connected to the power supply and is operational.

Red light (rd) lighting:


Mode of operation MAX (overfill protection): sensor is immersed in liquid.
Mode of operation MIN (dry running protection): sensor is immersed in liquid.

Green light (gn) does not come on


Error:
No power supply.
Check plug, cable and power supply

Red light (rd) flashing:


Error:
Overload or short-circuit in load circuit.
Rectify the short-circuit
Reduce maximum load current to below 250 mA
Error:
Internal sensor error or sensor corroded.
Replace device

14 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 212
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Variant AS-interface and DC-PNP with M 12x1 circular connector PPSU

gn

rd
ye

L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-002

Green light (gn) lighting:


FTL20 is connected to the power supply and is operational.

Yellow light (ye) lighting:


Sensor is immersed in liquid.

Red light (rd) lighting with AS-interface:


Error:
Address 0 set or communication error.
Carry out addressing process
Parameterise slave
Or reduce line length (< 100 m total length)

Red light (rd) lighting with DC-PNP


Error:
Overload or short-circuit in load circuit.
Rectify the short-circuit
Reduce maximum load current to below 250 mA

Green light (gn) does not come on


Error:
No power supply.
Check plug, cable and power supply

Red light (rd) flashing (2 Hz):


Error:
Internal sensor error or sensor corroded.
Replace device

Endress + Hauser 15

Appendix E- 213
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Certificates and approvals

! Note!
The specified certificates and approvals are available on www.endress.com/ftl20.

CE approval The device is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing the CE mark.

Sanitary compatibility EHEDG (see process connections, Page 11),


Approval number: 3119/03/0445

Overfill protection WHG and leakage

Marine approval German Lloyd (GL),


Approval number: 42855-02HH

Other standards and AS-i profile S-3.A.1 as per EN 50295 (limit switch)
guidelines

Ordering information
Liquiphant T FTL20 10 Approval *
0 Non-hazardous area, WHG, leakage detection
3 CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
9 Special version

20 Process connection
0 Thread ISO228 G A, 316L
1 Thread ISO228 G A, 316L
6 Thread ISO228 G 1 A, 316L
7 Thread ISO228 G 1 A, 316L Installation in accessory: welding boss
2 Thread ANSI NPT , 316L
3 Thread ANSI NPT , 316L
4 Thread DIN2999 R , 316L
5 Thread DIN2999 R , 316L
9 Special version

30 Switch output
1 2-wire 19...253 V AC
2 3-wire, PNP 10... 35 V DC
3 AS-i bus
9 Special version

40 Application; Cable entry


B 150 C, Plug Pg 11 ISO4400 IP65
C 150 C, Plug NPT ISO4400 IP65
D 150 C, Plug M 12 IP66/67
E 150 C, Plug QUICKON IP65
0 100 C, Plug Pg 11 ISO4400 IP65
4 100 C, Plug NPT ISO4400 IP65
5 100 C, Plug M 12 IP66/67
6 100 C, Plug QUICKON IP65
9 Special version

FTL20 Order code

* The specified certificates and approvals are available on www.endress.com/ftl20.

16 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 214
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Accessories

! Note!
All dimensions in mm

Socket wrench Order number: 52010156


Socket wrench AF 32

32 AF
L00-FTL20xxx-00-05-xx-en-001

Welding boss G Order number: 52018765 max. 25 bar


26
max. 150 C
For flush-mounted installation and sealing 21

with defined thread start max. 40 bar


Sensor cannot be aligned max. 100 C

55 0.4
ISO 228
Material: corrosion-resistant steel
G
32

1.4435 (AISI 316L)


Weight: 0.13 kg
Seal: silicone O-ring
L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-019
Order number: 52021717 (set)
FDA-listed materials as per
21 CFR Part 175-178

Welding boss G 1 Order number: 52001051 max. 25 bar


29.6
max. 150 C
For flush-mounted installation 24.6
and sealing
max. 40 bar
with defined thread start max. 100 C
Sensor cannot be aligned
60 0.4
ISO 228
41
G1

Material: corrosion-resistant steel


1.4435 (AISI 316L)
Weight: 0.19 kg
Seal: silicone O-ring L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-020

Order number: 52001386


FDA-listed materials as per
21 CFR Part 175-178

Cable Order number: 52010285


4 x 0.34 M 12 elbowed
Cable: PVC (grey) 5 m length
27.5

Body: PUR (blue)


Coupling nut: Cu Sn/Ni
min. 40
Protection: IP67
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-004
Temperature range: 25 C to +70 C

Endress + Hauser 17

Appendix E- 215
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Supplementary documentation
Operating Instructions FTL20
KA213F/00
Order number: 52019486
Welding boss G
KA219F/00
Order number: 52020163

Certificates Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H


Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung Z-65.11-311
ZE247F/00
Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H (Leckage)
Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung Z-65.40-312
ZE248F/00
Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H
Number of the Certification Document 37102
ZE249F/00
Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H
Certificate of Compliance No. 1238461
ZE250F/00

! Note!
The specified certificates and approvals are available on www.endress.com/ftl20.

18 Endress + Hauser

Appendix E- 216
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

Endress + Hauser 19

Appendix E- 217
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Liquiphant T FTL20

International Head Quarter

Endress+Hauser
GmbH+Co. KG
Instruments International
Colmarer Str. 6
79576 Weil am Rhein
Deutschland

Tel. +49 76 21 9 75 02
Fax +49 76 21 9 75 34 5
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com

TI364F/00/en/02.05
SL/FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo

Appendix E- 218
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Technical Information

Cerabar T PMC131, PMP131, PMP135


Pressure Transducer
With ceramic and metal sensors
For absolute pressure and gauge pressure measurement up to 400 bar
Extremely stable, overload-resistant and reliable

Application
Cerabar T is a pressure transducer for measuring absolute
pressure and gauge pressure in gases, vapors, liquids and
dusts.
Hygienic and threaded connections are available as
process connections.
Your benefits
This compact pressure transducer impresses with its
well-engineered construction:
High reproducibility and long-term stability.
Finely graduated measuring ranges from vacuum up to
400 bar/6000 psi.
Ceraphire ceramic sensor: corrosion-proof, abrasion-
proof and extremely overload-resistant.
Deployed for pressure monitoring up to SIL 2 as per
IEC 61508/IEC 61511-1
Sensors
Dry capacitance ceramic sensor (Ceraphire) for
measuring ranges up to 40 bar:
overload-resistant, vacuum-proof, stable against
alternating load
Piezoresistive sensor with metal diaphragm for
measuring ranges up to 400 bar

TI415P/00/en

Appendix E- 219
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Table of contents

Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Operating conditions (process) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11


Device selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Overload resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Vacuum resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Pressure specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PMC131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PMP131 and PMP135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PMP131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PMP135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Output current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Switch frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Input PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Inductive loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ex approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PMC131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PMP131 and PMP135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Functional safety SIL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PMP131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Suitability for hygenic processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 TSE Certificate of Suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Residual ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18


Reference operating PMC131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PMC131 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Long-term stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PMP131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Maximum measured error PMP131 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
of analog output PMP135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
(under reference operating conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Switch point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rise time (T90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Welding neck with
Settling time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
sealing taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Thermal change of the lower range value and the span . . . . . . . . . 9
Welding neck with
Temperature coefficient (TK) for lower range value and span . . . . . 9
sealing surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Plug-in jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Operating conditions (Installation instructions). . . . . . 9 Plug-on display
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 PHX20/PHX21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Location dependence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Field of Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating conditions (environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Functional Safety Manual (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

2 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 220
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Function and system design


Device selection Cerabar T PMC131 PMP131 PMP135

ENDRESS+HAUSER
CERABAR T

ENDRESS+HAUSER
CERABAR T
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CERABAR T

P01-PMC131xx-14-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-PMP131xx-14-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-PMP135xx-14-xx-xx-xx-000

With capacitive measuring With piezoresistive With piezoresistive measuring cell


cell and ceramic measuring measuring cell and metallic and metallic measuring
diaphragm (Ceraphire) measuring diaphragm diaphragm for hygienic
applications

Field of Absolute pressure and gauge Absolute pressure and gauge Absolute pressure and gauge pressure
application pressure pressure in hygienic processes

Output Current output 4 to 20 mA Current output 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA


Voltage output 0 to 10 V Switch output PNP
Switch output PNP
Process Thread: Thread: Hygiene:
connection G G Clamp DN 22 (")
MNPT and FNPT MNPT and FNPT Tri-Clamp DN 25 to 38 (1" to 1")
G , bore 11 mm MNPT, bore 4 mm Tri-Clamp DN 40 to 51 (2")
G G1
MNPT, bore 3.5 mm SMS 1"
M 20 x 1.5

Measuring 1 to 0 bar/100 to 0 kPa 0 to 1 bar/0 to 100 kPa 0 to 1 bar/0 to 100 kPa


range up to up to up to
0 to 40 bar/0 to 4 MPa 0 to 400 bar/0 to 40 MPa 0 to 40 bar/0 to 4 MPa

Process 20 to +100 C 25 C to +70 C 25 to +100 C


temperature (+135 C for max. 1 hour)

Measuring principle PMC131


The measuring pressure causes a slight deflection of the ceramic diaphragm of the sensor. The pressure-
proportional change in capacitance is measured at the electrodes of the ceramic sensor. The ceramic sensor is
a dry sensor, i.e. no fill fluid is required for the pressure transfer. This makes the sensor completely suitable for
vacuums. Extremely high stability, comparable with the material Alloy, is achieved by using ultrapure
Ceraphire as the ceramic.

PMP131 and PMP135 with analog output


The process pressure acting upon the metallic separating diaphragm of the sensor is transmitted to a resistance
bridge via a fluid. The pressure-proportional change of the bridge output voltage is measured and processed
further.

PMP131 and PMP135 with switch output


The process pressure acting upon the metallic separating diaphragm of the sensor is transmitted to a resistance
bridge via a fluid. A differential amplifier creates a standard signal from the pressure-proportional change in
output voltage of the bridge. A comparator with an adjustable hysteresis compares this signal with the pre-set
switch point and then activates the transistor output.

Endress+Hauser 3

Appendix E- 221
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Measuring system
1 2
4...20 mA

+ +


p p

3 4
+ 0...10 V 4...20 mA

p
P01-PMx13xxx-14-xx-xx-xx-002

1 PMP131, PMP135: current output with transmitter power supply unit, e.g. RN 221N from Endress+Hauser
2 PMP131, PMP135: switch output with load, e.g. PLC, DCS, relay
3 PMC131: voltage output with transmitter power supply unit, e.g. RIA452 from Endress+Hauser
4 PMC131: current output with transmitter power supply unit, e.g. RN 221N from Endress+Hauser

Input
Measured variable Absolute pressure or gauge pressure

Measuring range up to 400 bar/6000 psi, see Page 18, "Ordering information" section

Output
Analog output (PMC131, PMP131, PMP135)

Output signal 4 to 20 mA

Load PMC131
RLmax [] (US 1 V) / 0.02 A

PMP131 and PMP135 (current output)


RLmax [] (US 12 V) / 0.02 A (RLmax: Maximum load resistance, US: Supply voltage)
PMP131 (voltage output)
Load resistance RLmax 5 k, current consumption 6 mA

Switch output (PMP131, PMP135)

Output signal PNP switch output (positive voltage signal), rate depends on power supply voltage

Output current Switch status ON: Ia 500 mA


Switch status OFF: Ia 1 mA

4 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 222
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Power max. 6 W

Switch frequency max. 10 Hz

Input PLC Input resistance Ri 2 k


Input current Ii 10 mA

Inductive loads To prevent electrical interference, only operate an inductive load (relays, contactors, solenoid valves) when
directly connected to a protective circuit (free-wheeling diode or capacitor).

Power supply
PMC131 Plug/cable connection

2 1

ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER


CERABAR T CERABAR T CERABAR T

M16 / NPT M12x1 5 m/25 m


P01-PMC131xx-04-xx-xx-xx-001

Plug M 16 x 1.5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT Plug M 12x1 5 m/25 m cable

Plug-in housing Reference pressure line

Gasket

Electrical connection: Analog/current output

1 + 2 +
12...30 V 12...30 V
3-
4...20 mA 4...20 mA

2
1+ 2

+
3 12...30 V
1+ 2
4...20 mA

+

PE
gnye
bk
rd

P01-PMC131xx-04-xx-xx-xx-002

1 Plug M 16 x 1.5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT


2 Plug M 12 x 1
3 Cable (rd = red, bk = black, gnye = green-yellow)

Endress+Hauser 5

Appendix E- 223
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

PMP131 and PMP135 Plug/cable connection

1 1
3

4 2

5 3

DIN 43 650/A (M16 / NPT) M12x1 5m


DIN 43650/C
P01-PMP13xxx-04-xx-xx-xx-001

Plug M 16 x 1.5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT Plug M 12x1 5 m cable, only analog output
Plug DIN 43650/C

Plug-in housing Coupling nut Reference pressure line

Plug-in jack with gasket Connector with gasket

Coupling nut Operating potentiometer (inner)

Plug with O-ring

Operating potentiometer (inner)

Electrical connection: Analog/current output

+ +
1 2
12...30 V 12...30 V

4...20 mA 4...20 mA

2 3-
1+

3
+
3 3 12...30 V
1+ 2
4...20 mA

+

PE
wh
gn
rd

P01-PMP13xxx-04-xx-xx-xx-002

1 Plug M 16 x 1.5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT and plug DIN 43650/C


2 Plug M 12 x 1
3 Cable (rd = red, wh = white, gn = green)

For electrical connection provided by customer use only shielded cable

6 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 224
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Electrical connection (switch output)

1 R 2
+ +
18...32 V 18...32 V
3
2-

1 3+
1+ 2
2 R

3 1+
P01-PMP13xxx-04-xx-xx-xx-003

1 Plug M 16 x 1.5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT


2 Plug M 12 x 1
R External load, e.g. relay, programmable logic controller, distributed control system
For electrical connection provided by customer use only shielded cable

PMP131 Electrical connection: Analog-/voltage output

1 0...10 V 2 0...10 V 3 0...10 V

+ + +
15...30 V 15...30 V
15...30 V
3-

+
+
PE

1+

wh
gn
bk
rd
2-
2+
3+ 1+

P01-PMP131xx-04-xx-xx-xx-001

1 Plug M 16 x 1,5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT and plug DIN 43 650/C


2 Plug M 12 x 1
3 Cable (rd = red, wh = white, gn = green)
For electrical connection provided by customer use only shielded cable

Supply voltage PMC131


11 to 30 V DC

PMP131 and PMP135 (current output, 2-wire version)


For non-hazardous areas: 12 to 30 V DC
Ex i: no-load voltage 26 V DC, short-circuit current 100 mA, power consumption 0.8 W

PMP131 (voltage output, 3-wire version)


15...30 V DC

PMP131 and PMP135 (switch output)


18 to 32 V DC, current consumption without load < 20 mA, with reverse polarity protection

Residual ripple Analog output: max. 5 % of supply voltage


Switch output: max. 10 % of supply voltage

Cable entry See Page 18, "Ordering information" section.

Endress+Hauser 7

Appendix E- 225
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Performance characteristics
Reference operating as per DIN IEC 60770, TU = 25 C
conditions

Long-term stability 0.15 % of URL per year

Maximum measured error The measured error comprises the non-linearity including hysteresis and non-reproducibility in accordance
of analog output with the limit point method as per IEC 60770.
(under reference operating
conditions) PMC131
0.5 % of (URL - LRL) x TD1)

Example: PMC131 version "A1R"


Nominal value = 10 bar 1
Upper range value (URV) = 6 bar
Lower range value (LRV) = 0 bar LRL = LRV URV URL

Turn down (is set at factory):


Nominal value / (URV LRV)= 10 bar/6 bar = 10:6 0 bar +6 bar +10 bar

3
P01-PMx13xxx-05-xx-xx-xx-001

Example: PMC131 version "A1R"


set span: 0 to 6 bar; nominal value = 10 bar
1 Span set and calibrated at the factory (measuring
range)
2 Nominal value i Upper Range Limit (URL)
3 Sensor measuring range
LRL Lower Range Limit
URL Upper Range Limit
LRV Lower Range Value
URV Upper Range Value

PMP131 and PMP135


0.5 % of URL

Switch point PMP131 and PMP135


Deviation: 1 % of URL
Non-reproducibility: 0.5 % of URL

Rise time (T90) PMC131


20 ms

Settling time PMP131 and PMP135


2 to 5 ms

1) extended specifications apply to customer-specific measuring ranges

8 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 226
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Thermal change of the lower PMC1312)


range value and the span
Zero output, 20 to +85 C:
typically 1.5 % of URL
Output span, 20 to +85 C:
Nominal value 0.4 to 40 bar: typically 0.8 % of URL
Nominal value 0.1bar: typically 1.0 % of URL

Temperature coefficient (TK) PMP131 and PMP135 (analog output)


for lower range value and span
Zero output:
typically: 0.2 % of URL/10 K
max.: 0.5 % of URL/10 K
Nominal value 6 bar: by 0.1 % of URL/10 K higher
Output signal:
typically: 0.2 % of URL/10 K
max.: 0.5 % of URL/10 K

PMP131 and PMP135 (switch output)


Switch point:
typically: 0.2 % of URL/10 K
max.: 0.5 % of URL/10 K

Operating conditions (Installation instructions)


Orientation anywhere

Installation instructions PMP131


Process connection G 1/2 flush-mounted, max. torque 40 Nm

Location dependence PMC131


without influence

PMP131 and PMP135


Position-dependent zero point shift can be corrected by potentiometer setting, see also Page 16.

2) for customer-specific measuring-ranges: values are doubled

Endress+Hauser 9

Appendix E- 227
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Operating conditions (environment)

Ambient temperature range PMC131


20 to +85 C

PMP131 and PMP135


For non-hazardous areas: 25 to +70 C
Ex i: 25 to +65 C

Storage temperature range PMC131


50 to +100 C

PMP131 and PMP135


40 to +85 C

Climate class PMC131


4K4H as per DIN EN 60721-3

PMP131 and PMP135


4Z
with Z = 70 C as per VDI/VDE 3540

Degree of protection PMC131


Plug M 16 x 1,5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT: IP 65/NEMA 4X
Plug M12x1: IP 65/ NEMA 4
Cable: IP 68/NEMA 6P (1 mWS/24 h)

PMP131 and PMP135


Plug M 16 x 1,5 (DIN 43650/A), NPT: IP 65/NEMA 4X
Plug M 12x1 and gauge pressure sensors: IP 65/NEMA 4X
Plug M 12x1 and absolute pressure sensors: IP 68/NEMA 6P (1 mWS/24 h)
Cable: IP 68/NEMA 6P (1 mWS/24 h)

Vibration resistance 4M5 as per DIN EN 60721-3

Electromagnetic compatibility PMC131


Interference emission as per EN 61326 electrical device class B,
Interference immunity as per EN 61326 appendix A (industrial use).

PMP131 and PMP135


Electromagnetic combatibility according to EN 61326;
For details refer to the declaration of conformity (see ATEX Safety Instructions XA142P)

10 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 228
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Operating conditions (process)

Process temperature range PMC131


20 to +100 C
Devices for oxygen application: 10 to +60 C
(Version "S" for feature 30 "Sensor gasket")
PMP131
25 to +70 C
PMP135
25 to +100 C (+135 C for max. 1 hour)
Extreme jumps in temperature can result in temporary measuring errors. Temperature compensation takes
effect after several minutes. Internal temperature compensation is faster the smaller the temperature jump and
the longer the time interval.

Overload resistance See Page 18, "Ordering information" section.

Vacuum resistance PMC131


with URV > 200 mbar/> 80 inH2O/> 1.5 psi: 0 mbarabs
with URV = 200 mbar/= 50 inH2O or 80 inH2O: 500 mbarabs
(Versions "D12", "D38", "W6O", "S4N")
with URV = 20 mbar or 100 mbar/=1.5 psi/=15 inH2O or 30 inH2O: 700 mbarabs
(Versions "D10", "D3W", "D31", "Q4D", "V6F", "W6N", "W6R")
PMP131 and PMP135
10 mbarabs

Pressure specifications The MWP (maximum working pressure) of the device is specified on the nameplate. It depends on the
weakest element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components. See the following sections:
Page 18 ff, "Ordering information" section, feature 50 "Measuring range; MWP; Nominal value; OPL"
or "Sensor range; MWP; OPL".
Page 12 ff, "Mechanical construction" section.
The MWP specification on the nameplate is based on a reference temperature of +20 C and can be present
over an unlimited period of time.
The test pressure corresponds to the overload limit of the measuring device (Over Pressure Limit OPL) and
must only be present for a limited period of time.

Endress+Hauser 11

Appendix E- 229
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Mechanical construction
PMC131 Housing

1 2 3
32

Pg 11

101

ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER

91
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CERABAR T CERABAR T
CERABAR T

73
SW 41 SW 41 SW 41
A

A
P01-PMC131xx-06-xx-xx-xx-001

Housing PMC131; Material AISI 304 (1.4301)


1 Versions A1, A2, B1, C1, C2: Plug M 16 or NPT (ISO 4400), IP 65
2 Versions A5, B5, C5: Plug M 12, IP 65
3 Versions A3, A4, B3, C3: 5 m or 25 m cable, IP 68

See the following diagram for the height of process connection A

Process connections

1 2 3
H

H
20

17

20
25
12
A

6 NPT 11
3

G NPT 17
G
P01-PMC131xx-06-xx-xx-xx-002

Process connections PMC131; Material AISI 304 (1.4301)


1 Version 1: Thread ISO 228 G
2 Version 2: Thread ANSI MNPT FNPT
3 Version 5: Thread ISO 228 G , bore 11 mm

See respective housing for installation height H (previous figure)

12 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 230
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

PMP131 and PMP135 Housings

1 2 3 4 5 6

54
36

15
54
36

15

110
H=110

110
26.5 26.5 26.5
26.5 26.5 26.5 33
85

89
89
H
A

A
A
P01-PMP13xxx-06-xx-xx-xx-002

Housings PMP131 and PMP135; Material AISI 304 (1.4301)


1...3 PMP131 and PMP135 with sensor range up to 100 bar
4...6 PMP131 with sensor range up to 400 bar
1 + 4 Versions A1, A2: Plug M 16 (DIN 43650/A) or NPT (ISO 4400), IP 65; dimension x = 52 mm
Version A5: Plug DIN 43650/C, IP 65; dimension x = 42 mm
2 + 5 Version A3: 5 m cable, IP 68
3 + 6 Version A4: Plug M 12, IP 65

See the following figure for the dimensions of process connection A

PMP131 Process connections


A

P01-PMP131xx-06-xx-xx-xx-002

Process connections PMP131; Material AISI 304 (1.4301)


1 Version 1: Thread ISO 228 G
2 Version 2: Thread ANSI MNPT FNPT
3 Version 3: Thread ANSI MNPT, bore 4 mm female
4 Version 4: Thread ISO 228 G
5 Version 5: Thread ANSI MNPT, bore 3.5 mm female
6 Version 6: Thread M 20 x 1.5

See respective housing for installation height H (figure above)


Process connections with AF 27 mm

Endress+Hauser 13

Appendix E- 231
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

1 2 mm (inch)

27

H
(1.1)

(0.1)
2.5
G

(0.7)
(0.5)
17
14

(0.5)

(0.9)
14

22
G
26
(1)
P01-PMP131xx-06-09-xx-xx-002

Process connection PMP131; Material AISI 304 (1.4301)


1 Version B: Thread ISO 228 G , Gasket DIN 3852-A flush-mounted
2 Dimensions for tapped hole G as per DIN 3852-11 form X

See respective housing for installation height H

PMP135 Process connections

1 2 3
H

H
33

33

33

M M M

27.5 43.5 56.5

34 50.5 64

4 5 6
H

H
H

39
46.6
33

27
29.5

M M
M

55 29 G1A
G1A
P01-PMP135xx-06-xx-xx-xx-001

Process connections PMP135; Material AISI 316L (1.4435); Surface roughness of the surfaces in contact with the medium
Ra 0.8 m
M = Diaphragm diameter 17.2 mm
1 Version F: Clamp " (ISO 2852) or DN 22 (DIN 32676), 3A
2 Version G: Tri-Clamp 1" to 1" (ISO 2852) or DN 25 to DN 40 (DIN 32676), 3A
3 Version H: Tri-Clamp 2" (ISO 2852) or DN 50 (DIN 32676), 3A
4 Version S: SMS 1" PN 25, 3A
5 Version N : G1A (ISO 228), with sealing surface for flush-mounted installation
6 Version M: G1A (ISO 228), with metallic sealing taper, flush-mounted

See respective housing for installation height H

14 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 232
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Weights PMC131: approx. 0.32 kg


PMP131: approx. 0.24 kg
PMP135: approx. 0.34 kg

Material Process connection:


PMC131: AISI 304 (1.4301)
PMP131: AISI 304 (1.4301)
PMP135: AISI 316L (1.4435)
Sensor diaphragm:
PMC131: Ceraphire (99.9 % Al2O3), FDA number 21-CFR 186.1256
PMP131, PMP135: AISI 316L (1.4435)
Fill oil:
PMP131: Tegiloxan 3
PMP135: Mineral oil, FDA number 21-CFR 172.882
Housing
AISI 304 (1.4301)
Electrical connection
Plug M12: Polyamide (PA)
Valve connector: Sheathing made of polyamide (PA)
Cable: Sheathing made of polyurethane (PUR/UL94, V0, UV-resistant)

Operating elements
Operating elements Position of operating elements
The potentiometer for operating the
Cerabar T PMP131 and PMP135 with analog or
switch output is located below the base of the plug.

P01-PMx13xxx-19-xx-xx-xx-003

Analog output: Zero point adjustment


The zero point can be corrected for the Cerabar T
PMP131 and PMP135 with analog output and plug
version.

P01-PMx13xxx-19-xx-xx-xx-001

1 Potentiometer for zero point correction by 5 % of URL

Endress+Hauser 15

Appendix E- 233
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Switch output: Switch point and hysteresis adjustment


For the Cerabar T PMP131 and PMP135 with
switch output, both the switch point and hysteresis
can be adjusted.
3 This can also be carried out at atmospheric pressure
using the enclosed test cable and a voltmeter.
1

2 +
4

P01-PMx13xxx-19-xx-xx-xx-002

1 Hysteresis adjustment 1.5 to 20 % of URL;


Factory setting 10 % of URL
2 Switch point adjustment 0 to 100 % of URL;
Factory setting 50 % of URL
3 LED color code for checking the switch status:
green = off; red = on
4 Connect voltmeter to test pins:
0 to 1 V corresponds to 0 to 100 % of URL

Uout
Hysteresis
1.5...20 %
ON = red LED
on

Switch Switch
on off

off
OFF = green LED

p
Switch point
0...100 %
P01-PMP13xxx-05-xx-xx-en-001

Instructions for switch point and hysteresis (the percentage values refer to the URL)
Ua Output voltage
p Acting pressure

16 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 234
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Certificates and approvals


CE mark The device meets the legal requirements of the EC directives. Endress+Hauser confirms that the device has
been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.

Ex approvals All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available upon request. The Ex
documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved for use in explosion hazardous areas.
See also Page 22, "Safety Instructions" section.

Pressure Equipment Directive This measuring device corresponds to Article 3 (3) of the EC directive 97/23/EC (Pressure Equipment
(PED) Directive) and has been designed and manufactured according to good engineering practice.

Functional safety SIL 2 The Cerabar T PMP131 and PMP135 pressure transducers with 4 to 20 mA electronics have been assessed by
an independent body according to the standards IEC 61508/IEC 61511-1. These devices can be used for
monitoring process pressure up to SIL 2.
For a detailed description of safety functions with Cerabar T, settings and characteristic quantities for
functional safety, see the "Functional Safety Manual Cerabar T SD160P".

Suitability for hygenic The Cerabar T PMP135 is suitable for the employment in hygenic
processes processes.
An overview of permitted process connections on page 14.
Many versions meet the requirements of 3A-Sanitary Standard No. 74
and are certified by the EHEDG.
! Note!
The gap-free connections can be cleaned without residue using the
TYPE EL
usual cleaning methods. October 2007

74 -

TSE Certificate of Suitability Cerabar T PMP135


The following applies to wetted device components: They do not contain any materials derived from animals.
No auxiliaries or operating materials derived from animals are used in production or processing. Process wetted
device components are listed in the Mechanical construction and Ordering information sections.

Standards and guidelines DIN EN 60770 (IEC 60770):


Transmitters for controlling in systems used in industrial process technology
Part 1: Methods for evaluating the operating behavior.
DIN EN 61003-1, Edition:1993-12
Systems used in industrial process technology;
Devices with analog inputs and two-point or multi-point behavior;
Part 1: Methods for evaluating the operating behavior.
DIN 16086:
Electrical pressure measuring devices, pressure sensors, transmitters, pressure measuring devices
Terms, specifications in data sheets.
IEC 60592
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP-Code).
EN 61326:
Electrical equipment for control technology and laboratory application EMC requirements.
IEC 61010
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use.
NAMUR
Association for Standards for Control and Regulation in the Chemical Industry.

Registered trademarks Ceraphire


Registered trademark of Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany
( see also www.endress.com/ceraphire)

Endress+Hauser 17

Appendix E- 235
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Ordering information
PMC131 10 Electrical connection:
A1 Plug ISO 4400, M 16, IP 65/NEMA 4X
A2 Plug ISO 4400, NPT, IP 65/NEMA 4X
A3 5 m cable, IP 68/NEMA 6P
A4 25 m cable, IP 68/NEMA 6P
A5 Plug M 12, IP 65/NEMA 4
B1 Plug ISO 4400, M 16, IP 65, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T4
B3 5 m cable, IP 68, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T4
B5 Plug M 12, IP 65, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T4
C1 Plug ISO 4400, M 16, NEMA 4X, CSA GP
C2 Plug ISO 4400, NPT, NEMA 4X, CSA GP
C3 5m cable, IP 68/NEMA 6P, CSA GP
C5 Plug M12, IP 65/NEMA 4, CSA GP

20 Process connection:
1 Thread ISO 228 G , AISI 304
2 Thread ANSI MNPT FNPT, AISI 304
5 Thread ISO 228 G bore 11 mm, AISI 304

30 Sensor seal:
F FKM Viton
S FKM Viton, oxygen application

40 Additional options:
1 Without additional equipment
S GL (German Lloyd) marine certificate
2 Final inspection report

50 Measuring range; MWP; Nominal value; OPL:


Measuring range MWP Nominal OPL
(Maximum value (Over Pressure
Working Limit)
Pressure)
Sensors for gauge pressure
A1G 0 to 1 bar / 0 to 100 kPa 6.7 bar 1 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A1H 1) 0 to 1.6 bar / 0 to 160 kPa 12 bar 2 bar 18 bar / 1.8 MPa
A1K 0 to 2 bar / 0 to 200 kPa 12 bar 2 bar 18 bar / 1.8 MPa
A1Q 0 to 4 bar / 0 to 400 kPa 16.7 bar 4 bar 25 bar / 2.5 MPa
A1R 1) 0 to 6 bar / 0 to 600 kPa 26.7 bar 10 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A1S 0 to 10 bar / 0 to 1 MPa 26.7 bar 10 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A1T 1) 0 to 16 bar / 0 to 1.6 MPa 26.7 bar 20 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A1V 0 to 20 bar / 0 to 2 MPa 26.7 bar 20 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A1W 1) 0 to 25 bar / 0 to 2.5 MPa 40 bar 40 bar 60 bar / 6 MPa
A1X 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 4 MPa 40 bar 40 bar 60 bar / 6 MPa
A3C 1) 1 to 0 bar / 100 to 0 kPa 6.7 bar 2 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A3E 1) 1 to 1 bar / 100 to 100 kPa 6.7 bar 2 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A3G 1) 1 to 3 bar / 100 to 300 kPa 16.7 bar 4 bar 25 bar / 2.5 MPa
A3K 1) 1 to 9 bar / 100 to 900 kPa 26.7 bar 10 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A3N 1) 1 to 15 bar / 0.1 to 1.5 MPa 26.7 bar 20 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
D10 0 to 100 mbar / 0 to 10 kPa 2.7 bar 0.1 bar 4 bar / 400 kPa
D12 1) 0 to 200 mbar / 0 to 20 kPa 3.3 bar 0.2 bar 5 bar / 500 kPa
D14 0 to 400 mbar / 0 to 40 kPa 5.3 bar 0.4 bar 8 bar / 800 kPa
D3W 20 to 20 mbar / 2 to 2 kPa 2.7 bar 0.2 bar 4 bar / 400 kPa
D31 1) 100 to 100 mbar / 10 to 10 3.3 bar 0.2 bar 5 bar / 500 kPa
kPa
D38 1) 200 to 200 mbar / 20 to 20 3.3 bar 0.4 bar 5 bar / 500 kPa
kPa
D39 1) 300 to 300 mbar / 30 to 30 5.3 bar 1 bar 8 bar / 800 kPa
kPa

PMC131 Order code

For continuation of ordering information of PMC131, see the following page.

1) Span set and calibrated at the factory

18 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 236
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

PMC131 (continued) 50 Measuring range; MWP; Nominal value; OPL:


Measuring range MWP Nominal OPL
(Maximum value (Over Pressure
Working Limit)
Pressure)
Sensors for gauge pressure
Q4D 0 to 1.5 psi 40 psi 1.5 psi 60 psi
Q4F 1) 0 to 5 psi 80 psi 6 psi 120 psi
Q4H 0 to 15 psi 100 psi 15 psi 150 psi
Q4K 0 to 30 psi 180 psi 30 psi 270 psi
Q4N 1) 0 to 50 psi 250 psi 60 psi 375 psi
Q4R 0 to 150 psi 400 psi 150 psi 600 psi
Q4S 0 to 300 psi 400 psi 300 psi 600 psi
Q4T 1) 0 to 500 psi 600 psi 600 psi 900 psi
V6F 1) 1.5 to 1.5 psi 50 psi 3 psi 75 psi
V6N 1) 15 to 15 psi 100 psi 30 psi 150 psi
V6R 1) 15 to 30 psi 250 psi 60 psi 375 psi
V6S 15 to 60 psi 250 psi 60 psi 375 psi
V6V 15 to 150 psi 400 psi 150 psi 600 psi
S4N 1) 0 to 50 inH2O 50 psi 3 psi 75 psi
S4Q 1) 0 to 100 inH2O 80 psi 6 psi 120 psi
W6N 1) 15 to 15 inH2O 40 psi 3 psi 60 psi
W6O 1) 80 to 80 inH2O 50 psi 6 psi 75 psi
W6R 1) 15 to 30 inH2O 50 psi 3 psi 75 psi
Sensors for absolute
pressure
A2G 0 to 1 bar / 0 to 100 kPa 6.7 bar 1 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A2H 1) 0 to 1.6 bar / 0 to 160 kPa 12 bar 2 bar 18 bar / 1.8 MPa
A2K 0 to 2 bar / 0 to 200 kPa 12 bar 2 bar 18 bar / 1.8 MPa
A2Q 0 to 4 bar / 0 to 400 kPa 16.7 bar 4 bar 25 bar / 2.5 MPa
A2R 1) 0 to 6 bar / 0 to 600 kPa 26.7 bar 10 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A2S 0 to 10 bar / 0 to 1 MPa 26.7 bar 10 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A2T 1) 0 to 16 bar / 0 to 1.6 MPa 26.7 bar 20 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A2V 0 to 20 bar / 0 to 2 MPa 26.7 bar 20 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A2W 1) 0 to 25 bar / 0 to 2.5 MPa 40 bar 40 bar 60 bar / 6 MPa
A2X 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 4 MPa 40 bar 40 bar 60 bar / 6 MPa
D20 1) 0 to 100 mbar / 0 to 10 kPa 3.3 bar 0.2 bar 5 bar / 500 kPa
D22 0 to 200 mbar / 0 to 20 kPa 3.3 bar 0.2 bar 5 bar / 500 kPa
D24 0 to 400 mbar / 0 to 40 kPa 5.3 bar 0.4 bar 8 bar / 800 kPa
R4D 1) 0 to 1.5 psi 50 psi 3 psi 75 psi
R4F 1) 0 to 5 psi 80 psi 6 psi 120 psi
R4H 0 to 15 psi 100 psi 15 psi 150 psi
R4K 0 to 30 psi 180 psi 30 psi 270 psi
R4N 1) 0 to 50 psi 250 psi 60 psi 375 psi
R4R 0 to 150 psi 400 psi 150 psi 600 psi
R4S 0 to 300 psi 400 psi 300 psi 600 psi
R4T 1) 0 to 500 psi 600 psi 600 psi 900 psi

PMC131 Complete order code

1) Span set and calibrated at the factory

Endress+Hauser 19

Appendix E- 237
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

PMP131 10 Electrical connection:


A1 Plug ISO 4400, M 16, IP 65/NEMA 4X (DIN 43650/A)
A2 Plug ISO 4400, NPT, IP 65/NEMA 4X
A3 5 m cable, IP 68/NEMA 6P
A4 Plug M 12, IP 65/NEMA 4X
A5 Plug DIN 43650/C, IP65, NEMA 4X

20 Process connection:
B Thread ISO 228 G , Seal DIN 3852, AISI 304, flush-mounted
1 Thread ISO 228 G , AISI 304
2 Thread ANSI MNPT FNPT, AISI 304
3 Thread ANSI MNPT bore 4 mm, AISI 304
4 Thread ISO 228 G , AISI 304
5 Thread ANSI MNPT bore 3.5 mm, AISI 304
6 Thread M 20 x 1.5

30 Output:
0 Analog current output 4 to 20 mA, SIL
D Analog current output 4 to 20 mA, SIL, ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ib IIC T6
1 Analog current output 4 to 20 mA, SIL, ATEX II 2 G EEx ib IIC T6
5 Analog current output 4 to 20 mA, SIL, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6
2 Switch output PNP, 3-wire
3 Switch output PNP, 3-wire, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6
6 Analog voltage output 0...10 V

40 Additional options:
1 Without additional equipment
S GL/RINA marine approval
2 Final inspection report

50 Sensor range; MWP; OPL:


Sensor range MWP (maximum working OPL (over pressure limit)
pressure)
Sensors for gauge pressure
A1G 0 to 1 bar / 0 to 100 kPa 2.7 bar 4 bar / 400 kPa
A1H 0 to 1.6 bar / 0 to 160 kPa 4 bar 6.4 bar / 640 kPa
A1N 0 to 2.5 bar / 0 to 250 kPa 6.7 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A1Q 0 to 4 bar / 0 to 400 kPa 10.7 bar 16 bar / 1.6 MPa
A1R 0 to 6 bar / 0 to 600 kPa 16 bar 24 bar / 2.4 MPa
A1S 0 to 10 bar / 0 to 1 MPa 25 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A1T 0 to 16 bar / 0 to 1.6 MPa 25 bar 64 bar / 6.4 MPa
A1W 0 to 25 bar / 0 to 2.5 MPa 25 bar 100 bar / 10 MPa
A1X 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 4 MPa 60 bar 160 bar / 16 MPa
A1Z 0 to 60 bar / 0 to 6 MPa 60 bar 240 bar / 24 MPa
A70 0 to 100 bar / 0 to 10 MPa 100 bar 400 bar / 40 MPa
A71 0 to 160 bar / 0 to 16 MPa 160 bar 600 bar / 60 MPa
A73 0 to 250 bar / 0 to 25 MPa 250 bar 600 bar / 60 MPa
A74 0 to 400 bar / 0 to 40 MPa 400 bar 600 bar / 60 MPa
Q4H 0 to 15 psi 40 psi 60 psi
Q4K 0 to 30 psi 100 psi 150 psi
Q4N 0 to 50 psi 160 psi 240 psi
Q4R 0 to 150 psi 400 psi 600 psi
Q4S 0 to 300 psi 400 psi 1500 psi
Q4T 0 to 500 psi 1000 psi 2400 psi
Q4V 0 to 1000 psi 1000 psi 3600 psi
Q70 0 to 1500 psi 1500 psi 6000 psi
Q73 0 to 3000 psi 3000 psi 9000 psi
Q74 0 to 6000 psi 6000 psi 9000 psi

PMP131 Order code

For continuation of ordering information of PMP131, see the following page.

20 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 238
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

PMP131 (continued) 50 Sensor range; MWP; OPL:


Sensor range MWP (maximum working OPL (over pressure limit)
pressure)
Sensors for absolute pres-
sure
A2G 0 to 1 bar / 0 to 100 kPa 2.7 bar 4 bar / 400 kPa
A2H 0 to 1.6 bar / 0 to 160 kPa 4 bar 6.4 bar / 640 kPa
A2N 0 to 2.5 bar / 0 to 250 kPa 6.7 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A2Q 0 to 4 bar / 0 to 400 kPa 10.7 bar 16 bar / 1.6 MPa
A2R 0 to 6 bar / 0 to 600 kPa 16 bar 24 bar / 2.4 MPa
A2S 0 to 10 bar / 0 to 1 MPa 25 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A2T 0 to 16 bar / 0 to 1.6 MPa 25 bar 64 bar / 6.4 MPa
A2W 0 to 25 bar / 0 to 2.5 MPa 25 bar 100 bar / 10 MPa
A2X 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 4 MPa 60 bar 160 bar / 16 MPa
A2Z 0 to 60 bar / 0 to 6 MPa 60 bar 240 bar / 24 MPa
B70 0 to 100 bar / 0 to 10 MPa 100 bar 400 bar / 40 MPa
B71 0 to 160 bar / 0 to 16 MPa 160 bar 600 bar / 60 MPa
B73 0 to 250 bar / 0 to 25 MPa 250 bar 600 bar / 60 MPa
B74 0 to 400 bar / 0 to 40 MPa 400 bar 600 bar / 60 MPa
R4H 0 to 15 psi 40 psi 60 psi
R4K 0 to 30 psi 100 psi 150 psi
R4N 0 to 50 psi 160 psi 240 psi
R4R 0 to 150 psi 400 psi 600 psi
R4S 0 to 300 psi 400 psi 1500 psi
R4T 0 to 500 psi 1000 psi 2400 psi
R4V 0 to 1000 psi 1000 psi 3600 psi
R70 0 to 1500 psi 1500 psi 6000 psi
R73 0 to 3000 psi 3000 psi 9000 psi
R74 0 to 6000 psi 6000 psi 9000 psi

PMP131 Complete order code

Endress+Hauser 21

Appendix E- 239
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

PMP135 10 Electrical connection:


A1 Plug ISO 4400, M 16, IP 65/NEMA 4X
A2 Plug ISO 4400, NPT, IP 65/NEMA 4X
A3 5 m cable, IP 68/NEMA 6P
A4 Plug M 12, IP 65/NEMA 4X

20 Process connection:
F Clamp ISO 2852, DN 22 ("), AISI 316L, 3A, DIN 32676 DN 20, EHEDG
G Tri-Clamp ISO 2852, DN 25 to 38 (1" to 1"), AISI 316L, 3A, DIN 32676 DN 25 to 40, EHEDG
H Tri-Clamp ISO 2852, DN 40 to 51 (2"), AISI 316L, 3A, DIN 32676 DN 50, EHEDG
M Thread ISO 228, G 1, with metallic sealing taper, AISI 316L, flush-mounted, adapter 52005087
N Thread ISO 228, G 1, with sealing surface for flush-mounted installation, AISI 316L, adapter 52001051
S SMS 1", PN 25, AISI 316L, 3A, EHEDG

30 Output:
0 Analog 4 to 20 mA, SIL
D Analog 4 to 20 mA, SIL, ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ib IIC T6
1 Analog 4 to 20 mA, SIL, ATEX II 2 G EEx ib IIC T6
5 Analog 4 to 20 mA, SIL, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6
2 Switch output PNP, 3-wire
3 Switch output PNP, ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6

40 Additional options:
1 Without additional equipment
C EN10204-3.1 material (wetted) inspection certificate
2 Final inspection report

50 Sensor range; MWP; OPL:


Sensor range MWP (maximum working OPL (over pressure limit)
pressure)
Sensors for gauge pressure
A1G 0 to 1 bar / 0 to 100 kPa 2.7 bar 4 bar / 400 kPa
A1H 0 to 1.6 bar / 0 to 160 kPa 4 bar 6.4 bar / 640 kPa
A1N 0 to 2.5 bar / 0 to 250 kPa 6.7 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A1Q 0 to 4 bar / 0 to 400 kPa 10.7 bar 16 bar / 1.6 MPa
A1R 0 to 6 bar / 0 to 600 kPa 16 bar 24 bar / 2.4 MPa
A1S 0 to 10 bar / 0 to 1 MPa 25 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A1T 0 to 16 bar / 0 to 1.6 MPa 25 bar 64 bar / 6.4 MPa
A1W 0 to 25 bar / 0 to 2.5 MPa 25 bar 100 bar / 10 MPa
A1X 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 4 MPa 60 bar 160 bar / 16 MPa
Q4H 0 to 15 psi 40 psi 60 psi
Q4K 0 to 30 psi 100 psi 150 psi
Q4N 0 to 50 psi 160 psi 240 psi
Q4R 0 to 150 psi 400 psi 600 psi
Q4S 0 to 300 psi 400 psi 1500 psi
Q4T 0 to 500 psi 1000 psi 2400 psi
Sensors for absolute pres-
sure
A2G 0 to 1 bar / 0 to 100 kPa 2.7 bar 4 bar / 400 kPa
A2H 0 to 1.6 bar / 0 to 160 kPa 4 bar 6.4 bar / 640 kPa
A2N 0 to 2.5 bar / 0 to 250 kPa 6.7 bar 10 bar / 1 MPa
A2Q 0 to 4 bar / 0 to 400 kPa 10.7 bar 16 bar / 1.6 MPa
A2R 0 to 6 bar / 0 to 600 kPa 16 bar 24 bar / 2.4 MPa
A2S 0 to 10 bar / 0 to 1 MPa 25 bar 40 bar / 4 MPa
A2T 0 to 16 bar / 0 to 1.6 MPa 25 bar 64 bar / 6.4 MPa
A2W 0 to 25 bar / 0 to 2.5 MPa 25 bar 100 bar / 10 MPa
A2X 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 4 MPa 60 bar 160 bar / 16 MPa
R4H 0 to 15 psi 40 psi 60 psi
R4K 0 to 30 psi 100 psi 150 psi
R4N 0 to 50 psi 160 psi 240 psi
R4R 0 to 150 psi 400 psi 600 psi
R4S 0 to 300 psi 400 psi 1500 psi
R4T 0 to 500 psi 1000 psi 2400 psi

PMP135 Complete order code

22 Endress+Hauser

Appendix E- 240
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Cerabar T

Accessories
Welding neck with Welding neck for flush-mounted installation of the
mm (inch)
sealing taper process connection G1 A with metallic sealing
taper (PMP135, version M)
Material: AISI 316L (1.4435)

(1.1)
27.5

(1.2)
30
Order number: 52005087
with inspection certificate 3.1 50
Order number: 52010171 (2)
P01-PMP135xx-00-xx-00-xx-002

Pressure sensor dummy for welding the welding


neck without any problems with order number
52005087 or 52010171
Material: CuZn
Order number: 52005272

Welding neck with Welding neck for flush-mounted installation of the 41 (1.6) mm (inch)
sealing surface process connection G1 A with sealing surface
G1
(PMP135, version N) ISO 228
Material: AISI 316L (1.4435)

24.6

(1.2)
29.6
(1)
Gasket (enclosed): silicone O-ring
Order number: 52001051
60 0.4
Optional with inspection certificate 3.1 (2.40.02 )
Order number: 52011896 P01-PMP13xxx-00-xx-00-xx-005

Plug-in jack Plug-in jack M 12x1, straight


Self-made connection to M 12x1 housing plug
Material: Handle body PA; Coupling nut CuZn,
nickel-plated, degree of protection (inserted): IP 67
Order number: 52006263

P01-PMP13xxx-00-xx-00-xx-003

Plug-on display 4-digit red LED display for looping into 4 to 20 mA


PHX20/PHX21 circuit via elbow plug
DIN 43650, rotatable in 90 steps, programmable
via 2 keys
42 (1.7)

Display range: 1999 to +9999


Degree of protection: IP 65 42
Material: Housing Pa6 GF30, front screen PMMA
Voltage drop: 5 V (corresponds to max. 250
load) 42 42
(1.7) 48 48
(1.9)
Approval for PHX21: ATEX II 2G
Order number PHX20: 52022914 P01-PHX2xxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-002

Order number PHX21: 52022915

Endress+Hauser 23

Appendix E- 241
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Documentation
Field of Activities Pressure measurement, powerful measuring devices for process pressure, differential pressure, level
and flow: FA004P/00/en

Technical Information EMC test procedures: TI241F/00/en

Operating Instructions Cerabar T PMC131: KA085P/00/a3


Cerabar T PMP131: KA103P/00/a3
Cerabar T PMP135: KA198P/00/a3

Functional Safety Manual (SIL) Cerabar T PMP131, PMP135: SD160P/00/en

Safety Instructions Cerabar T PMC131


ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T4: XA191P/00/a3
Cerabar T PMP131
ATEX II 1/2 G or 2 G EEx ib IIC T6: XA142P/00/a3
ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6: XA191P/00/a3
Cerabar T PMP135
ATEX II 1/2 G or 2 G EEx ib IIC T6: XA142P/00/a3
ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6: XA191P/00/a3

Instruments International

Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland

Tel. +41 61 715 81 00


Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com

TI415P/00/en/07.08
71082613
CCS/FM+SGML 6.0

Appendix E- 242
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Operating instructions
Optical distance sensor
UK
O1D100
O1D103
704099 / 03 08 / 2009

Appendix E- 243
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Contents
1 Preliminary note4
1.1 Symbols used4
1.2 Warning signs used4
2 Safety instructions4
3 Functions and features6
3.1 Applications6
4 Functions6
4.1 Output function hysteresis6
4.2 Output function window6
4.3 Analogue output function6
5 Installation7
5.1 Installation conditions7
5.2 Mounting accessories7
6 Electrical connection8
7 Operating and display elements9
8 Menu10
8.1 Menu structure10
8.2 Explanation of the menu 11
9 Operating modes13
9.1 Run mode13
9.2 Display mode13
9.3 Align mode13
9.4 Programming mode13
10.Parameter setting14
10.1 Parameter setting in general14
10.1.1 Setting of the parameter value14
10.1.2 Change from menu level 1 to menu level 215
10.1.3 Electronic lock15
10.2 Configuration of the basic settings16
10.2.1 Selection of the display unit16
10.2.2 Setting of the display16
10.2.3 Configuration of OUT1 16
2
Appendix E- 244
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.2.4 Hysteresis function17


10.2.5 Setting of the switch point for hysteresis function OUT118
10.2.6 Window function18
10.2.7 Setting of the switch points for window function OUT119
10.2.8 Configuration of OUT2 20
10.2.9 Setting of the switch point for hysteresis function OUT220
10.2.10 Setting of the switch points for window function OUT220
10.2.11 Scaling of the measuring range (analogue output)20
10.3 Teach mode22
10.3.1 Setting of the sampling rate22 UK
10.3.2 Setting of the repeatability22
10.3.3 Table repeatability and accuracy22
10.4 Extended functions23
10.4.1 Setting of the time delay for switching outputs23
10.4.2 Setting of the damping of the measured signal23
10.4.3 Reset of all parameters to factory setting24
10.4.4 Display of the software version number24
11 Set-up / operation24
11.1 Fault indication24
12 Maintenance, repair and disposal25
13 Scale drawing26
14 Factory setting27

3
Appendix E- 245
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

1 Preliminary note
1.1 Symbols used
Instruction
> Reaction, result
[] Designation of pushbuttons, buttons or indications
Cross-reference
Important note
Non-compliance can result in malfunctions or interference.
Information
Supplementary note.
1.2 Warning signs used
WARNING
Warning of serious personal injury.
Death or serious irreversible injuries may result.

2 Safety instructions
Please read this document prior to set-up of the unit. Ensure that the product is
suitable for your application without any restrictions.
Improper or non-intended use may lead to malfunctions of the unit or to unwan-
ted effects in your application. That is why installation, electrical connection,
set-up, operation and maintenance of the unit must only be carried out by
qualified personnel authorised by the machine operator.
In case of malfunction of the unit please contact the manufacturer. If the unit is
tampered with and/or modified, any liability and warranty is excluded.

4
Appendix E- 246
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

WARNING
Visible laser light; laser protection class 2.
Use of controls or adjustments other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure. Damage to the retina is possible.
Do not stare into the laser beam!
Apply the enclosed labels (laser warning) in the immediate vicinity of the unit.
Adhere to the caution and warning notes on the product label.
Use the enclosed label for the power supply cable.

UK
Label for supply cable

Product label

5
Appendix E- 247
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

3 Functions and features


The unit is used as an optical distance sensor.
3.1 Applications
The optical distance sensor measures distances between 0.2 and 10 m.
It has a background suppression at >10...19m.
The measured value is shown in a 10-segment display.
According to the set output functions 2 output signals can be generated.
O1D100:Certification 21CFRPART1040
The distance between the sensor and the background must be limited to
max. 19 m by the customer. Otherwise the measured value may be ambi-
guous. 5.1 Installation conditions
As an alternative article O1D105 can be used (the distance between
sensor and background can be max. 100 m).

4 Functions
4.1 Output function hysteresis
The hysteresis keeps the switching state of the output stable if the measured
value varies about the sensing range. Both outputs (OUT1 and OUT2) can be set
as hysteresis function. 10.2.4 Hysteresis function
4.2 Output function window
The window function enables the monitoring of a defined acceptable range. Both
outputs (OUT1 and OUT2) can be set as window function.
10.2.6 Window function
4.3 Analogue output function
The sensor can also output an analogue signal on output 2 (OUT2) which is
proportional to the distance. 10.2.11 Scaling of the measuring range (analogue
output).

6
Appendix E- 248
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

5 Installation
5.1 Installation conditions
Install the unit so that the object to be detected is within a measuring range of
0.2...10 m.
The unambiguity range of the sensor is fixed to 19.2 m. Objects within a range
>1019.2m are suppressed.
Reflecting objects in the direct beam path of the sensor - also in the range
>19.2m are to be avoided by the customer. Otherwise the measured
values may be ambiguous. UK

5.2 Mounting accessories


The unit is supplied without mounting accessories.
Examples of mounting accessories Art. no.
Protective cover O1D E21133
Mounting set E2D101 + E20938 + E20951 E21079
Mounting set O1D (for rod mounting 12mm) E2D101
Mounting rod straight 12mm/M10 E20938
Mounting set O1D (for rod mounting 14mm) E2D111
Mounting rod straight 14mm/M12 E20939
Fixture for mounting and fine adjustment of O1D laser units
E1D100
(rod or free-standing; depending on the clamp)

Example mounting:
1: Mounting set for 12mm rod
art. no. E2D101
2: Mounting rod straight 12mm/M10
2 art. no. E20938

7
Appendix E- 249
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

6 Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Ensure voltage supply according to EN50178, SELV, PELV.
O1D100:cULus, Supply Class2
Disconnect power.
Connect the cable as follows:
O1D100 PNP






O1D103 NPN






Core colours of ifm sockets:


1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black)

8
Appendix E- 250
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

7 Operating and display elements

UK

1: 4 x LED green Lighting LED = power and set display unit (mm, m, inch)
2: 4 x LED yellow Indication of the switching status; lights, if the corresponding
(two not con- output is switched.
nected)
3: 4-digit alphanume- Indication of the measured distance, the parameters and para-
ric display meter values.
4: Programming Setting of the parameter values (scrolling by holding pressed;
button incrementally by pressing once).
[SET]
5: Programming
Selection of the parameters and acknowledgement of the para-
button
meter values.
[MODE/ENTER]

9
Appendix E- 251
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

8 Menu
8.1 Menu structure

= [MODE/ENTER] = [SET]

10
Appendix E- 252
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

8.2 Explanation of the menu


For the factory settings please refer to the end of these instructions
( 14 Factory setting).
Configuration for output 1
4 switching functions can be selected:
[Hno], [Hnc], [Fno], [Fnc] 10.2.3 Configuration of OUT1
Switch point for hysteresis function OUT1
Limit value at which the output with selected hysteresis function changes
its switching state (object nearer/farther than distance set).
[SP1] is only active if [OU1] = [Hno] or [Hnc]. UK
10.2.5 Setting of the switch point for hysteresis function OUT1
Switch points for window function OUT1
Limit values at which the output with selected window function changes its
switching state (object present / not present between the distance "near"
and the distance "far").
[nSP1] = switch point near / [FSP1] = switch point far.
[nSP1]/[FSP1] are only active if [OU1] =[Fno] or [Fnc].
10.2.7 Setting of the switch points for window function OUT1
Configuration for output 2
4 switching functions and 2 analogue signals can be selected:
[Hno], [Hnc], [Fno], [Fnc], [I], [U] 10.2.8 Configuration of OUT2
Switch point for hysteresis function OUT2
Limit value at which the output with selected hysteresis function changes
its switching state (object nearer/farther than distance set).
[SP2] is only active if [OU2] = [Hno] or [Hnc].
10.2.9 Setting of the switch point for hysteresis function OUT2
Switch points for window function OUT2
Limit values at which the output with selected window function changes its
switching state (object present / not present between the distance "near"
and the distance "far").
[nSP2] = switch point near / [FSP2] = switch point far.
[nSP2] / [FSP2] are only active if [OU2] = [Fno] or [Fnc].
10.2.10 Setting of the switch points for window function OUT2
Analogue start point
Measured value at which 4 mA / 0 V are provided.
[ASP] is only active if [OU2] = [I] or [U].
10.2.11 Scaling of the measuring range (analogue output)

11
Appendix E- 253
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Analogue end point


Measured value at which 20 mA / 10 V are provided.
[AEP] is only active if [OU2] = [I] or [U].
10.2.11 Scaling of the measuring range (analogue output)
Teach mode
Selection "sampling rate" or "repeatability"
10.3 Teach mode

Extended functions
Press [SET] to open the submenu "Extended functions"
10.4 Extended functions
Delay for the switching outputs
[dSx]=switch-on delay;[drx] =switch-off delay.
The output does not immediately change its switching status when the
switching condition is met but only after the delay has elapsed. If the swit-
ching condition is no longer met after the delay has elapsed, the switching
status of the output does not change.
[dS2] and [dr2] are not effective if [OU2] = [I] or [U].
10.4.1 Setting of the time delay for switching outputs
Damping of the measured signal
This function allows to suppress short-time saturation of the measuring
element (such saturation can result from direct reflection or strong fluctu-
ations in brightness).
During the delay set, the latest valid value measured is displayed, the
output signals remain unchanged.
10.4.2 Setting of the damping of the measured value
Display setting
7 settings can be selected:
[d1], [d2], [d3], [rd1], [rd2], [rd3], [OFF]
10.2.2 Setting of the display
Setting of the display unit
Selection of the unit of measurement for [SP1], [SP2], [ASP], [AEP]
Selection options:[mm][m][inch]
10.2.1 Selection of the display unit
Restore factory setting
10.4.3 Reset of all parameters to factory setting
Display of the software version number
10.4.4 Display of the software version number

12
Appendix E- 254
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

9 Operating modes
9.1 Run mode
The run mode is the normal operating mode.
After power on the unit is in the Run mode. It carries out its monitoring function
and generates output signals according to the set parameters.
The display indicates the current distance, the yellow LEDs signal the switching
status of the outputs.
9.2 Display mode UK
Indication of the parameters and the set parameter values.
Press [MODE/ENTER] briefly.
>> Unit goes to the Display mode. Internally it remains in the operating mode.
The set parameter values can be read.
To scroll through the parameters, press [MODE/ENTER] briefly.
To display the respective parameter value, press [SET] briefly.
>> After 15 s the unit returns to the Run mode.
9.3 Align mode
Display of the orientation value for the signal strength.
Press [SET] in the Run mode.
>> The unit displays an orientation value for the signal strength
(+100 corresponds to a white object, +020 corresponds to a grey object).
9.4 Programming mode
Setting the parameter values 10.1 Parameter setting in general

13
Appendix E- 255
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.Parameter setting
During parameter setting the unit remains internally in the operating mode. It
continues its monitoring function with the existing parameters until the change has
been finished.
10.1 Parameter setting in general
10.1.1 Setting of the parameter value
Select the display unit [Uni] before you define the values for the parame-
ters. In case of subsequent changes of the display unit rounding errors
during internal conversion to other units may falsify the set values.
10.2.1 Selection of the display unit

Selection of the parameter


1 Press [MODE/ENTER] until the

requested parameter is displayed.

Setting of the parameter value


Press [SET] and keep it pressed.
>> The current parameter value flashes
for 5 s.
2 Increase the setting value incremen-

tally by pressing the button once or


continuously by pressing it permanently.
Decrease the value: let the display move to the maximum setting value. Then the
cycle starts again at the minimum setting value.

Confirmation of the parameter


value
3 Press [MODE/ENTER] briefly.
>> The parameter is displayed again; the

new parameter value is effective.

Setting of other parameters


4
Start again with step 1.

Finishing the parameter setting


5 Wait for 15 s or press [MODE/ENTER].
>> The current measured value is displayed.

14
Appendix E- 256
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.1.2 Change from menu level 1 to menu level 2


Press [MODE/ENTER] several times until
[EF] is displayed.

Press [SET] briefly.


>> The first parameter of the sub-menu is
displayed (here: [dr1]). UK

10.1.3 Electronic lock


The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional settings. On delivery
the unit is not locked.
Locking
Make sure that the unit is in the normal
operating mode.
Keep [MODE/ENTER] + [SET] pressed
until [Loc] is displayed.
>> The unit is locked.
[Loc] is displayed briefly if you try to change parameter values on the locked unit during
operation.

Unlocking
Keep [MODE/ENTER] + [SET] pressed
until [uLoc] is displayed.
>> The unit is unlocked.

Timeout:
If no button is pressed for 15 s during the setting procedure, the unit returns to the
Run mode with unchanged values.

15
Appendix E- 257
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.2 Configuration of the basic settings


10.2.1 Selection of the display unit
Set [Uni] before the values for the parameters [SPx], [nSPx], [FSPx],
[ASP], [AEP] are defined.
In case of subsequent changes of the display unit rounding errors during
internal conversion to other units may falsify the set values.
Change to [EF].
Select [Uni] and set the unit of measurement.
Selection of the unit of measurement:[mm],[m],[inch]
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
>> The selected unit is indicated by a green LED on the display.
10.2.2 Setting of the display
Change to [EF].
Select [diS] and make the settings.
7 settings can be selected:
[d1] = update of the measured value every 50 ms.
[d2] = update of the measured value every 200 ms.
[d3] = update of the measured value every 600 ms.
[rd1], [rd2], [rd3] = display like [d1], [d2], [d3] rotated by 180.
The update of the measured value only refers to the display. It has no
effect on the outputs.
[OFF]= The measured value display is deactivated in the Run mode.
Press one button to indicate the current measured value for 15 s.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
The LEDs remain active even if the display is deactivated.
10.2.3 Configuration of OUT1
Select [OU1] and set the switching functions.
Switching functions:
[Hno] = hysteresis function / normally open
[Hnc] =hysteresis function / normally closed
[Fno] = window function / normally open
[Fnc] = window function / normally closed
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].

16
Appendix E- 258
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.2.4 Hysteresis function


The hysteresis keeps the switching state of the output stable if the measured
value varies about the sensing range. In either case set and reset points are
symmetrically arranged around the selected switch point [SPx]. The hysteresis
is the distance between set and reset points; it is calculated on the basis of the
repeatability with a safety factor of 1.5.
Example Hno
1. For the output function [Hno] the output switches when the object approaches
and when the switch point (A) is reached.
UK
2. When the object is removed again, the output does not switch back before the
reset point (B) is exceeded.
The reset point (B) is greater than the set point (A).
1

[SPx] = switch point; A = set point; B = reset point

When the output function [Hnc] was selected, set and reset point are reversed.
The output is switched off when the object approaches. When the object is re-
moved, the output switches on.

17
Appendix E- 259
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Switching status of the outputs


Output function Object distance (D) Output status
[Hno] D < [SPx] Closed
D > [SPx] Open
[Hnc] D < [SPx] Open
D > [SPx] Closed
Example of output function [Hno]
Sampling rate 50 Hz, distance to the object 1200 mm, grey value (18 % remission):
Hysteresis = 10 mm (repeatability 10.3.3 table) x factor 1.5 = 15 mm
-- Reset point 1200 mm + (15 mm) = 1215 mm
-- Set point 1200 mm - (15 mm) = 1185 mm

10.2.5 Setting of the switch point for hysteresis function OUT1


Select the output function [Hno] or [Hnc] at [OU1].
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [SP1] and set the switch point.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
10.2.6 Window function
It is possible to define a window for the object recognition for each of the two
outputs (OUT1 / OUT2).
Switches off when the object is detected


[nSPx] = switch point "near"; [FSPx] = switch point "far"; FE = window


If the measured value is between the switch point "near" [nSPx] and the switch
point "far" [FSPx], the output is open (when [OUx] = [Fnc]).

18
Appendix E- 260
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Switches when the object is detected




[nSPx] = switch point "near"; [FSPx] = switch point "far"; FE = window


If the measured value is between the switch point "near" [nSPx] and the switch UK
point "far" [FSPx], the output is closed (when [OUx] = [Fno]).
Switching status of the outputs
Output function Object distance (D) Output status
D < [nSPx]
Open
[Fno] D > [FSPx]
[nSPx] < D < [FSPx] Closed
D < [nSPx]
Closed
[Fnc] D > [FSPx]
[nSPx] < D < [FSPx] Open
Both window limit values ([nSPx] and [FSPx]) work with a switching hysteresis
10.2.4 Hysteresis function / example of the output function [Hno].
10.2.7 Setting of the switch points for window function OUT1
Select the output function [Fno] or [Fnc] at [OU1].
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [nSP1] and set the switch point "near".
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [FSP1] and set the switch point "far".
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].

19
Appendix E- 261
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.2.8 Configuration of OUT2


Select [OU2].
Set the switching functions or analogue signals:
[Hno] = hysteresis function / normally open
[Hnc]=hysteresis function / normally closed
[Fno] = window function / normally open
[Fnc] = window function / normally closed
[I] = current output analogue 4...20 mA
[U] = voltage output analogue 0...10 V
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
10.2.9 Setting of the switch point for hysteresis function OUT2
Select [Hno] or [Hnc] at [OU2].
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [SP2] and set the switch point.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
10.2.4 Hysteresis function
10.2.10 Setting of the switch points for window function OUT2
Select [Fno] or [Fnc] at [OU2].
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [nSP2] and set the switch point "near".
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [FSP2] and set the switch point "far".
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
10.2.6 Window function
10.2.11 Scaling of the measuring range (analogue output)
Select [I] or [U] at [OU2].
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [ASP] and set "Analogue start point".
With [ASP] you define at which measured value the output signal is
4 mA / 0 V.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Select [AEP] and set the "Analogue end point".
With [AEP] you define at which measured value the output signal is
20 mA / 10 V. It can also be selected so that it is before [ASP]. This
implements a falling edge.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
Minimum distance between [ASP] and [AEP]:100 mm
When the minimum distance is not reached, the error message "SIZE" is
displayed.

20
Appendix E- 262
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Current output 4 ... 20 mA


Factory setting Measuring range scaled

UK

MEW = final value of the measuring range


In the set measuring range the output signal is between 4 and 20 mA.
Faults are also displayed:
Too much light or object too near: 3.5 mA for a rising edge ([ASP] < [AEP]), 20.5 mA for a
falling edge ([ASP] > [AEP]).
Object too far or no object present:
20.5mA for a rising edge;3.5mA for a falling edge.
Voltage output 0 ... 10 V
Factory setting Measuring range scaled

MEW = final value of the measuring range


In the set measuring range the output signal is between 0 and 10V.

21
Appendix E- 263
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.3 Teach mode


10.3.1 Setting of the sampling rate
The sampling rate indicates the time after which a new result of measure-
ment is provided and the outputs are updated.
The switching frequency is typ. approx. 1/3 of the sampling rate.
Select [TEAC], then press [SET] and keep pressed until [WAIT] is
displayed.
>> [rATE] and [rEPr] are displayed alternately.
When [rATE] is displayed: Press [SET] until the preset measured
sampling rate value flashes.
Enter a value incrementally by pressing [SET] once.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
>> [WAIT] is displayed while the repeatability [rEPr] is calculated.
>> The sampling rate [rATE] and the repeatability [rEPr] are displayed
alternately.
10.3.2 Setting of the repeatability
Select [TEAC], then press [SET] and keep pressed until [WAIT] is
displayed.
>> [rATE] and [rEPr] are displayed alternately.
When [rEPr] is displayed: Press [SET] until the preset repeatability
value flashes.
Enter value incrementally by pressing [SET] once.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
>> [WAIT] is displayed while the sampling rate [rATE] is calculated.
>> The sampling rate [rATE] and the repeatability [rEPr] are displayed
alternately.
10.3.3 Table repeatability and accuracy
Values for sampling rate 50 Hz*
Repeatability Accuracy
Distance white grey white grey
in[mm] 90 % remission 18 % remission 90 % remission 18 % remission
200...1000 5.0 mm 7.5 mm 15.0 mm 18.0 mm
1000...2000 5.5 mm 10.0 mm 15.0 mm 20.0 mm
2000...4000 17.5 mm 22.5 mm 25.0 mm 32.0 mm
4000...6000 27.5 mm 40.0 mm 35.0 mm 50.0 mm
6000...10000 60.0 mm 70.0 mm

22
Appendix E- 264
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Values for sampling rate 1 Hz*


Repeatability Accuracy
Distance white grey white grey
in[mm] 90 % remission 18 % remission 90 % remission 18 % remission
200...1000 4.0 mm 4.5 mm 14.0 mm 15.0 mm
1000...2000 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 14.5 mm 16.0 mm
2000...4000 13.5 mm 14.0 mm 23.5 mm 24.0 mm
4000...6000 19.0 mm 21.0 mm 29.0 mm 31.0 mm
6000...10000 37.0 mm 47.0 mm UK
*Range referred to black (6 % remission) 4000 mm.
The values apply at:
constant ambient conditions (23C / 960 hPa)
extraneous light of max. 8 klx
only after unit powered up for 10 minutes
10.4 Extended functions
10.4.1 Setting of the time delay for switching outputs
Select [EF].
Press [SET] to change to the menu [EF].
Select parameters with [MODE/ENTER]:
[dSx]=switch-on delay;[drx] =switch-off delay
Set the parameter value with [SET]:
Setting range [s]: 0 / 0.1 ... 5 s in steps of 0.1s
(0 = delay time is not active)
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].

10.4.2 Setting of the damping of the measured signal


Select [EF].
Press [SET] to change to the menu [EF].
Select [dAP].
Set the parameter value with [SET]:
Setting range [s]: 0...0.1...0.2...0.5...1...2...5.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].

23
Appendix E- 265
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

10.4.3 Reset of all parameters to factory setting


Select [EF].
Press [SET] to change to the menu [EF].
Select [rES], then press [SET] and keep it pressed until [----] is
displayed.
Confirm with [MODE/ENTER].
>> The unit changes to the Run mode.
10.4.4 Display of the software version number
Select [EF].
Press [SET] to change to the menu [EF].
Select [SW], then press [SET].
>> The software version number is displayed.
Press [MODE/ENTER] to return to the menu [EF].

11 Set-up / operation
After mounting, wiring and programming check whether the unit operates correctly.
>> If the unit has been correctly set up, the distance to the object is indicated.
Lifetime of a laser diode: 50000hours

11.1 Fault indication


Display Possible cause Switching output Current output /
voltage output
[Hno] [Hnc] [Fno] [Fnc] [ASP] < [AEP] [ASP] > [AEP]
too much light,
[++] e.g. reflective ON OFF OFF ON 3.5mA/0V 20.5mA/ 10V
surface
too little light, no
[- -] OFF ON OFF ON 20.5mA/ 10V 3.5mA/0V
object
object to be mea-
sured outside the
[nEAr] ON OFF OFF ON 3.5mA/0V 20.5mA/ 10V
measuring range
<0.2m
object to be mea-
sured outside the
[FAr] OFF ON OFF ON 20.5mA/ 10V 3.5mA/0V
measuring range
> 10m

24
Appendix E- 266
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Display Possible cause Switching output Current output /


voltage output
[Hno] [Hnc] [Fno] [Fnc] [ASP] < [AEP] [ASP] > [AEP]
[Errp] plausibility X1) X1) X1) X1) X1) X1)
(e.g. object too
fast)
[SC1] short circuit in switching output 1 2) 2)

[SC2] short circuit in switching output 2 2) 2)

[SC] short circuit in all switching outputs


1)
unchanged UK
2)
[SC1] or [SC] only active, if output 2 is configured as switching output.

12 Maintenance, repair and disposal


Faulty sensors must only be repaired by the manufacturer.
Keep the front lens of the sensor free from soiling.
After use dispose of the unit in an environmentally friendly way in accordance
with the applicable national regulations.

25
Appendix E- 267
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

13 Scale drawing

Dimensions in mm
1: 4-digit alphanumeric display / LED function display
2: programming buttons

26
Appendix E- 268
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

14 Factory setting
Parameter Setting range Factory setting Own setting
Uni mm, m, inch mm
OU1 Hno, Hnc, Fno, Fnc Hno
SP1 200...9999 1000
nSP1 200...9999 800
FSP1 200...9999 1200
OU2 Hno, Hnc, Fno, Fnc, I, U I
UK
SP2 200...9999 2000
nSP2 200...9999 1800
FSP2 200...9999 2200
ASP 0...9999 0
AEP 0...9999 9999
rATE 1...50 50Hz
dS1 0...0.1...5 0s
dr1 0...0.1...5 0s
dS2 0...0.1...5 0s
dr2 0...0.1...5 0s
dAP 0...0.1...0.2...0.5...1...2...5 0s
diS d1...3; rd1...3; OFF d3

Technical data and further information at


www.ifm.com Select your country Data sheet direct:

27
Appendix E- 269
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XPS-AC

FR GB DE
Module de surveillance pour circuits d'ARRET D'URGENCE
selon EN 418 / EN 60204-1 XPS-AC....P
Safety relay for monitoring EMERGENCY STOP circuits
according to EN 418 / EN 60204-1
berwachungsbaustein fr NOT AUS Kreise
gem EN 418 / EN 60204-1

Encombrements / Dimensions / Mae


Reprage des bornes / Terminal marking /Klemmenanzeiger
(3.89 in)
99 mm

A1 13 23 33
14 24 Y1 Y2
A1 13 23 33
14 24 Y1 Y2

A1 14 24 34
114 mm 22,5 mm A2 PE Y43 Y44
A1 14 24 34
A2 PE Y43 Y44
(4.48 in) (0.89 in)
XPS-AC....

XPS-AC.... XPS-AC....P

Fonction
La tension d'alimentation conforme la valeur marque sur la plaque
(3.89 in)
99 mm

signaltique est applique travers les contacts "O" du (ou des)


bouton(s) ARRET D'URGENCE A1/A2. Les contacts "O" des relais,
intercals la suite des sorties doivent tre insrs dans la boucle de
retour entre les bornes Y1 et Y2, en srie avec le bouton MARCHE. Par
cette mesure le dmarrage de l'appareil n'est possible que si les relais,
lis la scurit, sont retombs au repos aprs avoir reu une
commande d'arrt d'urgence.
Si l'ARRET D'URGENCE est dsactiv, la DEL A1/A2 est allume.
114 mm 22,5 mm
L'appui sur le bouton MARCHE commande les relais internes K1 et K2 et
(4.48 in) (0.89 in)
active les trois sorties libres de potentiel (13-14, 23-24 et 33-34) ainsi
XPS-AC....P que la sortie statique Y43-Y44. Dans cet tat de fonctionnement, les
DEL's A1/A2 et K1/K2 sont allumes. L'appui sur le(s) bouton(s)
ARRET D'URGENCE entrane instantanment l'ouverture des circuits
de sortie et l'extinction des deux DEL's.
! Information complmentaire
Le module ne contient pas de composants soumis maintenance par
l'utilisateur. Pour l'autorisation d'un circuit de scurit selon EN 60204-1 /
XPS-AC....P EN 418 il est impratif d'utiliser seulement les circuits de sortie libres de
potentiel entre les bornes 13-14, 23-24 et 33-34. L'utilisation du circuit de
XPS-AC.... signalisation sans contact entre les bornes Y43-Y44 est seulement
admissible pour des fonctions n'tant pas lies la scurit.
! Risques rsiduels (EN 292-1, article 5)
Le schma de raccordement propos ci-dessous a t vrifi et test
avec le plus grand soin dans des conditions de mise en service. Des
risques subsistent si:
23 33
A1 13 Y1 Y2 a) le schma de cblage ci-dessous est modifi par le changement des
14 24
23 33
A1 13 Y1 Y2 A connexions ou lajout de composants lorsque ceux-ci ne sont pas ou
14 24 P RE
VE NT
XP S - AC
TY PE A1/A2
Fuse
insuffisament integrs dans le circuit de scurit.
A K1/K2
VE NT
P RE C
S-A
TY PE
XP
A1/A2
Fuse 3
b) lutilisateur ne respecte pas les exigences des normes de scurit
33 Y4
K1/K2
K1
13 23
pour le service, le rglage et la maintenance de la machine. Il est
33 Y4
3
K2 14 24
34 Y4
4
important de respecter strictement les chances de contrle et de
13 23
24 34
K1
A1 14 Y43 Y44 maintenance.
34 Y4
4 A2 PE
K2 14 24

34
24Y44
14 Y43
A1
2 PE

1/6 02/2002

Appendix E- 270
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XPS-AC
Function Funktion
The supply voltage, as marked on the device nameplate, is applied to the Die Versorgungsspannung wird gem angegebenen Wert auf dem
N.C. contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button(s) to A1/A2 (see wiring Typenschild ber die ffner der(s) NOT AUS-Taster(s) an A1/A2
diagram). The N.C. contacts from each of the devices connected to angeschlossen. In den Rckfhrkreis zwischen den Klemmen Y1 und
safety outputs 13-14, 23-24 and 33-34 must be wired in the feedback Y2, in Reihe mit der START-Taste, sind die ffnerkontakte der den
circuit between terminals Y1 and Y2, in series with the START button. Ausgangskanlen nachgeschalteten Relais einzuschleifen. Dadurch
This assures that the device can only be started if these external gelingt eine Einschaltung des Gertes nur dann, wenn die
contactors have dropped out after a preceding EMERGENCY STOP nachgeschalteten Relais, welche sicherheitsrelevante Funktion haben,
command. nach einem vorausgegangenen NOT-AUS Befehl abgefallen waren.
If the EMERGENCY STOP button is deactivated the LED A1/A2 is lit. Bei unbettigtem NOT-AUS leuchtet die Led A1/A2. Mit Bettigung der
The actuation of the START button energizes the internal relays K1 and START-Taste werden die internen Relais K1 und K2 aktiviert und die drei
K2. The three safety outputs (13-14, 23-24 and 33-34) and the transistor potentialfreien Ausgangskanle (13-14, 23-24, 33-34) sowie der
output Y43-Y44 are switched. In this state of operation, both LEDs A1/ Transistorausgang Y43-Y44 schalten durch. Dieser Betriebszustand
A2 and K1/K2 are lit. The actuation of the EMERGENCY STOP wird durch die leuchtenden Led's A1/A2 und K1/K2 angezeigt. Mit
button(s) instantaneously opens the output contacts and the two LEDs Bettigung der der(s) NOT AUS-Taster(s) ffnen die Ausgangskreise
will go out. unverzgert und beide LED's verlschen.
! Note
! Restrisiken (EN 292-1, Punkt 5)
Safety systems are comprised of many components. No one safety
component will insure the safety of the system. The design of the Der nachstehende Schaltungsvorschlag wurde mit grter Sorgfalt unter
complete safety system should be considered before you begin. It is Betriebsbedingungen geprft und getestet. Er erfllt mit der
very important to follow applicable safety standards when installing and angeschlossenen Peripherie sicherheitsgerichteter Einrichtungen und
wiring these components. Schaltgerte insgesamt die einschlgigen Normen. Restrisiken
verbleiben wenn:
There are no user serviceable components in the module. Approved
safety devices must use only the hard contacts outputs between a) vom vorgeschlagenen Schaltungskonzept abgewichen wird und
terminals 13-14, 23-24 and 33-34. The contactless signalling circuit dadurch die angeschlossenen sicherheitsrelevanten Gerte oder
between terminals Y43-Y44 is permissable only for non-safety related Schutzeinrichtungen mglicherweise nicht oder nur unzureichend in die
functions. Sicherheitsschaltung einbezogen werden.

It is imperative that an external fuse be connected as shown on the b) vom Betreiber die einschlgigen Sicherheitsvorschriften fr Betrieb,
"WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODULE XPS-AC SAFETY RELAY". For Einstellung und Wartung der Maschine nicht eingehalten werden. Hier
maximum protection of the outputs, please refer to "TECHNICAL DATA" sollte auf strenge Einhaltung der Intervalle zur Prfung und Wartung der
(page 5/6). Maschine geachtet werden.
! Ergnzender Hinweis
! Residual risks (EN 292-1, point 5) Das Gert enthlt keine vom Anwender zu wartenden Bauteile. Zur
The following wiring diagrams have been tested under actual service Freigabe eines Sicherheitsstromkreises gem EN 60204-1 / EN 418
conditions. This module must be used for safety-related functions in sind ausschlielich die potentialfreien Ausgangskreise zwischen den
conjunction with the connected safety equipment and devices that meet Klemmen 13-14, 23-24 und 33-34 zu verwenden. Der kontaktlose
applicable standard requirements. A residual risk will remain if: Meldekreis Y43-Y44 ist lediglich fr nicht sicherheitsgerichtete Aufgaben
zulssig.
a) it is necessary to modify this recommended circuit and if the added/
modified components are not properly integrated in the control circuit.
b) the user does not follow the required standards applicable to the
operation of the machine, or if the adjustments to and maintenance of the
machine are not properly made. It is essential to strictly follow the
prescribed machine maintenance schedule.
c) the devices connected to the safety outputs do not have
mechanically-linked contacts.

WARNING
FAILURE TO PROTECT
Wire safety relay using wiring diagrams provided.
Wire to meet applicable standards requirements.
All devices connected to the safety outputs must have
mechanically-linked contacts.
It is imperative that properly sized external fuses be connected as
shown in wiring diagrams provided.
Strictly follow prescribed maintenance schedule when making
adjustments to and maintenance of machine.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

2/6 95979547103-A 2A/144/02

Appendix E- 271
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XPS-AC
Schma de cblage de XPS-AC
Wiring diagram for XPS-AC ! DANGER
Anschluplan fr XPS-AC HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Disconnect all power supplying 30V AC or 42V DC
before working on equipment.
Electric shock will result in death or serious injury.

F1
L1 (+) ESC =
(3)
S2 Conditions de dmarrage externes
S2 =
External start conditions
Bouton marche
K4 Externe Startbedingungen
Start Button
Starttaste K5
S1 +24V DC
ESC
seulement
48V/115V/230Va A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 Y43
only on XPS-AC
48V/115V/230Va unit K1 K4 K4 K4
+ LOGIC
nur bei
A1/A2 K1/K2
48V/115V/230Va T K2 K5 K5 K5
K1 K2

A2 PE 14 24 34 Y44
K4 K5
N ()
(1) =
3 Sorties de scurit
(1) (2) 3 Safety outputs
S1= 3 Sicherheitskreise
Bouton poussoir d'ARRET D'URGENCE dot de 2 contacs ouverture
(application conseille) (2) =
EMERGENCY STOP - push button with two NC contacts 1 Sortie statique
(recommended appl.) 1 Transistor output
NOT AUS - Taster mit zwei ffnerkontakten 1 Transistorausgang
(empfohlene Verwendung)
(3) =
Voir caractristiques techniques
pour le calibre maximal des
fusibles (page 5/6).
See Technical Data for maximum
fuse sizes (page 5/6).
Siehe technische Daten fr max.
Sicherung (Seite 5/6).

L1 (+) ESC =
F1 S2 = F2 F3 F4 Conditions de dmarrage externes
(3) Bouton marche (3) (3) (3) External start conditions
Start Button Externe Startbedingungen
Starttaste
S1 S2 (1) =
3 Sorties de scurit
+24V DC 3 Safety outputs
ESC
seulement 3 Sicherheitskreise
48V/115V/230Va A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 Y43
(2) =
only on XPS-AC K1 1 Sortie statique
48V/115V/230Va unit + LOGIC 1 Transistor output
nur bei A1/A2 K1/K2 1 Transistorausgang
48V/115V/230Va T K2
(3) =
K1 K2 Voir caractristiques techniques
pour le calibre maximal des
A2 PE 14 24 34 Y44 fusibles (page 5/6).
See Technical Data for maximum
fuse sizes (page 5/6).
N ()
Siehe technische Daten fr max.
Sicherung (Seite 5/6).
(1) (2)
S1=
Bouton d'ARRET D'URGENCE dot d'un contact ouverture
EMERGENCY STOP - push button with one NC contact
NOT AUS - Taster mit einem ffnerkontakt

3/6 02/2002

Appendix E- 272
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XPS-AC
Diagnostic du systme l'aide des DEL dans le couvercle du botier
System diagnostics LEDs on the front cover
Systemdiagnose mittels LED-Anzeige im Gehusedeckel

Disposition des DEL dans le couvercle du botier 1 A1/A2


Arrangement of LEDs in the cover
Anordnung der Leuchtdioden im Gehusedeckel 2 K1/K2

DEL 1: (A1/A2) LED 1: (A1/A2) LED 1: (A1/A2)


Prsence tension aux bornes A1/A2. Supply voltage is present on terminals Versorgungsspannung an den Klemmen
A1/A2. A1/A2 ist vorhanden.

DEL 2: (K1/K2) LED 2: (K1/K2) LED 2: (K1/K2)


DEL 2 indique l'tat ferm des sorties de LED 2 indicates that the outputs between LED 2 signalisiert den geschlossenen
scurit entre les bornes 13-14, 23-24 et terminals 13-14, 23-24 and 33-34 are closed. Zustand der Sicherheitsausgnge zwischen
33-34. den Klemmen 13-14, 23-24 und 33-34.

Diagramme fonctionel du XPS-AC


Functional Diagram XPS-AC
Funktionsdiagramm XPS-AC

Bouton marche
Start Button
Starttaste Arrt d'urgence
Tension ctionn
d'alimentation non ctionn ctionn Arrt d'urgence non ctionn Emergency Stop
Supply On deactivated activated Emergency Stop Deactivated Activated
Spannung Ein unbettigt bettigt Not - Aus unbettigt Not - Aus bettigt

Arrt d'urgence A1 (O1)


Emergency Stop A1 (NC1)
Not - Aus A1 (1)
Arrt d'urgence A2 (O2)
Emergency Stop A2 (NC2)
Not - Aus A2 (2)
Boucle de retour (Y1-Y2)
Feedback loop (Y1-Y2)
Rckfhrkreis (Y1-Y2)
Sortie 13-14 (F)
Output 13-14 (NO)
Ausgang 13-14 (S)
Sortie 23-24 (F)
Output 23-24 (NO)
Ausgang 23-24 (S)
Sortie 33-34 (F)
Output 33-34 (NO)
Ausgang 33-34 (S)
Sortie statique Y43-Y44 (F)
Transistor output Y43-Y44 (NO)
Transistorausgang Y43-Y44 (S)
Lgende Activ Dsactiv
Legend On Off
Legende Ein Aus

4/6

Appendix E- 273
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XPS-AC
Dure de vie des contacts de sortie selon EN 60947-5-1 / tableau C2
Electrical life of the output contacts determined by EN 60947-5-1 / table C2
Lebensdauer der Ausgangskontakte gem EN 60947-5-1 / Tabelle C2

100
Nominal Operating Current x 0.1 A

AC15: 230V
Courant de commutation x 0,1 A
Schaltstrom x 0,1 A

DC13: 24V

10

AC1: 230V
DC1: 24V

1
104 105 106 107
Cycles de manoeuvre
Operation Cycles
Schaltspiele

CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES TECHNICAL DATA TECHNISCHE DATEN


- Raccordement - Connection wires - Anschluquerschnitte
XPS-AC... XPS-AC... XPS-AC...
Single wire connection
Connection un fil Einzelleiteranschlu
Without cable end:
Sans embout: Ohne Aderendhlse:
solid 0.14-2.5 mm2 (26-14 AWG)
rigide 0,14-2,5 mm2 / flexible 0,14-2,5 mm2 starr 0,14-2,5 mm2 / flexibel 0,14-2,5 mm2
stranded 0.14-2.5 mm2 (26-14 AWG)
Flexible avec embout Flexibel mit Aderendhlse
Flexible with cable end
(sans colleret plastique): 0,25-2,5 mm2 (ohne Kunststoffhlse): 0,25-2,5 mm2
(without plastic sleeve): 0.25-2.5 mm2 (24-14 AWG)
(avec colleret plastique): 0,25-1,5 mm2 (mit Kunststoffhlse): 0,25-1,5 mm2
(with plastic sleeve): 0.25-1.5 mm2 (24-16 AWG)
Connection deux fils Mehrleiteranschlu (2 Leiter max.)
Multiple-wire connection (2 wires max.)
Sans embout: Ohne Aderendhlse:
Without cable end:
rigide 0,14-0,75 mm2 / flexible 0,14-0,75 mm2 starr 0,14-0,75 mm2 / flexibel 0,14-0,75 mm2
solid 0.14-0.75 mm2 (26-20 AWG)
Flexible avec embout stranded 0.14-0.75 mm2 (26-20 AWG) Flexibel mit Aderendhlse
(sans colleret plastique): 0,25-1 mm2 (ohne Kunststoffhlse): 0,25-1 mm2
Flexible with cable end
Flexible avec embout TWIN (without plastic sleeve): 0.25-1 mm2 (24-18 AWG) Flexibel mit TWIN-Aderendhlse
(avec colleret plastique): 0,5-1,5 mm2 (mit Kunststoffhlse): 0,5-1,5 mm2
Flexible with TWIN-cable end
(with plastic sleeve): 0.5-1.5 mm2 (22-14 AWG)
XPS-AC...P XPS-AC...P
XPS-AC...P
Connection un fil Single wire connection Einzelleiteranschlu
Sans embout: Without cable end: Ohne Aderendhlse:
rigide 0,2-2,5 mm2 / flexible 0,2-2,5 mm2 solid 0.2-2.5 mm2 (24-14 AWG) starr 0,2-2,5 mm2 / flexibel 0,2-2,5 mm2
Flexible avec embout stranded 0.2-2.5 mm2 (24-14 AWG) Flexibel mit Aderendhlse
(sans colleret plastique): 0,25-2,5 mm2 Flexible with cable end (ohne Kunststoffhlse): 0,25-2,5 mm2
(avec colleret plastique): 0,25-2,5 mm2 (without plastic sleeve): 0.25-2.5 mm2 (24-14 AWG) (mit Kunststoffhlse): 0,25-2,5 mm2
Connection deux fils (with plastic sleeve): 0.25-2.5 mm2 (24-14 AWG) Mehrleiteranschlu (2 Leiter max.)
Sans embout: Multiple-wire connection (2 wires max.) Ohne Aderendhlse:
rigide 0,2-1 mm2 / flexible 0,2-1,5 mm2 Without cable end: starr 0,2-1 mm2 / flexibel 0,2-1,5 mm2
Flexible avec embout solid 0.2-1 mm2 (24-18 AWG) Flexibel mit Aderendhlse
(sans colleret plastique): 0,25-1 mm2 stranded 0.2-1.5 mm2 (24-16 AWG) (ohne Kunststoffhlse): 0,25-1 mm2
Flexible avec embout TWIN Flexible with cable end Flexibel mit TWIN-Aderendhlse
(avec colleret plastique): 0,5-1,5 mm2 (without plastic sleeve): 0.25-1 mm2 (24-18 AWG) (mit Kunststoffhlse): 0,5-1,5 mm2
Flexible with TWIN-cable end
(with plastic sleeve): 0.5-1.5 mm2 (22-14 AWG)

5/6 02/2002

Appendix E- 274
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

XPS-AC
- Fixation du botier: - Mounting: - Gehusebefestigung:
Encliquetage sur profile chapeau 35 mm Mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Schnappbefestigung auf 35 mm
selon DIN EN 50022 according to DIN EN 50022 Normschiene nach DIN EN 50022
- Degr de protection selon IEC 529: - Degree of protection according to IEC 529: - Schutzart gem IEC 529:
Bornes : IP20 Terminals : IP20 Klemmen : IP20
Botier : IP40 Enclosure : IP40 Gehuse : IP40
- Poids: - Weight: - Gewicht:
Version 115V+230V a 0,21 kg Version 115V+230V a 0.21 kg (7.4 oz) Version 115V+230V a 0,21 kg
Version 48V a 0,21 kg Version 48V a 0.21 kg (7.4 oz) Version 48V a 0,21 kg
Version 24V z 0,16 kg Version 24V z 0.16 kg (5.6 oz) Version 24V z 0,16 kg
- Position de montage: indiffrente - Mounting position: any plane - Einbaulage: beliebig
- Temprature de fonctionnement: - Ambient operating temperature: - Umgebungstemperatur im Betrieb:
- 100 C / + 550 C -100 C to +550 C (+ 140 F to +1300 F) - 100 C / + 550 C
- Catgorie de surtension III (4kV) - Overvoltage category III (4 kV) - berspannungskategorie III (4 kV)
Degr de pollution 2 Pollution degree 2 Verschmutzungsgrad 2
Tension assigne disolement 300V Rated insulation voltage 300V Bemessungsisolationsspannung 300V
selon DIN VDE 0110 / partie 1+2 according to DIN VDE 0110 / part 1+2 gem DIN VDE 0110 / Teil 1+2
- Tension dalimentation UE selon IEC 38: - Supply voltage UE according to IEC 38: - Anschluspannung UE gem IEC 38:
230V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -15%) 230V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -15%) 230V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -15%)
115V a - 50/60 Hz (+15% / -15%) 115V a - 50/60 Hz (+15% / -15%) 115V a - 50/60 Hz (+15% / -15%)
48V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -15%) 48V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -15%) 48V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -15%)
24V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -20%) 24V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -20%) 24V a - 50/60 Hz (+10% / -20%)
24V c (+20% / -20%) 24V c (+20% / -20%) 24V c (+20% / -20%)
(voir plaque signaltique) (refer to device nameplate for supply (Siehe Typenschild)
voltage)
Protection max.: 4 A gL Absicherung max.: 4 A gL
Max. protection: 4 A fuse (gL)
- Puissance consomme: - Eigenverbrauch:
Version 230V a 5,7 VA - Power consumption: Version 230V a 5,7 VA
Version 115V a 6,8 VA Version 230V a 5.7 VA Version 115V a 6,8 VA
Version 48V a 5,7 VA Version 115V a 6.8 VA Version 48V a 5,7 VA
Version 24V a 2,5 VA Version 48V a 5.7 VA Version 24V a 2,5 VA
Version 24V c 1,2 W Version 24V a 2.5 VA Version 24V c 1,2 W
Version 24V c 1.2 W
- Sorties de scurit (libres de potentiel): - Sicherheitsausgnge (potentialfrei):
13-14, 23-24, 33-34 - Safety outputs: 13-14, 23-24, 33-34
Catgorie 3 selon EN 954-1 13-14, 23-24, 33-34 Kategorie 3 gem EN 954-1
Limite de courants cumuls (charge Category 3 according to EN 954-1 Summenstrombegrenzung bei gleichzeitiger
simultane de plusieurs circuits de sortie): The sum of simultaneous currents on all of Belastung mehrerer Ausgangskreise:
Ith 10,5 A the outputs is limited to: Ith 10,5 A
Ith 10.5 A
6A 2A 2A 6A 2A 2A
4A 4A 2A 6A 2A 2A 4A 4A 2A
3,5A 3,5A 3,5A 4A 4A 2A 3,5A 3,5A 3,5A
3.5A 3.5A 3.5A
- Protection des sorties: - Absicherung der Ausgangskreise:
max.: 4 A gL ou 6A rapide - Protection of outputs: max.: 4 A gL oder 6A Flink
max.: 4 A fuse (gL) or 6A fastblow
- Capacit de coupure maxi des sorties: - Max. Schaltleistung der Ausgangskanle:
AC 15 - C300 (1800VA/180VA) - Maximum switching capacity of outputs: AC 15 - C300 (1800VA/180VA)
DC 13 24V/2A - L/R=50ms AC 15 - C300 (1800VA/180VA) DC 13 24V/2A - L/R=50ms
DC 13 24V/2A - L/R=50ms
- Sortie statique, "F" - Transistorausgang Schlieerfunktion
(sans contact): - Transistor output, NO (kontaktlos):
Y43-Y44 (contactless): Y43-Y44
(Typiquement: 24V/20mA) Y43-Y44 (Typisch: 24V/20mA)
(Typically: 24V / 20 mA)
- Temps de rponse: 100 ms - Reaktionszeit: 100 ms
- Response time: 100 ms
L'appareil est aussi capable de commuter des Das Gert ist ebenfalls zum Schalten von
charges faibles (17V / 10mA minimum) Minimum switching ratings of outputs: Kleinstlasten (min. 17V / 10mA) geeignet. Dies
condition que le contact n'ait jamais commut ist jedoch nur dann mglich, wenn bisher ber
de forte charge auparavant, car la couche d'or The device is capable of switching low voltage diesen Kontakt keine hheren Lasten
revtant le contact pourrait tre altre. loads (min. 17 V/10 mA) provided that the geschaltet wurden, da hierdurch die
contact has never been used with higher Kontaktvergoldung abgebrannt sein knnte.
loads.

6/6

Appendix E- 275
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

W0960090001 W0960090003

W0960090002 W0960090004

Appendix E- 276
XVB L/C
4 XVBC3. XVBC4.
1 2 3 4 XVBL3. XVBL4.
2 x 4,5 - M4 3 DL1BK... OK
2 x 6 - 32
XVBC38 XVBC48
XVB-C1 2 XVBL38 XVBL48
22.1 LB.INCH DL1BD.8
2,5 Nm DL1BD.1 OK OK
DL1BK.8
DL1BK.1 OK

42
1.66"

CM12
4

3
ATTENTION

2 2 x 4,5 - M4 1
1 2 x 6 - 32 3
27 3
1.063" 2

22.1 LB.INCH IP 65
2,5 Nm 4X

1
42 IP 65
1.66" 4 4X

IP 65
3
4X

IP 65
4X

1 2 3

4.4 LB.INCH
0,5 Nm

4 x 4,5 - M4 XVB-C XVB-L


4 x 6 - 32
27 Audible / Zumbador / Buzzer / Summer / Buzzer / Cigarra
1.063" 17.7 LB.INCH XVB-C9
2 Nm
2.13"
54

XVB-C02
XVB-C03
XVB-C04 54
2.13"

4.4 LB.INCH 1 x 0,22 mm2 / # 24 AWG min XVB-C


0,5 Nm 2 x 1,5 mm2 / # 16 AWG

Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.


1 x 2,5 mm2 / # 14 AWG 5
XVB-L 5 4 D0 D1 D2 D3
4
3 (= , 70 dB)
5 3
4 2
2 3 1 1 0
C 2 Mode dB
1
C 1 D0 D1 D2 D3
1 1 1 1 1 90 dB
2,8 kHz
1 0 0 1 85 dB
5 Hz 0 1 1 0 80 dB
1 Hz 0 0 0 0 70 dB

DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER / LEBENSGEFAHR! / PERICOLO / PERIGO

Q-Filter
1 INCH = 25,4 mm
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE TENSION DANGEREUSE TENSIONE PERICOLOSA
Disconnect all power before servicing equipment. Coupez lalimentation avant de travailler sur cet appareil. Interrompere l'alimentazione prima di operare su quest'apparecchio
Appendix E- 277

Electric shock will result in death or serious injury. Une lectrocution entrainera la mort ou des blessures graves. Una scossa elettrica pu provocare la morte o ferite gravi

TENSION PELIGROSA GEFHRLICHE SPANNUNG TENSO PERIGOSA

R
Desenergice el equipo antes de realizarle servico. Alle elektrischen Anschlsse trennen, bevor Sie an diesem Gert arbeiten Cortar a alimentao antes de intervir neste aparelho.

user manual
Una descarga elctrica podr causar la muerte o lesiones serias. Ein elektrischer Schlag kann zum Tode fhren oder schwere Um choque elctrico ocasionar a morte ou ferimentos graves.
Verletzungen verursachen

W915587090111A08 1/2 08 - 2005


Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 278
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 279
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 280
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 281
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 282
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 283
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 284
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 285
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 286
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 287
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 288
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 289
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

USE AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ELECTROPUMP SERIES CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 50/60HZ.

1 SUPPLIER AND ELECTRO PUMP IDENTIFICATION DATA

1.1 Supplier data


BEDU POMPEN BV
Poort van Midden Gelderland Rood 10
6666 LT HETEREN NETHERLAND
tel.: +31 (0)88 4802 900
fax: +31 (0)88 4802 901

1.2 Electropump data


Description: CENTRIFUGAL ELECTROPUMPS
Model: CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4
Year of manufacture: SEE PLATE ON THE ELECTROPUMP

2 INFORMATION ON TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE


If the malfunction of the electropump is not among those included in the
TROUBLESHOOTING table (chapter 13.2), contact the supplier.

3 INTRODUCTION
This publications contains all the necessary information and instruction for use and
maintenance of your CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 electropumps. Follow the advice
given to obtain optimum performance and correct operation of the electropump.
For any other information you may require, please contact the supplier.

4 GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS


Failure to observe these warnings and/or tampering with the
electropump relieves BEDU POMPEN BV of any responsibility in the event
of damage to persons or things and/or to the electropump.

Before starting up the electropump it is indispensable for the user to


know how to perform all the operations described in this manual and to
apply them at all times during use or maintenance of the electropump.

There are no RESIDUAL RISKS on CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4


electropumps.
No particular technical skills are required to use CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-
FRS4 electropumps.
No personal protections are required to use CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4
electropumps.

4.1 Preventive measures to be taken by the user

a) The user must absolutely comply with all the accident prevention
regulations in force in the country in which the pump is being used; the
indication given in chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 must be scrupulously followed.
b) During electropump repairs on maintenance, remove the plug from the
socket and/or switch off the switch (if provided), thus interrupting the
supply of electric power to the electropump. This will prevent accidental
starting which could cause damage to persons and/or things.
c) All maintenance operations, installations or shifting of the electropump with
the electric system live may cause severe and even mortal accidents.

Appendix E- 290
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

d) Before using the electropump (by inserting the plug in the socket and/or
switching on the switch) with bare feet or with wet hands.
e) The user must not carry out under his own initiative any operations of jobs
not contemplated in this manual.

4.2 General Safety Warnings


CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 electropumps are designed in such a way that all the
moving parts are rendered inoffensive by the use of casings.
BEDU POMPEN BV declines all responsibility in the event of damage caused as a
result of tampering with these devices.

Each lead or live part electrically insulated to earth; there is also a further safety
device in that the accessible conductive parts are connected to an earth lead so
that the parts within reach cannot become dangerous in the event of failure of the
principal insulation.

5 DESCRIPTION

5.1 General Description


CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 electropumps are all similar from the functional and
constructive point of view; the only differences are the following:
- CR 2CR-FR-FR4: enbloc;
- FRS FRS4: enbloc with standard flanged motors and rigid sleeve coupling;
- Power
- Flow rate
- Head
- Weight
- Dimensions

CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 series electropumps are used for handling water, even


at high temperatures (chapter 6.1).
These electropumps are made of materials which guarantee long life and constant
performance if used according tot the indications given in chapter 6 and 11.
Their particular construction allows disassembly and maintenance of the motor,
replacement of the impeller and of the mechanical seal, without having to remove
the pump body from the suction and delivery pipe.
They are suitable for medium and high flow rates, complying with DIN 24255 and
UNI 7467 standard and other corresponding European standards.

5.2 Technical and Constructive Characteristics


CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 series electropumps are designed and built according
to the following design and/or construction standards:

Risks of Mechanical Nature (Annex 1, Machines Directive):


- EN 292-1 and EN 292-2
Risks of an Electrical Nature (Annex 1, Machines Directive):
- En 292-1 and 292-2
- CEI-EN 60204-1
- CEI-EN 60335-2-41
Risks of Various Nature (Annex 1, Machines Directive):
- CEE 89/37 Annex 1.

Appendix E- 291
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

6 TECHNICAL DATA CARD


Unit CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4
6.1 Pump technical Data
Max. temperature pumped fluid C 90 (110 on request)
Max. suction depth M 6 (at 35 C)
Max. working pressure bar 10
Type of impeller Closed
Type of seal on the shaft Mechanical seal
Type of bearings Shielded ball bearings
Suction diameter mm/inch 1 - 1 - 50 65 80
Deliver diameter mm/inch 1 - 32 40 50 65

6.2 Motor Technical Data


Power kW See plate on electropump
Type T.E.F.C. with forced ventilation
Poles No. 2 and 4
Insulation class F
Degree of protection IP55
Type of duty Continuous
Phase frequency voltage See plate on electropump.
For tension see the corresponding
tolerance in the picture
Structure With flange/with flange and feet

6.3 Operating data


See plate on the electropump
BEDU POMPEN BV. reserves the right to alter the Technical Data in order
to make improvements and bring them up-to-date.

7 CONTEMPLATED AND NOT CONTEMPLATED USE

ATTENTION

Failure to respect the prescribed limits constitutes a situation of use that


is technically improper and endangers the safety of persons, RELIEVING
BEDU POMPEN BV. OF ANY REPONSIBILITY IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENTS
TOT PERSONS OR DAMAGE TOT THINGS OR TOT THE ELECTROPUMP, AND
ALSO RENDERING THE GUARANTEE INVALID.

7.1 Contemplated conditions of use


CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 series electropumps may be used for the following
applications:
- CIVIL: for lifting water, booster sets, conditioning, cooling;
- AGRICULTURAL: sprinkling or flowing irrigation;
- INDUSTRIAL: handling water, washing systems, decanting non-aggressive
fluids.
Use the electropump in keeping with its technical characteristics (chapter 6).

7.2 Not Contemplated conditions of use


CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 series of electropumps cannot be used for handling
dirty water, water containing acids and corrosive liquids in general, water with
temperatures higher than those specified in 6.1 and 6.2, sea-water, inflammable
and generally dangerous liquids.
CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 electropumps must never be allowed to run without
water.

Appendix E- 292
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

8 HANDLING AND TRANSPORT

8.1 Unpacking
Check that there are no breakages of severe dents in the packing; if there are,
point this out immediately to the person who delivers the material. After removing
the electropump from the package, check that it has not suffered any damage
during transport; if damage is found, inform the dealer within 8 days of delivery.
Then check that the characteristics stated on the plate of the electropump are the
same as you requested in you order.

8.2 Handling and Disinstalling

ATTENTION

- Failure to follow these instructions may cause the electropump to fall,


suffering severe damage.
- Absolutely do not use the power cable to lift or drag the electropump.

The electropump is set up for fixed applications; before handling it you must
perform the following operations;
- Remove the plug from the power socket and/or switch off the switch, if
provided;
- Unscrew any hose clamps and remove the delivery and suction pipes;
- Roll up and hold the electric power cable in your hand;
- Lift the electropump with equipment suitable for its weight
(from 20 kg to 150 kg), being careful not to tilt it too much (max. 20) fig.6.

8.3 Transport
Depending on its dimensions, the electropump is packed in a cardboard box or
fixed onto a pallet for transport presents no particular problems.

9 INSTALLATIONS

ATTENTION

To lift of lower the electropump, use a rope suitable for its weight; never pull on
the electric power cable.

9.1 General Precautions for installations


a) Use pipes with a certain degree of rigidity or metal pipes, to prevent them
from collapsing under the vacuum that is created during suction.
b) Seal any connections in the pipes; air infiltrations in the suction pipe have a
negative influence on pump operation.
c) The suction pipe must have a foot valve and filter the prevent the entry of
foreign bodies.
d) The end of the suction pipe must be immersed at a depth of at least twice the
diameter of the pipe; it must also be at a distance of at least one a half times
the pipe diameter from the bottom of the tank.
e) On the delivery pipe, at the output of the electropump, it is advisable to fit a
no-return valve (with quick closing to reduce water hammer) and a gate valve,
in this order.
f) Anchor the pipes to the tank, or to fixed parts, so that their weight is not
borne by the electropump.
g) Avoid using too many curves and valves in the system.
h) For suction depths greater than 4 metres, use a pipe with a larger diameter to
obtain better performance.

Appendix E- 293
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

9.2 Installation
a) The electropump must be placed on a level surface, as near as possible to a
source of water.
b) When positioning the electropump, observe the minimum required distance
(fig. 1) from walls, so as to allow functioning, use and maintenance operations
in safe conditions.
c) Use pipes with a suitable diameter. Remember that the suction diameter (front
of the pump) is different from the delivery diameter (top of the pump).
d) Using a drill bit, mark the centres of the four holes for fixing the base of the
electropump to the surface on which it is to stand.
e) Move the electropump aside for a moment and drill a hole in each centre to
take a 12 mm screw; the holes must be sufficiently deep to take a plastic
expansion plug of suitable dimensions.
f) Check that the electropump pipes are correctly positioned, then tighten the
screws until the pipes are blocked in place.

9.2.1 Pipes
a) Use a suitable support for the suction and delivery pipes, to avoid altering the
alignment of the electropump.
b) Fit a no-return valve between the pump and the gate in the following cases:
- when the pipe is long;
- when the actual head is high;
- when the pump is automatic;
- when the water is pumped into a tank
- when two or more pumps are working in parallel.
c) To reduce the water hammer effect, fit a quick closing no-return valve.
d) Suction system:
- The end of the suction pipe must be immersed at a depth of at least twice
the diameter (D) of the pipe; it must also be at a distance of at least one a
half times the pipe diameter from the bottom of the tank.
- Fit a suction filter at the end of the suction filter to prevent the entry of
foreign bodies.
- The suction pipe must be tilted upwards (over 1/100) with respect to the
pump to prevent the formation of air pockets. The joints in the pipe must
be fixed so as to prevent air intake.
- The suction pipe must be as short and straight as possible.
- The dimensions of the suction pipe should be as indicated in fig. 1 to avoid
the formation of air pockets.

10 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY


The electropump has no separate accessories, so no assembly is required for
installation.
If the electropump has to be disassembled (due to breakage or any other reason),
the user must apply tot the dealer or to the assistance service.

Failure to comply with this rule renders the guarantee invalid.

10.1 Disassembly of FRS electropumps


To disassemble the motor of the FRS electropump, proceed as follows;
- Use one screwdriver remove the two protective gauzes (44), pressing forwards
the centre, operating in the slots, then remove them form their seats in the
sleeve (3) (fig. B).

Appendix E- 294
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

- Slacken the two screws (215) that fasten the coupling (6) into the end of the
motor shaft; remove the screws (206) that connect the motor flange to the
sleeve flange. For pumps coupled tot motors with structure IM 335 (B3/B5
that is with flange and feet) (fig. C end D), remove the support retraining
screws.

At this point the motor may be removed from its seat with an axial movement
To reassemble, perform the same operations in inverse order.
Apply thread locker to grub screws (215) to prevent loosing during operation.

11 PREPARATION FOR USE


For CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 electropumps three-phase version, so the direction
of rotation of the motor must be checked. The impeller must turn in a clockwise
direction when viewing the electropump from above ( see the arrow on the pump)
As it is not possible to check the direction of rotation of the impeller visually,
proceed as follows; before anchoring the electropump in the system and without
the pipes, connect the power cables to the electric panel and switch on the main
switch for a moment; the direction of rotation of the fan that cools the motor of
the electropump is the same as the direction of rotation of the impeller. If it is
turning in the wrong direction (that is, anti-clockwise), invert two of the three
leads on the motor terminal board.

11.1 Electric connection


Absolutely avoid getting the terminal board wet or damp when
connecting the electropump.

The electric connection must be carried out by a skilled technical.

For both the three-phases and the single-phase version, we advise fitting
a high-intensity differential switch in the electric system (0.03 A).

ATTENTION

- For connection to the power mains, use a cable complying with IEC standards
with a suitable section (bearing in mind the installed power, as in chapter 6)
and a suitable length; remember also the mains voltage and polarity (ch. 6).
- The power cable must be connected to the terminals as illustrated in the
wiring diagram, in accordance with standards CEI 6150/26.6.
- The mains must have an efficient earth system complying with the electrical
standards in force in the users country; the installer is responsible for
checking this.

11.2 Single-phase version (fig. 4)


The electropump must preferably be fed by means of an electric panel with a
switch and fuses. The electric panel must be prepared by a skilled technician or
bought from BEDU POMPEN BV.
All single-phase electropumps have the capacitor and motor-protector housed
inside the terminal cover box, or fixed on the outside by means of a clamp.
a) Slacken the screws that hold down the base cover, then remove it.
b) Unscrew the cap of the cable clamp and slip in the power cable, then pass the
end of the cable through the hole in the base.
c) Connect the yellow and green lead of the power cable to the earth screw.
d) Connect the power leads to the terminal board as shown in the diagram inside
the base cover.
e) When you have completed connection, screw the cable clamp onto the base,
blocking the power cable in place.
f) Replace the cover on the base and tighten the screws.

Appendix E- 295
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

11.3 Three-phase version (fig. 5)


As it is three-phase, the CR-2CR-FR-FR4-FRS-FRS4 electropump three-phase
version does not have an internal motor-protection, so the protection against
overload must be supplied by the user. The electropump must be fed by means of
an electric panel with switch, fuses and a thermal switch set at the current
absorbed by the electropump. The electric panel must be prepared by a skilled
technician or bought from
BEDU POMPEN BV.

Follow the enclosed diagram;

a) Slacken the two screws that hold down the base cover, then remove it.
b) Unscrew the cap of the cable clamp and slip in the power cable, then pass the
end of the cable through the hole in the base (see diagram).
c) Connect the yellow and green lead of the power cable to the earth screw.
d) Connect the power leads to the terminal board as shown in the diagram inside
the base cover.
e) Connect the jumpers on the terminal board in delta or star formation,
depending on the supply voltage, as shown in the diagram inside the base
cover.
f) When you have completed connection, screw the cable clamp onto the base
blocking the power cable in place.
g) Replace the cover on the base and tighten the two screws.

11.4 Filling the pump

ATTENTION

This operation must be performed with the electric base of the motor
perfectly closed.

11.5 Adjusting and registering


Check that there are no leaks in the system.
Ensure that the electropump does not vibrate abnormally during operation, is not
too noisy, and does not have large variations in pressure and electric absorption.
If any of these are found, see chapter 13.

12 USE AND START-UP


Never run the electropump without water; lack of water may cause
severe damage to the internal components.

12.1 General warnings


a) Prolonged operation of the electropump with the gate valve on the delivery
pipe closed may cause damage.
b) Avoid frequent starting and stopping of the electropump.
c) If there is an interruption in the power supply, it is advisable to switch off the
pump.

12.2 Starting
a) Ensure that the foot valve is not blocked.
b) Switch on and off two or three times to check operating conditions.
c) Begin continuous operation and gradually open the gate valve on delivery.
d) Check that noise, vibrations, pressure and electric voltage are at normal level
(see chapter 13).

Appendix E- 296
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

12.3 Stopping
a) First of all, close the gate valve on delivery (this should always be done if the
system is without no-return, especially in the presence of high heads), to
prevent overpressure in the pipes and pump due to water hammer.
b) Switch off.

13 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS

ATTENTION

Before carrying out any maintenance operations, disconnect the plug


and/or switch off.
The electropump must be dismantled only by skilled technicians. Failure
to observe this rule renders the guarantee invalid. The same applies to
repair jobs and/or replacements.

When the pump is to remain inactive for a long period, it is advisable to empty it
completely, removing the drainage and filling caps, wash it out accurately with
clean water, than drain it again, ensuring that no water is left inside it. This
operation must always be performed when there is a risk of frost, to prevent
breakages of the pump body.

13.1 Periodical check


Variations in pressure or current, abnormal vibrations or noise are signs of bad
functioning. We advise recording the operating conditions so as to detect the first
signs of malfunction.

13.2 Troubleshooting
TYPE OF FAULT
The pump does not work (the motor does not turn over)

CAUSE REMEDY
No electric power Check the contactor on the electric line
Plug not inserted Check power connection to the line
Automatic switch has tripped Reset the switch and check the cause
Incorrect electric connection Check terminal board and electric panel
Thermal protection has tripped This resets automatically (single-phase
(single-phase) only)
Faulty motor Contact the nearest dealer
Damaged bearing (noisy) Contact the nearest dealer

TYPE OF FAULT
The pump does not work (the motor turns over)

CAUSE REMEDY
Clogged filter at end of suction Dismantle and clean the filter
Foot valve blocked Clean the valve and check its operation
No water in the pump Fill the pump (ch. 11)
Pressure too low Choke the delivery gate valve

Appendix E- 297
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

TYPE OF FAULT
The pump works at a low flow rate.

CAUSE REMEDY
Foot valve partly clogged Clean the valve and check its operation
Water level too low Switch off the pump immerse the foot
valve
Wrong supply voltage Feed the pump with the voltage indicated
on the data plate
Leaking pipes Check the connections
Pressure too high Check the system

TYPE OF FAULT
The pump stops after brief periods of operation (tripping of the termal
protection)

CAUSE REMEDY
Liquid temperature too high The temperature exceeds the technical
limits of the pump
Internal defect Contact the nearest dealer

TYPE OF FAULT
The pump stops after brief periods of operation (booster set application)

CAUSE REMEDY
Very small difference between Increase the difference in pressure
maximum and minimum pressure

TYPE OF FAULT
The pump does not stop

CAUSE REMEDY
Maximum pressure too high Set the maximum pressure at lower
valvues

TYPE OF FAULT
The pump vibrates or makes too much noise while operating

CAUSE REMEDY
Flow rate too high Reduce flow rate
Cavitation Contact the nearest dealer
Irregular piping Fix the pipes better
Noisy bearing Contact the nearest dealer
Foreign bodies rubbing against the Remove the foreign bodies
motor fan

Appendix E- 298
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

DIAGRAM FOR INSTALLATION WITH MINIMUM FUNCTIONAL SPACES (fig 1).

Appendix E- 299
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

ELECTROPUMPS DISASSEMBLY DIAGRAM (fig.2)

Appendix E- 300
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

DRAWING SHOWING THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS OF A SINGLE PHASE


MOTOR-DRIVEN PUMP ( fig. 1 2 )

DRAWING SHOWING THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS OF A THREE PHASE PUMP


( fig. 3 4 - 5 )

Appendix E- 301
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

DIAGRAM FOR ELECTROPUMP LIFTING DEVICE

Appendix E- 302
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix E- 303
Q-Filter R
user manual
Project: 12389-rev1- Salico Hispania S.A.

Appendix F. Certificates.

304
Lomapro B.V.

Groenewoud 25A
NL-5151 RM Drunen
The Netherlands
Tel. +31 (0)73 2200030
Fax. +31 (0)73 2200039

Email business@q-filtration.eu

EU-statement of conformity
According the EU Machine Guideline 2006/42/EG, appendix II A

Manufacturer: Lomapro B.V.

Address: Groenewoud 25A


5151 RM Drunen
The Netherlands

We herewith declare that the following product(s),

Qty. Product /model Serial nr. Name Comment


1 QF150/07 15010206 Q-Filterfi

Applied standards:

2006/95/EG Low voltage directive


2004/108/EG EMC directive
NEN-EN-IEC 60204-1 European Machine Guideline for the electrical configuration of
machines.
manufactured under project references:

Project number: 12389


Ordered by : Salico Hispania S.A.
Order nr.: C14010-3.039
Supplied to: Salico Hispania S.A.
References: C14010-3.039

.. meets the stipulations of the above mentioned European Community Machine Guideline (as per the latest
modifications) and the national regulations and laws relative to this Guideline.

The functional test in accordance with EN 60204, paragraph 18 point f. has been carried out; during which the
equipment proved to function as required and without any problems.

Drunen, 03-02-2016,

L. J. G. van Schie

Managing director Lomapro b.v.

Bank: ABN Amro Bank n.v.


IBAN: NL85ABNA0554666758 BIC: ABNANL2A
Chamber of commerce nr. 17139598
VAT number: NL810974289B01

S-ar putea să vă placă și